2022 Mitsubishi Mirage g4 48

9290K125
2022 / Owner’s Manual
9290K125
Printed in Thailand
MITSUBISHI MOTORS
BK0302200US.book 1 ページ２０２１年２月１９日　金曜日　午後６時７分
Introduction Throughout this manual the words WARNING and CAUTION

appear.
N09200102550
These are reminders to be especially careful. Failure to follow the
Thank you for buying a MITSUBISHI MIRAGE G4. instructions could result in personal injury or damage to your vehi-
We are confident you will enjoy your vehicle. It has been engineered cle.
for optimum performance, durability and comfort. By thoroughly
reading this Owner’s Manual, you will gain an understanding of the
many features that are included in the MIRAGE G4. The Owner’s
Indicates a strong possibility of severe personal injury or death if
Manual contains descriptions and illustrations that will assist in the
instructions are not followed.
operation and maintenance of your vehicle.
Your Authorized Mitsubishi Motors Dealer will be happy to assist you

with any further questions you may have regarding the operation of Points out hazards or unsafe practices that could cause minor
your vehicle. personal injury or damage to your vehicle.
Please note that this manual applies to all MIRAGE G4 models and You will see another important symbol:
explains all features including options. Some features explained in this NOTE Gives helpful information.
manual may not be installed on your vehicle.
This vehicle is manufactured by Mitsubishi Motors (Thailand) Co.,Ltd. in Thailand under
Please leave this Owner’s Manual in the vehicle at the time of resale.
license from Mitsubishi Motors Corporation.
The next owner will appreciate having access to the information con-
tained here.
This manual includes instructions for standard and optional equipment

available at the time of printing. Mitsubishi Motors Corporation
reserves the right to make changes in design and specifications and to
make additions or improvements in its product without assuming any
obligation to install these on previously manufactured products.
©2021 Mitsubishi Motors Corporation Printed in Thailand

N09349100044
Table of contents
Overview 1
Quick index 2
General information 3
Seat and restraint systems 4
Features and controls 5
Driving safety 6
Comfort controls 7
For emergencies 8
Vehicle care and maintenance 9
Customer assistance/Reporting Safety Defects 10
Specifications 11
Alphabetical index 12
Instruments and controls
1 Instruments and controls

N00100203004
Combination headlights and dimmer switch P.5-91

Instrument cluster P.5-77
Automatic High Beam (AHB) switch (if so equipped) P.5-94
Turn-signal lever P.5-98
Front fog light switch (if so equipped) P.5-99 Hazard warning flasher switch P.5-99
Wiper and washer switch P.5-100
Engine switch (if so equipped) P.5-13
Cruise control switches

Forward Collision Mitigation system (if so equipped) P.5-56
(FCM) ON/OFF switch P.5-64
Lane Departure Warning (LDW) switch

Ignition switch (if so equipped)
(if so equipped) P.5-68
P.5-38
Active stability control (ASC) OFF switch

P.5-54 Supplemental restraint system (SRS)-airbag
(for driver) P.4-25, 4-31
Electric remote-controlled outside rearview Horn switch P.5-104
mirror switch P.5-37
Steering wheel remote control switches

[Refer to the separate owner’s manual.]
Fuses P.9-24
Steering wheel height adjustment lever P.5-34
Supplemental restraint system (SRS)-driver’s
knee airbag P.4-25, 4-32
1-1 Overview
Instruments and controls
1
Center vents P.7-2 Automatic air conditioning P.7-4
Supplemental restraint system (SRS)-airbag
(for front passenger) P.4-25, 4-31
DISPLAY AUDIO (if so equipped),
Smartphone-link Display Audio (SDA)
(if so equipped),
Clock (if so equipped)
[Refer to the separate owner’s manual.]
Electric rear window defogger switch
P.5-104
Side vents P.7-2
Engine hood release lever P.9-4 Glove compartment P.5-108
Key slot (if so equipped) P.5-21

12 V power outlets P.5-106
Cup holder (for the front seat) P.5-108
Trunk lid release lever P.5-28

Fuel tank filler door release lever USB input terminal P.5-104
P.3-3
Gearshift lever (if so equipped) P.5-41
Selector lever (if so equipped) P.5-43
Heated seats switches (if so equipped) P.4-4
Cup holder (for the rear seat) Parking brake lever P.5-33
P.5-109
Overview 1-2
Interior
1 Interior
N00100302675
Microphone (if so equipped)

Power window lock switch
P.5-31
Sun visors P.5-106 Dome light P.5-107, 9-30
Vanity mirror P.5-106
Power door lock switch Ticket holder P.5-106
P.5-27 Inside rearview mirror P.5-35
Assist grips P.5-110

Power window switch P.5-31
Bottle holders P.5-109
Seat belts P.4-7 Head restraints P.4-5

Adjustable seat belt shoulder anchor
P.4-12
Convenience hook
P.5-110
Supplemental restraint system (SRS)-curtain

airbags P.4-25, 4-36 Front seats P.4-2
Supplemental restraint system

(SRS)-side airbags (for front
Tether anchorages for child restraint seat) P.4-25, 4-36
system P.4-17 Arm rest (Driver’s seat only, if so
Trunk-through lid P.4-5 equipped) P. 4-4
Jack P.8-5
Arm rest P.4-5 Cup holder (for the rear seat)
Rear seat P.4-5
P.5-109
1-3 Overview
Luggage area
Luggage area 1
N00100501641
Trunk room light P.9-30
Tools P.8-5
Spare tire P.8-7
Overview 1-4
Outside
1 Outside
N00100603053
Sensor [for Automatic High Beam (AHB), Power window P.5-31

Forward Collision Mitigation system (FCM) Outside rearview mirrors P.5-37
and Lane Departure Warning (LDW)]
P.5-94, 5-60, 5-68
Rain sensor (if so equipped) P. 5-100 Fuel tank filler P.3-3
Windshield wipers
P.5-100
Engine hood F.A.S.T.-key (Free-hand Advanced

P.9-4 Security Transmitter) (if so equipped)
P.5-9
Keyless entry system (if so equipped)
P.5-6
Front fog lights (if so equipped) Side turn signal lights Locking and unlocking P.5-25
P.5-99, 9-29, 9-33 (if so equipped)
P.5-98, 9-29
Halogen headlights type LED headlights type
Headlights P.5-91, 9-29, 9-31 Headlights P.5-91, 9-29, 9-31
Front turn signal lights

Front turn signal lights
P.5-98, 9-29, 9-32
P.5-98, 9-29, 9-32
Front side-marker lights Front side-marker lights

Parking lights
P.5-91, 9-29, 9-31 P.5-91, 9-29, 9-31
P.5-91, 9-29, 9-33 Parking lights/Daytime running lights
P.5-91, 9-29
1-5 Overview
Outside
Tire pressure monitoring system P.5-71

High-mounted stop light Antenna P.7-11 Changing tires P.8-6
P.9-29 Size of tires and wheels P.11-5
Tire inflation pressure P.9-16
Tire rotation P.9-18
Tire chains P.9-20
Rear-view camera P.5-74
Trunk lid P.5-28
Stop lights P.9-29, 9-34

License plate lights
P.5-91, 9-29, 9-35 Rear side- marker lights P.5-91, 9-29, 9-34
Trunk lid open switch (if so equipped) Tail and stop lights P.5-91, 9-29, 9-34
P.5-13 Rear turn signal lights P.5-98, 9-29, 9-34
Back-up light P.9-29, 9-34
Overview 1-6
If this warning light comes on or flashes while you’re driving...

2
N00200702423
NOTE
 These warning lights will come on for a few seconds for a bulb check when the ignition switch is first turned to “ON” or the operation mode is put in ON.
Warning lights Do this Ref. Page
 Park your vehicle in a safe place and stop the engine.

Contact your Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility of your choice for assis- P. 5-90
tance.
Charging system warning light

Contact your Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility of your choice for assis- P. 5-15
(Illuminates and intermittent sounds) tance.
(for vehicles equipped with the
F.A.S.T.-key)
 Park your vehicle in a safe place and stop the engine, then check the engine oil
level.
If the light comes on while the engine oil level is normal, have the system checked P. 5-90
at an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility of your choice as soon
Oil pressure warning light as possible.
Quick index 2-1


 If this light comes on while driving, check to see that the parking brake is fully
2 released.
 If this light stays on after releasing the parking brake, immediately stop and check
the brake fluid level. P. 5-88
 If the brake fluid level is correct, there may be a system malfunction. Avoid hard
Brake warning light braking and high speed, and contact an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a
repair facility of your choice for assistance.
 Park your vehicle in a safe place.

Idle the engine until the selector lever position indicator stops flashing.
Selector lever position indicator in the P. 5-46
If the indicator does not go off, contact an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a
instrument cluster flashes rapidly
repair facility of your choice immediately.
(once per second)
 Although your vehicle will usually be drivable and not need towing, have the
engine system checked at an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility
of your choice immediately. If the vehicle is not drivable, contact emergency road- P. 5-89
side assistance at 1-888-648-7820, an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer, or local
Engine malfunction indicator towing company for assistance.
(“SERVICE ENGINE SOON”)
 If this light comes on while the engine is running, it may become harder to turn the
steering wheel. Have your vehicle inspected at an authorized Mitsubishi Motors P. 5-52
dealer or a repair facility of your choice as soon as possible.
Electric power steering system (EPS)
warning light
2-2 Quick index


 When this light comes on, the anti-lock braking system is not functioning and only
the ordinary braking system is functioning. 2
Test the system as described on page 5-52. P. 5-51
 If the light does not go out after the test, or if it comes on again, we recommend that
Anti-lock braking system warning you have the system checked at an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair
light facility of your choice as soon as possible.
 Immediately have the airbag and the pre-tensioner seat belt system checked at an
P. 4-31
authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer.
SRS warning light
 Have your continuously variable transmission (CVT) checked at an authorized

Selector lever position indicator in the P. 5-46
Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility of your choice immediately.
instrument cluster flashes slowly
(every 2 seconds)
Restart the engine and check whether the indicator goes out.
and  If the indicator does not go out, or if it comes on again, have your vehicle inspected
P. 5-55
by an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility of your choice as soon
as possible.
ASC indicator and ASC OFF indicator  When this indicator comes on, the active stability control is not functioning.
Quick index 2-3


2 Restart the engine and check whether the indicator goes out.
 If the indicator does not go out, or if it comes on again, have your vehicle inspected
by an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility of your choice as soon P. 5-50
as possible.
ASC indicator  When this indicator comes on, the hill start assist is not functioning.
Start off carefully on a steep uphill slope.
 If the warning light comes on, you should stop and adjust the tires to the proper
inflation pressure as soon as possible.
(See “Tire inflation pressures” on page 9-16.)
Once adjustments have been made, the warning light will go off after a few minutes
of driving. P. 5-71
 If the warning light blinks for approximately 1 minute and then remains continu-
Tire pressure monitoring system warn- ously illuminated, the system is not operating properly. If the system returns to nor-
ing light mal, the warning light will go off. If the warning light does not go off, have the
vehicle inspected at an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer.
2-4 Quick index


2
and
P.5-66
Forward Collision Mitigation system
(FCM) indicator and Forward Colli-
sion Mitigation system (FCM) OFF
indicator  Park your vehicle in a safe place and restart the engine.
 If the indicators or warning lights remain, contact an authorized Mitsubishi Motors
dealer.
 When this indicators come on, FCM, LDW and AHB are not functioning.
P.5-70
Lane Departure Warning (LDW) light

(yellow) (if so equipped)
P.5-97
Automatic High Beam (AHB) warn-

ing light (yellow) (if so equipped)
Quick index 2-5


2
and
P.5-65
(blink)
Forward Collision Mitigation system  Clean the outside surface of the windscreen of the sensor portion, and check
(FCM) indicator and Forward Colli- whether the indicators go off.
sion Mitigation system (FCM) OFF  If the indicators or warning lights remain, contact an authorized Mitsubishi Motors
indicator dealer for inspection of the sensor.
 When these indicators or warning light come on, FCM and LDW are not function-
ing.
P.5-70
(blink slowly)
Lane Departure Warning (LDW) light

(yellow) (if so equipped)
2-6 Quick index

If this problem occurs...

2
N00200902207
Problem Do this Ref. Page

Unable to turn the key.
(except for vehicles equipped
with the F.A.S.T.-key)
From “ACC” to “OFF”
Vehicles with continuously variable transmission (CVT):
P. 5-39
Check the position of the selector lever.
The key cannot be removed unless the selector lever is set to the “P” (PARK) position.
The engine does not start when

the engine switch is pressed.
F.A.S.T.-key)
Make sure the F.A.S.T.-key is in the vehicle.
Make sure the selector lever is in the “P” (PARK) position, and then press the engine switch P. 5-13
while depressing the brake pedal.
Quick index 2-7


1. Move the selector lever to the “P” (PARK) position, and then change the operation mode
2 The engine does not start and the to OFF. (for vehicles with continuously variable transmission (CVT))
operation mode cannot be 2. One of the other causes could be low battery voltage.
P. 5-14
changed to OFF. (for vehicles If this occurs, the keyless entry system and the F.A.S.T.-key operation will also not oper-
equipped with the F.A.S.T.-key) ate.
Contact an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer.
The F.A.S.T.-key does not oper-
Use the emergency key to lock and unlock the door.
ate.
Insert the F.A.S.T.-key into the key slot of the floor console, and then start the engine or P. 5-19, 5-20
change the operation mode.
F.A.S.T.-key)
Cannot shift the selector lever
from the “P” (PARK) position. Shift the selector lever while pressing the brake pedal.
P. 5-43
(for vehicles with continuously Check that the ignition switch or the operation mode is in ON.
variable transmission (CVT))
The windows are fogged up.
Push the defogger switch to change the “ ” mode. P. 7-6
The engine does not start.

The lights do not come on.
P. 8-2,
The lights are dim. Have the battery checked. Recharge or replace as needed.
9-11
The horn does not honk.
The horn sound is weak.
2-8 Quick index


The high coolant temperature
warning light is illuminated. 2
The engine is overheated.

P. 8-4
Carefully stop the vehicle in a safe place.
Steam comes out of the engine

compartment.
The vehicle is stuck in sand,
Rock your vehicle back and forth to free it. P. 8-13
mud or snow
WARNING
 When attempting to rock your vehicle out of a stuck position, be sure that no one is near the vehicle. The rocking motion may cause the vehicle to
suddenly lurch forward or backward, possibly injuring bystanders.
 Avoid revving the engine or spinning the wheels. Prolonged efforts to free a stuck vehicle may result in overheating and transaxle failure.
If the vehicle remains stuck after several rocking attempts, have a towing service pull the vehicle out.

The brakes are not functioning
properly after crossing a puddle Dry out the brakes by driving slowly while lightly pressing the brake pedal. P. 6-5
or stream.
Quick index 2-9


The continuously variable trans-
2 mission (CVT) makes no shift
change when accelerating. The There may be a problem in the CVT.
initial movement of the vehicle Have the vehicle inspected by an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility of P. 5-46
is slow when the vehicle starts your choice immediately.
moving.
(for vehicles with CVT)
A tire is punctured.
1. Park the vehicle in a safe place where the surface is flat and level.
P. 8-6
2. Replace the flat tire with the compact spare tire.
2-10 Quick index

General information
3
Fuel selection ...................................................................................3-2
Filling the fuel tank ..........................................................................3-3
Modifications to and racing of your vehicle ....................................3-5
Genuine Mitsubishi Motors parts ....................................................3-6
California Perchlorate Materials Requirements ...............................3-7
Event Data Recording ......................................................................3-7
Fuel selection
oline to minimize fuel-injector clogging and
Fuel selection minimize intake-valve deposits. Detergent
Methanol
N00301002046
gasoline helps keep your engine in tune and
Your vehicle is designed to use unleaded gas- your emission-control system working prop- Do not operate your vehicle on gasoline con-
3 oline only. It is equipped with a fuel tank erly. taining methanol (wood alcohol). Using this
filler pipe specifically designed to accept only type of alcohol could adversely affect the
a small diameter unleaded gasoline dispens- vehicle’s performance and damage critical
ing nozzle.
Octane requirement parts of the vehicle’s fuel system.
Your vehicle is designed to operate on

WARNING unleaded gasoline having a minimum octane
Reformulated gasoline
 Gasoline is highly flammable and explo-
number of 87 [(MON+RON)/2] or 91 RON.
sive. You could be burned, seriously Many areas of the country require the use of
injured or killed when handling it. When-
cleaner burning fuel referred to as “Reformu-
ever you refuel your vehicle, stop the Oxygenated gasoline lated Gasoline”.
engine and keep flames, sparks, and
smoking materials away from the vehicle. Reformulated gasoline contains oxygenates
Always handle fuel in well-ventilated out- Gasoline sold at some service stations con- and is specially blended to reduce vehicle
door areas. tains oxygenates such as ethanol, although emissions and improve air quality.
the oxygenates may not be identified by those Mitsubishi Motors Corporation strongly sup-
names. Oxygenates are required in some ports the use of reformulated gasoline. Prop-
CAUTION areas of the country. Such fuel can be used in erly blended reformulated gasoline has no
 Using leaded gasoline in your vehicle will your vehicle. adverse effect on vehicle performance or the
damage the engine, catalytic converter, and durability of the engine and fuel system.
the oxygen sensors. Also, using leaded gaso- Ethanol (Gasohol)
line is illegal, and will void your warranty
coverage of the engine, catalytic converter,
MMT (methylcyclopentadienyl
and oxygen sensors. A mixture of up to 10 % ethanol (grain alco- manganese tricarbonyl)
hol) and 90 % unleaded gasoline may be used
in your vehicle, provided the octane number MMT is a manganese-containing metallic
Gasoline detergent additives is at least as high as that recommended for additive that is blended into some gasolines
unleaded gasoline. to increase the octane number. Mitsubishi
In the United States, fuel suppliers are Motors Corporation recommends using gaso-
required by law to add detergents to their gas- lines without MMT.
3-2 General information

Filling the fuel tank

Use of gasolines blended with MMT may
adversely affect performance, and cause the
NOTE WARNING
 Poor-quality gasoline can cause problems  Gasoline is highly flammable and explo-
malfunction indicator on your instrument
such as hard starting, stalling during idling, sive. You could be burned, seriously
panel to come on. If this happens, contact an
abnormal engine noise, and poor accelera- injured or killed when handling it. When
authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a tion. If you experience any of these prob- refueling your vehicle, always turn the 3
repair facility of your choice for assistance. lems, try using a different brand of gasoline. engine off and keep away from flames,
If the engine malfunction indicator (“SER- sparks, and smoking materials. Always
VICE ENGINE SOON”) flashes, have the handle fuel in well-ventilated outdoor
Sulfur in gasoline vehicle inspected immediately by the nearest areas.
authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a  Before removing the fuel tank filler cap,
Your vehicle may have been designed to sat- repair facility of your choice. be sure to get rid of your body’s static
isfy California’s low-emission regulations  Repeatedly driving short distances at low electricity by touching a metal part of the
based on clean-burning low-sulfur gasoline. speeds can cause deposits to form in the fuel car or fuel pump. Any static electricity on
Gasoline sold in parts of the country other system and engine, resulting in hard starting your body could create a spark that
than California is allowed to have a higher and poor acceleration. If these problems ignites fuel vapor.
sulfur content. Using such gasoline could occur, you are advised to add a detergent  Perform the whole refueling process
additive to the gasoline when you refuel the (opening the fuel tank filler door, remov-
adversely affect the vehicle’s catalytic con-
vehicle. The additive will remove the depos- ing the fuel tank filler cap, etc.) by your-
verter and cause the engine malfunction indi-
its, thereby returning the engine to a normal self; do not let any other person near the
cator (“SERVICE ENGINE SOON”) to come condition. Be sure to use a Mitsubishi fuel tank filler. If you allowed a person to
on. Illumination of this indicator while using Motors Genuine cleaning additive. Using an help you and that person was carrying
high-sulfur gasoline does not necessarily unsuitable additive could make an engine static electricity, fuel vapor could be
mean the vehicle’s emission-control system is malfunction. For details, please contact the ignited.
malfunctioning. Your authorized Mitsubishi nearest authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer.  Do not move away from the fuel tank filler
Motors dealer may suggest using a different, until refueling is finished. If you moved
lower-sulfur brand of unleaded gasoline to away and did something else (for example,
determine if the problem is fuel-related. Filling the fuel tank sitting on a seat) part-way through the
refueling process, you could pick up a
N00301102076
fresh charge of static electricity.
 Be careful not to inhale fuel vapor. Fuel
WARNING contains toxic substances.
 When handling fuel, comply with the
 Keep the doors and windows closed while
safety regulations displayed by garages
refueling the vehicle. If they were open,
and filling stations.
fuel vapor could get into the cabin.
General information 3-3

Filling the fuel tank

3. Open the fuel tank filler pipe by slowly
Fuel tank capacity turning the fuel tank filler cap counter-
WARNING
 Since the fuel system may be under pres-
clockwise.
9.2 gal (35 L) sure, remove the fuel tank filler cap
slowly. This relieves any pressure or vac-
3 uum that might have built up in the fuel
Refueling tank. If the fuel tank filler cap is venting
vapor or if you hear a hissing sound, wait
1. Before filling with fuel, stop the engine. until the sound stops before removing the
2. The fuel tank filler is located on the rear fuel tank filler cap. Otherwise, fuel may
driver side of your vehicle. spray out, injuring you or others.
The fuel tank filler door can be opened
from inside the vehicle with the fuel tank 5. To fill with fuel correctly depends mainly
filler door release lever located at the left AJA117951 on correct handling of the fuel filler noz-
side of the driver’s seat. zle. Do not tilt the nozzle. Insert the noz-
1- Remove
zle in the fuel tank filler port as far as it
2- Close
goes.
4. While filling with fuel, hang the fuel tank CAUTION

filler cap cord on the hook located on the  Your vehicle can only be operated using
inside surface of the fuel tank filler door. unleaded gasoline. Serious engine and cata-
lytic converter damage will result if leaded
gasoline is filled into these vehicles, and
consequently, this must never be attempted.
6. When the nozzle stops automatically, do

not add more fuel.
AJA117964

Modifications to and racing of your vehicle

VEHICLE ARE NOT COVERED
CAUTION NOTE UNDER WARRANTY.
 To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling, do not  If the fuel tank filler cap is not tight while
“top-off” the fuel tank. Spilled fuel could driving, the engine malfunction indicator Examples of modifications to your vehicle
discolor, stain, or crack the vehicle’s paint- (“SERVICE ENGINE SOON”) may come on
work. If fuel spills on the paintwork, wipe it when the onboard diagnostic (OBD) system
that can cause damage or performance prob- 3
lems include the following:
off with a soft cloth. performs a self check.
Always tighten the fuel tank filler cap until
 Failure to use Mitsubishi Motors genuine
you hear at least 3 clicks.
7. To close, turn the fuel tank filler cap parts
The indicator will go off after several driving
slowly clockwise until you hear clicking cycles. If the indicator does not go off, con-  Failure to use required fuel and fluids
sounds, then gently push the fuel tank tact your authorized Mitsubishi Motors  Failure to use proper size tires and wheels
filler door closed. dealer or a repair facility of your choice  Modification of the fuel, intake, exhaust,
immediately. emission, suspension, engine, drive train
WARNING or electrical wiring systems
 Make sure the fuel tank filler cap is  Modification of any onboard com-
securely closed. If the fuel tank filler cap
Modifications to and racing puter/control module, including repro-
were loose, fuel could leak, resulting in a gramming, or replacing/adding chips to
fire. of your vehicle any onboard computer/control module
N00301600194
This vehicle should not be modified with Review the Warranty and Maintenance Man-
CAUTION non-Mitsubishi Motors genuine parts. ual for further details regarding warranty cov-
 If you need to replace the fuel tank filler cap, Mitsubishi Motors designs and manufactures erage.
use only the fuel tank filler cap specified for high quality vehicles with an emphasis on
your model vehicle. safety and durability. Modifications using Installation of accessories
non-Mitsubishi Motors genuine parts may N00301701277
affect the performance, safety and/or durabil-
ity of your vehicle, and may violate applica- CAUTION
ble state and/or federal regulations.  Before any electrical or electronic accesso-
ries are installed, consult an authorized
DAMAGE OR PERFORMANCE PROB- Mitsubishi Motors dealer.
LEMS RESULTING FROM MODIFICA-
TIONS TO OR RACING OF YOUR

Genuine Mitsubishi Motors parts

Refer to the “Specifications” section for
CAUTION information regarding wheel and tire
Modification/alterations to the
 Your vehicle is equipped with a diagnosis
sizes. electrical or fuel systems
connector (data link connector) for checking N00301800183
and servicing the electronic control system.
3 Mitsubishi Motors does not recommend con- WARNING Mitsubishi Motors manufactures high quality
necting a device other than the Scan Tool for vehicles with an emphasis on safety. It is
 While driving, do not use a cellular phone
inspections and service to this connector in a way that hinders safe driving. Any- important to consult an authorized Mitsubishi
because an unexpected problem could result. thing, including cellular phone usage, that Motors dealer before installation of any
In addition, malfunctions caused by connect- distracts you from the safe operation of accessory which may involve modification of
ing a device other than the Scan Tool may your vehicle increases your risk of an acci- the electrical or fuel systems.
not be covered under warranty. dent.
Refer to and follow all state and local laws
 The installation of accessories, optional
in your area regarding cellular phone
CAUTION
parts, etc., should only be performed  Please consult an authorized Mitsubishi
usage while driving.
within the limits prescribed by law, and in Motors dealer concerning any such acces-
accordance with the guidelines and warn- sory fitment or modification.
ings contained within the documents If the wires interfere with the vehicle body or
accompanying this vehicle.
Important point! improper installation methods are used (pro-
Only Mitsubishi Motors approved acces- tective fuses not included, etc.), electronic
Due to the large number of accessory and devices may be adversely affected, resulting
sories should be fitted to your vehicle.
replacement parts provided by different man- in a fire, vehicle damage, or other accident.
 Improper installation of electrical parts
could cause a fire. Refer to the “Modifica- ufacturers in the market, it is not always pos-
tion/alterations to the electrical or fuel sible for an authorized Mitsubishi Motors
systems” section within this owner’s man- dealer to check whether the attachment or Genuine Mitsubishi Motors
ual. installation of a non-Mitsubishi Motors genu- parts
 Using a cellular phone or radio set inside ine parts affects the driving safety of your
N00301401261
the vehicle without an external antenna Mitsubishi-vehicle.
Mitsubishi Motors Genuine Parts are
may cause electrical system interference,
designed and manufactured to meet high stan-
which could lead to unsafe vehicle opera-
dards of performance, and are recommended
tion.
for all of your maintenance needs. Also avail-
 Tires and wheels which do not meet spec-
able from your Mitsubishi Motors dealer are
ifications must not be used.
a wide variety of accessories to personalize
your new vehicle. Each Mitsubishi Motors
California Perchlorate Materials Requirements

vehicle has a selection of Mitsubishi Motors The EDR is designed to record data related to To read data recorded by an EDR, special
authorized accessories to choose from to tai- vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a equipment is required, and access to the vehi-
lor your new vehicle to your own personal short period of time, typically 30 seconds or cle or the EDR is needed. In addition to the
preference. Your Mitsubishi Motors dealer’s less. vehicle manufacturer, other parties, such as
Parts Manager has information on various law enforcement, that have the special equip- 3
audio systems, protection items, as well as The EDR in this vehicle is designed to record ment, can read the information if they have
interior and exterior accessories available for such data as: access to the vehicle or the EDR.
your specific model.
 How various systems in your vehicle were
operating;
California Perchlorate  Whether or not the driver and front pas-
Materials Requirements senger safety belts were buckled/fastened;
 How far (if at all) the driver was depress-
N00300100017
ing the accelerator and/or brake pedal;
Certain components of this vehicle, such as and,
airbag modules, seat belt pretensioners, and  How fast the vehicle was traveling.
button cell batteries, may contain perchlorate
materials. These data can help provide a better under-
Special handling may apply. For additional standing of the circumstances in which
information, see www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardous- crashes and injuries occur.
waste/perchlorate.
NOTE
Event Data Recording  EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only
N00302700033 if a non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data
are recorded by the EDR under normal driv-
This vehicle is equipped with an event data
ing conditions and no personal data (e.g.,
recorder (EDR). name, gender, age, and crash location) are
The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in recorded. However, other parties, such as
certain crash or near crash-like situations, law enforcement, could combine the EDR
such as an airbag deployment or hitting a data with the type of personally identifying
road obstacle, data that will assist in under- data routinely acquired during a crash inves-
standing how a vehicle’s systems performed. tigation.

Seat and restraint systems
Seats .................................................................................................4-2 4
Seats and restraint systems ..............................................................4-2
Front seats ........................................................................................4-2
Rear seat ...........................................................................................4-5
Head restraints .................................................................................4-5
Seat belts ..........................................................................................4-7
Seat belt use during pregnancy ......................................................4-13
Seat belt pre-tensioner and force limiter systems ..........................4-13
Child restraint systems ...................................................................4-14
Maintenance and inspection of seat belts ......................................4-25
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) - airbag .............................4-25
Seats
Seats Seats and restraint systems WARNING

N00408401681 N00401601235  Do not place objects under the seats. This
could prevent the seat from locking
Your vehicle has seat belts and other safety
securely, and it could lead to an accident.
features that help protect you and your pas- It may also cause damage to the seat or
sengers in an accident. other parts.
4 Seat belts are the most important safety
device. When worn properly, seat belts can
reduce the chance of serious injury or death
in various types of crashes. For added protec-
Front seats
N00401800403
tion during a severe frontal collision, your
vehicle has a Supplemental Restraint System Position the driver’s seat as far back as possi-
(SRS) with airbags for the driver and passen- ble while maintaining a position that still
gers. The seats, head restraints, and door enables you to fully apply the pedals, easily
locks also are safety equipment, which must control the steering wheel and safely operate
be used correctly. the vehicle.
1 - Front seats
Always check the following before you drive:
 To adjust the seat forward or backward 
Page 4-3  That everyone in your vehicle is properly
 To adjust the seatbacks  Page 4-3 wearing their seat belt.
 To adjust the seat height (Driver’s seat  That infants and small children are prop-
only)  Page 4-4 erly secured in an appropriate child
 Arm rest (Driver’s seat only, if so restraint system in the rear seat.
equipped)  Page 4-4  That all doors are fully closed and locked.
 Heated seats (if so equipped)  Page 4-4  That seatbacks are upright, with head
restraints properly adjusted.
2 - Rear seat
Safety equipment cannot prevent injury or
 Arm rest  Page 4-5 death in all motor vehicle accidents. How- WARNING
 Trunk-through lid  Page 4-5 ever, you can help reduce the risk of injury or  Do not attempt to adjust the seat while
death by following the instructions in this driving. This can cause loss of vehicle con-
manual. trol and result in an accident.
4-2 Seat and restraint systems

Front seats
WARNING CAUTION To adjust the seatbacks

 After adjusting the seat, make sure that  When sliding or reclining the seat rearward, N00402000369
seat is securely locked into position. pay careful attention to the rear seat passen- To adjust the seatback, lean forward slightly,
 To reduce the risk to the driver of serious gers.
gently pull the seatback lock lever up, then
injury or death during deployment of the
lean backward to a comfortable position and
driver’s airbag, always properly wear the
seat belt and adjust the driver’s seat as far
To adjust the seat forward or release the lever. The seatback will lock in 4
back as possible while maintaining a posi- backward place.
tion that still enables you to fully apply the N00401900316
pedals, easily control the steering wheel,
Pull the seat adjusting lever up and slide the
and safely operate the vehicle.
seat forward or backward to the desired posi-
 To reduce the risk to the front passenger
of serious injury or death during deploy-
tion. Release the adjusting lever to lock the
ment of the passenger’s airbag, always seat in place.
properly wear the seat belt and adjust the
front passenger’s seat as far back as possi-
ble.
 Always place children 12 years old and
under in the rear seat and use appropriate
child restraint systems.
CAUTION
CAUTION  The reclining mechanism used in the seat-
 Make sure that the seat is adjusted by an back is spring loaded, and will cause the
adult. If it is adjusted by a child, an unex- seatback to return quickly to the vertical
pected accident might occur. position when the lock lever is operated.
 Do not place a cushion or the like between When pulling the lever, sit close to the seat-
your back and the seatback while driving. WARNING back or hold the seatback with your hand to
The effectiveness of the head restraints will  To make sure that the seat is securely control its return motion.
be reduced in the event of an accident. locked, try to move it forward or back-
 When sliding the seats, be careful not to ward without using the adjusting lever.
catch your hand or leg.
Seat and restraint systems 4-3

Front seats
WARNING NOTE
 To reduce the risk of serious injury or  Do not stand or sit on the arm rest. It could
death in the event of an accident or sud- break.
den stop, all seatbacks should be kept in
the upright position while the vehicle is in
motion.
4 Seat belt performance during an accident
Heated seats (if so equipped)
N00435601476
can be adversely affected if the seatbacks
are reclined. The more a seatback is The heated seats can be operated by pushing
reclined, the more likely seat belt perfor- the switch when the ignition switch or the
mance will be adversely affected. If the operation mode is in ON. The indicator light
seat belt is not properly positioned against 1- To move the seat cushion up (A) will illuminate while the heater is on.
the body during an accident, there is 2- To move the seat cushion down
increased risk you will slide under the belt
and receive serious injury or death.
Arm rest (Driver’s seat only, if
so equipped)
To adjust the seat height N00402301109
(Driver’s seat only) To adjust the arm rest angle, tip the arm rest
N00402101325 forward and then raise it to the desired posi-
To adjust the seat height, turn the dial as tion. To release the arm rest angle, raise it
shown in the illustration. fully reward as shown.
1 (HI) - Heater high

(for quick heating)
2 (neutral position) - Heater off
3 (LO) - Heater low
(to keep the seat
warm)

Rear seat
WARNING CAUTION Trunk-through lid

 Persons who are unable to feel tempera-  If water or any other liquid is spilled on the N00409001062
ture change or skin pain due to age, ill- seat, allow it to dry thoroughly before Open the lid to gain access to the luggage
ness, injury, medication, alcohol use, attempting to use the heater. Turn the heater compartment from the cabin. This feature is
fatigue or other physical conditions or off immediately if it appears to be malfunc- useful for storing small items and carrying
who have sensitive skin may suffer burns tioning during use.
when using the heated seat even at low
long objects while accommodating 2 passen- 4
gers in the rear seat.
temperatures. To reduce the risk of burns,
people with such conditions must use care Rear seat Fold down the arm rest, then pull the strap
when using the heated seat. N00402501257
(A) to open the lid.
Arm rest
CAUTION N00403001376
 Switch off the heated seats when not in use. To use the arm rest, tilt the arm rest down for
Operate the heaters at the “HI” position for use as shown.
quick heating. After the seat has become The arm rest includes a cup holder. (Refer to
warm, set the heater switch to the “LO” posi-
“Cup holder” on page 5-109).
tion to keep it warm. Slight variations in the
seat temperature may be felt while using the
heated seats. This is caused by the operation
of the heater’s internal thermostat and does
not indicate a malfunction.
 Do not place heavy objects on the seat or
stick pins, needles, or other pointed objects
into the seat.
Head restraints
N00404301637
 Do not place a blanket, cushion, or other
insulating material on the seat while using Padded head restraints for the seats can
the heater; doing so can cause the heater ele- reduce the risk of a whiplash injury if your
ment to overheat. vehicle is hit from the rear.
 When cleaning the seat, do not use benzine, The head restraints are equipped in the illus-
kerosene, gasoline, alcohol, or other organic trated position.
solvents; doing so can cause damage not NOTE To maximize the effectiveness of your head
only to the surface of the seat, but also to the  Never sit on an arm rest. restraint, adjust the front seatback to the
heater. Doing so could damage the arm rest.

Head restraints
upright position and the head restraint to the
proper position. Sit back against the seatback
WARNING Adjustment of the head
with your head close to the head restraint.  Never place a cushion or similar device on restraint height (front seats)
the seatback. This can adversely affect
head restraint performance by increasing
the distance between your head and the To reduce the risk of injury in an accident,
restraint. adjust the head restraint height so that the
4 center of the restraint is at your ear level
when seated. Any person too tall for the
restraint to reach their ear level when seated
should raise the restraint to the highest locked
position.
 To raise the restraint, pull it straight up.

 To lower the restraint, push down on it
while pressing the lock knob (A) in the
direction shown by the arrow.
WARNING  After adjusting the height, push down on
 Driving without the head restraints in the restraint to make sure it is locked in
place can cause you and your passengers position.
serious injury or death in an accident. To
reduce the risk of injury in an accident,
always make sure the head restraints are
installed and properly positioned when
the seat is occupied.
 In order to minimize the risk of a neck
injury due to a rear impact, the front seat-
back must be adjusted to the upright posi-
tion and the head restraint to the proper
position before vehicle operation. The
driver should never adjust the seat while
the vehicle is in motion.

Seat belts
To remove To install CAUTION

 The shape and size of the head restraint dif-
Press the lock knob (A) in the direction First check that the head restraint is facing in fers according to the seat. Always use the
shown by the arrows. Then pull the head the right direction as shown in the previous correct head restraint provided for the seat
restraint up and out of the seatback. illustration, and then insert it into the seat- and do not install the head restraint in the
back. Push the head restraint down while wrong direction.
pressing the lock knob (A) until the restraint
4
locks into place.
CAUTION
 Check that the lock knob (A) is extended out
as shown in the illustration. Then pull the
head restraint up to make sure that it is
locked in place and will not come out of the
seatback.
WARNING
 To help minimize the risk of neck injury in
the event of an accident, the head Seat belts
restraints must be properly installed and N00406001566
positioned to proper height before vehicle Seat belts are installed in your vehicle to help
operation. reduce the risk of injury to the driver and pas-
senger in the event of an accident. Always
use the provided seat belts.
Carefully review the following information
for proper seat belt usage.

Seat belts
WARNING WARNING WARNING

 To help reduce the risk of injury or death  To reduce the risk to the driver of serious  Children 12 years old and under should
in an accident, seat belts and child injury or death during deployment of the always ride in the rear seat and be prop-
restraint systems must always be used. driver’s airbag, always properly wear the erly restrained. This reduces their risk of
Refer to “Child restraint systems” on page seat belt and adjust the driver’s seat as far serious injury or death in an accident,
4-14 for additional information. back as possible while maintaining a posi- especially due to a deploying front passen-
4  Never use one seat belt for more than one tion that still enables you to fully apply the ger’s airbag. Refer to “Child restraint sys-
person. pedals, easily control the steering wheel, tems” on page 4-14 for additional
 Never carry more people in your vehicle and safely operate the vehicle. information.
than there are seat belts.  To reduce the risk to a front seat passen-  Any child who is too small to properly
 Always adjust the seat belt for a snug fit. ger of serious injury or death from a wear a seat belt must be properly
 Always place the shoulder belt over your deploying airbag, make sure the passenger restrained in an appropriate child
shoulder and across your chest. Never put always wears the seat belt properly, restraint system.
it behind you or under your arm. remains seated all the way back and  Infants MUST be placed in a rear-facing
upright in their seat, and moves the seat as child safety seat and positioned in the rear
 Always wear the lap belt as low as possible
far back as possible. Refer to “Supplemen- seat.
across your hips, not around your waist.
tal Restraint System (SRS) - airbag” on  In the event of an accident, all seat belt
 Never insert any foreign object, such as a
page 4-25 for additional information. assemblies, including retractors and
piece of plastic, paper clip, button or coin,
 Never hold an infant or child in your arms attachment hardware, should be inspected
into the seat belt buckle.
or on your lap when riding in this vehicle by an authorized Mitsubishi Motors
even when you are wearing your seat belt. dealer to determine whether replacement
Never place any part of the seat belt you is necessary.
are wearing around an infant or child.  Do not let children play with the seat belts.
Failure to follow these simple instructions If children play with the seat belts by
creates a risk of serious injury or death to wrapping them around their bodies, the
your child in the event of an accident or seat belt may retract and become tight.
sudden stop. This can result in a serious injury or
death, such as suffocation. This can occur
 Never modify or alter the seat belts in even if the vehicle is parked. If the child
your vehicle. cannot be released from the seat belt, use
an appropriate tool such as a knife or scis-
sors to cut the seat belt.

Seat belts
1. Occupants should always sit back in their
Seat belt instructions seats with their backs against the upright
WARNING
N00406201539  To reduce the risk of serious injury or
seatback. To reduce the risk of serious
All seats are equipped with a seat belt which death in the event of an accident or sud-
injury or death during deployment of the
den stop, all seatbacks should be kept in
uses one combined lap-and-shoulder belt with airbag, adjust the driver’s seat as far back the upright position while the vehicle is in
an emergency locking retractor. as possible while maintaining a position motion.
that still enables you to fully apply the Seat belt performance during an accident 4
This system is designed to provide both com- pedals, easily control the steering wheel, can be adversely affected if the seatbacks
fort and safety. It permits full extension and and safely operate the vehicle. The front are reclined. The more a seatback is
automatic retraction of the belts during nor- passenger seat should also be moved as reclined, the more likely seat belt perfor-
mal vehicle operation. A sensing device far back as possible. Refer to “Supple- mance will be adversely affected. If the
inside the belt retractor is designed to lock the mental Restraint System (SRS) - airbag” seat belt is not properly positioned against
retractor in the event of a sudden change in on page 4-25. Also refer to “To adjust the the body during an accident, there is
the vehicle’s motion. seat forward or backward” on page 4-3.
increased risk you will slide under the belt
and receive serious injury or death.
NOTE
 For instructions on installing a child restraint 2. Grasp the latch plate and slide it up the
system using a seat belt, refer to “Installing a webbing so that it easily pulls across your
child restraint system using the seat belt” on body.
page 4-21.

Seat belts
3. Pull the seat belt out slowly while holding 4. The lap part of the belt must always be
the latch plate. Push the latch plate into worn low and snug across the hips. Pull
WARNING
 Be sure the lap belt portion fits snugly and
the buckle until you hear a “click”. Pull up on the shoulder portion of the belt to
is worn as low as possible across the hips,
up on the belt to be sure the latch plate is take up any slack in the lap belt.
not around the waist. Failure to follow this
locked securely in the buckle. instruction will increase the risk of serious
injury or death in the event of an accident.
4  Be sure the seat belt webbing is not
twisted when worn. Twisted webbing may
adversely affect seat belt performance.
5. To release the belt, press the button on the

buckle and allow the belt to retract.
If the belt does not retract smoothly, pull it
out and check for kinks or twists in the
webbing. Then make sure it remains
NOTE untwisted as it retracts.
NOTE  With the exception of the seat belt for the
 If the seat belt locks up and cannot be pulled driver, the seat belts in all other seating posi- NOTE
out, pull it once with force and let it retract tions are equipped with an Automatic Lock-  If the seat belt (A) or ring (B) becomes dirty,
all the way. ing Retractor (ALR) function. If you pull the the belt may not retract smoothly. If the seat
Then, pull the belt out slowly once again. seat belt fully out of the retractor, the retrac- belt and ring are dirty, clean them with a
tor will switch to its ALR child restraint mild soap or detergent solution.
installation function (see page 4-21).
When the ALR function has been activated,
the seat belt will only retract. If this happens,
let the belt fully retract, then pull the seat
belt back out, repeating steps 1 through 4.

Seat belts
Driver’s seat belt WARNING

reminder/warning light  In order to reduce the risk of serious
N00418400384
injury or death in an accident, always fas-
ten your own seat belt. Do not allow any-
A tone and warning light are used to remind one to ride in your vehicle unless he or she
the driver to fasten the seat belt. is also seated and fastening a seat belt.
Children should additionally be restrained 4
in a secure child restraint system.
NOTE
 If the seat belt subsequently remains unfas- When the ignition switch is turned to the
tened, the warning light and the tone will “ON” position or the operation mode is put in
issue further warnings each time the vehicle ON, this indicator normally comes on and
starts moving from a stop. goes off a few seconds later.
The light comes on when a person sits on the
front passenger seat but does not fasten the
Front passenger seat belt warn- seat belt. It goes off when the seat belt is sub-
If the ignition switch is turned to the “ON” ing light sequently fastened.
position or the operation mode is put in ON N00418301306
without the driver’s seat belt being fastened, a
warning light will come on and a tone will
The front passenger seat belt warning light is WARNING
located as shown in the illustration.  When a child booster seat is used on the
sound for approximately 6 seconds to remind
front passenger seat, the front passenger
you to fasten your seat belt. seat belt warning light will not come on, if
If the vehicle is driven with the seat belt still the seat belt is not fastened when the
unfastened, the warning light will blink and booster seat is used. Confirm that the
the tone will sound intermittently until the child is wearing the seat belt properly.
seat belt is fastened.  Do not install any accessory or sticker that
makes the light difficult to see.

Seat belts
Adjustable seat belt shoulder WARNING Installation

anchor (front seats)  Adjust the shoulder belt anchor only when
1. Unfasten the button (A) of the seat belt
N00406300357
the vehicle is not in motion.
 Make sure the anchor is securely locked in guide strap. Put the seat belt webbing
The seat belt anchor height can be adjusted. position after adjusting it. through the seat belt guide strap and fas-
To move the anchor, pull the lock knob (A) ten the button.
4 and slide the anchor to the desired position.
Release the lock knob to lock the anchor into Seat belt guide strap (rear seat)
position. N00419301055
The seat belt guide straps are equipped on the

seatback.
The seat belt guide strap will provide comfort
by keeping away the belt webbing from your
neck.
CAUTION
 Make sure the part of the seat belt webbing
you inserted into the seat belt guide strap is
not twisted.
WARNING Twisted webbing may adversely affect seat
 Always adjust the shoulder belt anchor so belt performance.
that the shoulder belt is positioned across
the center of your shoulder without touch-
ing your neck. The shoulder belt should
not be able to fall off your shoulder. Fail-
ure to follow this instruction can adversely
affect seat belt performance and increase
the risk of serious injury or death in the
event of an accident.

Seat belt use during pregnancy

2. Fasten the seat belt and make sure it fits
snugly across your shoulder.
WARNING Seat belt pre-tensioner and
 The extender should only be used if the
existing belt is not long enough. Anyone
force limiter systems
N00417701752
who can use the standard seat belt should
not use an extender. Unnecessary use of an The driver’s and front passenger’s seats each
extender can adversely affect seat belt have a seat belt equipped with a pre-tensioner
performance in an accident. system and force limiter system.
4
 When not required, the extender must be
removed and stowed.
Pre-tensioner system
Seat belt use during preg- The driver and front passenger seat belts are
equipped with a seat belt pre-tensioner sys-
nancy tem. In a moderate-to-severe frontal or side
Seat belt extender N00406800147
collision or when a rollover or overturning of
N00406700205
Seat belts work for everyone, including preg- the vehicle is detected, the pre-tensioner sys-
If your seat belt is not long enough, even nant women. Like all occupants, pregnant tem operates simultaneously with the deploy-
when fully extended, a seat belt extender women are more likely to be seriously injured ment of the front airbags, side airbags or
must be obtained. The extender may be used or killed in an accident if they do not wear curtain airbags.
for either of the front seats. seat belts. The seat belt pre-tensioners are located within
the seat belt retractors (A). When activated,
WARNING the pre-tensioners quickly draw back seat belt
 To reduce the risk of serious injury or
webbing and increase seat belt performance.
death to pregnant women and unborn
children in an accident, pregnant women
should always wear a seat belt. The lap
portion of the seat belt should be worn
snug and low across the hips and below
the rounding. Consult your doctor if you
have any additional questions or concerns.

Child restraint systems

the ignition switch or the operation mode is
under the following conditions. These include
WARNING
 The seat belt pre-tensioner system is
all of the items listed above and all related
designed to work only once. After the seat
wiring.
belt pre-tensioners have been activated,
[Except for vehicles equipped with the they will not work again. They must
F.A.S.T.-key] promptly be replaced and the entire seat
4 The ignition switch is in the “ON” or belt pre-tensioner system inspected by an
“START” position. authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer.
[Vehicles equipped with the F.A.S.T.-key]
The operation mode is in ON.
The seat belt pre-tensioners will operate

SRS warning light
The seat belt pre-tensioner system includes N00408700137
under the same conditions as the airbag con-
the following components: This warning light tells you if there is a prob-
trol unit.
lem involving the SRS airbags and/or the seat
When the seat belt pre-tensioners activate, belt pre-tensioner system. Refer to “SRS
some smoke is released and a loud noise will warning light” on page 4-31.
be heard. The smoke is not harmful, but care
should be taken not to intentionally inhale it,
Force limiter system
as it may cause some temporary irritation to
N00408900142
people with respiratory problems.
The pre-tensioners activate in the event of a In the event of an accident, the seat belt force
moderate-to-severe front or side impact, even limiter system will help reduce the force
if the seat belt is not being worn. The seat belt applied to the driver and front seat passenger.
pre-tensioners may not activate in certain col-
1- SRS warning light lisions, even though the vehicle may appear Child restraint systems
2- Front impact sensors to be severely damaged. Such non-activation N00407101926
3- Seat belt pre-tensioner does not mean that something is wrong with
When transporting infants or small children
4- Side impact sensors the seat belt pre-tensioner system, but rather
in your vehicle, an appropriate child restraint
5- Airbag control unit that the collision forces were not severe
system must always be used. This is required
enough to activate the system.
by law in the U.S.
The airbag control unit monitors the readiness
of the electronic parts of the system whenever

Child restraint systems specifically designed  Children less than 2 years old and who
for infants and small children are offered by weigh 40 pounds (18 kg) or less MUST
WARNING
 Any child who is too large to use a child
several manufacturers. Choose only a child ride in a rear-facing child safety seat that
restraint system should ride in the rear
restraint system with a label certifying that it MUST ONLY be used in the rear seat.
seat and wear the lap-and-shoulder belt
complies with Federal Motor Vehicle Safety  Children older than 2 years of age and properly. The shoulder belt must be posi-
Standard 213 (FMVSS 213) or Motor Vehicle who weigh less than 60 pounds (27 kg) or tioned over the shoulder and across the
Restraint Systems and Booster Seats Safety who are less than 57 inches (145 cm) tall chest, not across their neck, and with the 4
Regulations (RSSR). Look for the manufac- must be in an appropriate child restraint lap belt positioned low on the child’s hips,
turer’s statement of compliance on the box system used only in the rear seat. not across their stomach. If necessary, a
and child restraint system itself.  Children who weigh more than 60 pounds booster seat should be used to help achieve
(27 kg) or who are more than 57 inches a proper seat belt fit. Follow the booster
The child restraint system should be appropri- (145 cm) tall, regardless of age, should seat manufacturer’s instructions. Only use
ate for your child’s weight and height, and a booster seat that is certified as comply-
use a suitable child seat or a booster seat
should properly fit your vehicle’s seat. ing with Federal Motor Vehicle Safety
in the rear seat until the vehicle’s lap-and-
For detailed information, refer to the instruc- Standards or Motor Vehicle Restraint Sys-
shoulder belt fits them properly. tems and Booster Seats Safety Regula-
tion manual accompanying the child restraint
tions.
system.
WARNING  Never hold an infant or child in your arms
or on your lap when riding in this vehicle,
 All children must be seated in the rear
Recommendations for child seat, and properly restrained.
even when you are wearing your seat belt.
Never place any part of the seat belt you
restraint system selection Accident statistics show that children of
are wearing around an infant or child.
all sizes and ages are safer when properly
Failure to follow these simple instructions
restrained in the rear seat, rather than in
All children should be properly restrained in the front seat.
creates a risk of serious injury or death to
a restraint device that offers the maximum your child in the event of an accident or
 Be sure to select a child restraint system
protection for their size and age as specified sudden stop.
that is appropriate not only for the child’s
by local, state, or provincial laws. size and age but also for your vehicle.
Be sure to check local, state, or provincial Some child restraint systems may not fit
requirements for child size and age that may your vehicle properly.
vary from the recommendations listed below.

Airbag WARNING
 It is important to use an approved rear-
facing infant restraint until the infant is
one year old (unless the infant outgrows
the seat sooner). This allows the infant’s
neck and spine to develop enough to sup-
4 port the weight of their head in the event
of an accident.
 When installing a child restraint system,
follow the instructions provided by the
manufacturer and follow the directions in
this manual. Failure to do so can result in
WARNING WARNING serious injury or death to your child in an
 Your vehicle is also equipped with a front  FRONT-FACING CHILD RESTRAINT accident or sudden stop.
passenger’s airbag. SYSTEMS should be used in the rear seat  After installation, push and pull the child
Never put REAR-FACING CHILD whenever possible. If one must be used in restraint system back and forth, and side
RESTRAINT SYSTEMS or INFANT the front passenger seat, move the seat to to side, to see that it is firmly secured. If
RESTRAINT SYSTEMS in the front pas- the most rearward position and make sure the child restraint system is not installed
senger seat. This places the infant too the child stays in the child restraint sys- securely, it may cause injury to the child
close to the passenger’s airbag. During tem, properly restrained. Failure to follow or other occupants in the event of an acci-
deployment of that airbag, the infant can these instructions could result in serious dent or sudden stop.
be seriously injured or killed. Rear-facing injury or death to the child.  When not in use, keep your child restraint
child restraint systems or infant restraint system secured with the seat belt, or
systems must only be used in the rear seat. remove it from the vehicle, in order to pre-
vent it from being thrown around inside
the vehicle during an accident.

NOTE Installing a child restraint sys- Tether anchor locations

 Before purchasing a child restraint system, tem using the LATCH (Lower N00418901230
try installing it in the rear seat to ensure Your vehicle has 3 attachment points on the
proper fit. Due to the location of the seat belt Anchors and Tethers for chil- rear shelf, located behind the top of your rear
buckles and the shape of the seat cushion, it dren) system seat. These are for securing a child restraint
may be difficult to securely install some
manufacturer’s child restraint systems.
N00418801183 system tether strap to each of the 3 rear seat-
ing positions in your vehicle.
4
If the child restraint system can be pulled
forward or to either side easily on the seat
Lower anchor locations
cushion after the seat belt has been tightened,
The outboard seating positions in the rear seat
choose another manufacturer’s child restraint
system.
of your vehicle are equipped with lower
Depending on the seating position in the anchors for attaching child restraint systems
vehicle and the child restraint system that compatible with the LATCH system.
you have, the child restraint system can be
attached using one of the following 2 meth-
ods:
• Attach to the lower anchorage in the rear
seat ONLY if the child restraint system is
compatible with the LATCH system (See
page 4-17).
• Attach to the seat belt (See page 4-21).


2. Open the gap a little between the seat
Examples of child restraint sys- NOTE
cushion (A) and the seatback (B) with
tems compatible with the LATCH your hand to locate the lower anchors (C).  In order to secure a child restraint system
system compatible with the LATCH system, you
3. Push the anchor connectors (D) on the
must use the lower anchor points in the out-
N00419000202 child restraint system into the lower board positions of the rear seat. To secure a
anchors (C) in accordance with the child restraint system in the center position
4 instructions provided by the child restraint of the rear seat, you must use the vehicle’s
system manufacturer. center seat belt.
Remember, the lower anchors provided
with your vehicle are designed to secure
suitable child restraint systems compat- WARNING
ible with the LATCH system in the out-  If there is any foreign material in or
board positions of the rear seat only. around the lower anchors, remove it
The anchor connectors are NOT before installing the child restraint sys-
designed to secure a suitable child tem. Also, make sure the seat belt is away
restraint system in the center position from, not looped through or otherwise
A- Rear-facing child restraint system interfering with, the child restraint sys-
B- Front-facing child restraint system of the rear seat.
tem. If foreign matter is not removed
C- Child restraint system lower anchor and/or the seat belt interferes with the
connectors child restraint system, the child restraint
D- Tether strap system will not be secured properly, could
(These are only examples.) detach and move forward in the event of
sudden braking or an accident, and could
result in injury to the child or other vehi-
cle occupants.
Using the LATCH system
 When the vehicle is moving, do not adjust
N00419101369
the seat where the child restraint system is
Except for booster seat installed.
1. In order to securely fasten the tether strap, A- Vehicle seat cushion

4. Open the cover for the tether anchor by
remove the head restraint from the loca- B- Vehicle seatback
pulling it back with your hand as illus-
tion where you wish to install the child C- Lower anchor
trated below (4).
restraint system. D- Connector


5. Latch the tether strap hook (E) of the child  High back booster seat
restraint system to the anchor (F) as illus-
CAUTION
 After removing the child restraint system, 1. In order to securely fasten the tether strap,
trated below (5) and tighten the top tether
install the head restraint.
strap so it is securely fastened. remove the head restraint from the loca-
tion where you wish to install the high
Booster seat back booster seat.
2. Open the gap a little between the seat 4
cushion (A) and the seatback (B) with
your hand to locate the lower anchors (C).
3. Push the anchor connectors (D) on the
high back booster seat into the lower
anchors (C) in accordance with the
instructions provided by the child restraint
system’s manufacturer.
Remember, the lower anchors (C) pro-
vided with your vehicle are designed to
WARNING secure suitable high back booster seats
 Child restraint system tether anchors are compatible with the LATCH system in
designed only to withstand loads from cor- A- High back booster seat the outboard positions of the rear seats
rectly fitted child restraint systems. Under B- Booster cushion only. The anchor connectors are NOT
no circumstances are they to be used for
designed to secure a suitable high back
adult seat belts, harnesses, or for attach-
booster seat in the middle seating posi-
ing other items or equipment to the vehi- WARNING tion of the rear seat.
cle.  To avoid injury to child, do not use the
lap/shoulder belt Automatic Locking
6. Before putting your child in the restraint, Retractor (ALR) child restraint installa-
push and pull the restraint in all directions tion function when using a booster seat
with the seat belts.
to be sure it is firmly secure. Do this
before each use. If the child restraint sys-
tem is not firmly secure, repeat steps 3
through 5.


6. Before putting your child in the restraint,
WARNING push and pull the high back booster seat in
 When the vehicle is moving, do not adjust
all directions to be sure it is firmly secure.
the seat where the high back booster seat
Do this before each use. If the high back
is installed.
booster seat is not firmly secure, repeat
4. Open the cover for the tether anchor by steps 3 through 5.
4 pulling it back with your hand as illus- 7. Sit the child in the high back booster seat.
trated below (4). Fit the seat belt to the high back booster
5. Latch the tether strap hook (E) of the child seat according to the child restraint sys-
restraint system to the anchor (F) as illus- tem’s manufacturer.
trated below (5) and tighten the top tether
A- Vehicle seat cushion strap so it is securely fastened. CAUTION
B- Vehicle seatback
 After removing the high back booster seat,
C- Lower anchor
install the head restraint.
D- Connector
WARNING
 If there is any foreign material in or
around the lower anchors, remove it
before installing the high back booster
seat. Also, make sure the seat belt is away
from, not looped through or otherwise
interfering with, the high back booster
seat. If foreign matter is not removed
and/or the seat belt interferes with the WARNING
high back booster seat, the high back  Child restraint system tether anchors are
booster seat will not be secured properly, designed only to withstand loads from cor-
could detach and move forward in the rectly fitted child restraint systems.
event of sudden braking or an accident, Under no circumstances are they to be
and could result in injury to the child or used for adult seat belts, harnesses, for
other vehicle occupants. attaching other items, or equipment to the
vehicle.

 Booster cushion 3. Sit the child in the booster cushion.

Fit the seat belt to the booster cushion
according to the child restraint system’s
CAUTION manufacturer
 Do not remove the head restraint when
installing a booster cushion. WARNING
 When using a child restraint in a rear 4
1. Open the gap a little between the seat seating position, always review the
cushion (A) and the seatback (B) with instructions provided with that restraint
your hand to locate the lower anchors (C). to make sure it is compatible with this
vehicle and to understand how to properly
2. Push the anchor connectors (D) on the A- Vehicle seat cushion install it.
booster cushion into the lower anchors B- Vehicle seatback Child restraints, including booster seats,
(C) in accordance with the instructions C- Lower anchor come in different sizes and configurations.
provided by the child restraint system’s D- Connector Depending on where you place these child
manufacturer. restraints, and depending on their size and
Remember, the lower anchors (C) pro- configuration, you may not be able to
vided with your vehicle are designed to access or properly use one or more adja-
WARNING cent seat belt assemblies. If this occurs,
secure suitable booster cushions com-  If there is any foreign material in or
patible with the LATCH system in the the adjacent seating position or positions
around the lower anchors, remove it should not be used. Failure to use a seat
outboard positions of the rear seats before installing the booster cushion. Also, belt or improper use of a seat belt can
only. The anchor connectors are NOT make sure the seat belt is away from, not result in serious injury or death should a
designed to secure a suitable booster looped through or otherwise interfering crash occur.
cushion in the middle seating position with, the booster cushion. If foreign mat-
of the rear seat. ter is not removed and/or the seat belt
interferes with the booster cushion, the
booster cushion will not be secured prop- Installing a child restraint sys-
erly, could detach and move forward in tem using the seat belt (with
the event of sudden braking or an acci-
dent, and could result in injury to the emergency/automatic locking
child or other vehicle occupants. mechanism)
 When the vehicle is moving, do not adjust N00407301625
the seat where the booster cushion is
With the exception of the driver, the seat belt
installed.
in all other seating positions can be converted

from normal Emergency Locking Retractor 2. Route the seat belt through the child
(ELR) mode, to Automatic Locking Retractor
WARNING restraint system according to the instruc-
 Never remove the buckle (A) for the rear
(ALR) mode. This means that when you pull tions provided by the child restraint sys-
center seat from the rubber belt (B). If the
the seat belt fully out of the retractor, the tem’s manufacturer. Then insert the seat
buckle is detached from the rubber belt,
retractor will switch to its ALR child restraint the ALR mode may become deactivated belt latch plate into the buckle. Make sure
installation function. Always use the ALR and a child restraint system used in the you hear a “click” when you insert the
4 child restraint installation function when you rear center seat position may not be latch plate into the buckle.
install a child restraint system using the seat secured, resulting in serious injury or
belt. death to a child using the child restraint
system and/or other occupants. Always
Children 12 years old and under should make sure that the buckle is passed under
always be restrained in the rear seat, when- the rubber belt as shown in the illustration
ever possible, although the front passenger below.
seat belt can also be converted to ALR mode.
WARNING
 When you install a child restraint system
using the seat belt, always make sure the
retractor has been switched to the ALR
child restraint installation function. The
ALR function will keep the child restraint
system tightly secured to the seat.
Failure to convert the retractor to the
ALR function may allow the child
restraint system to move forward during
sudden braking or an accident, resulting
in serious injury or death to the child or
other occupants.
Installation
1. Place the child restraint system on the seat
where you wish to install it.
To help assure proper fitting of the child
restraint system, always remove the head
restraint.


3. To activate the ALR child restraint instal- 5. After confirming that the belt is locked, 7. Latch the tether strap hook (A) of the
lation function, slowly pull the shoulder grab the shoulder part of the belt near the child restraint system to the tether anchor
part of the belt all the way out of the buckle and pull up to remove any slack (B) as illustrated below (7) and tighten the
retractor until it stops. Then let the belt from the lap part of the belt allowing the top tether strap so it is securely fastened.
feed back into the retractor. slack to feed into the retractor. Remember,
if the lap belt portion is not tight, the child
restraint system will not be secure. It may 4
help to put your weight on the child
restraint system and/or push on its seat-
back while pulling up on the belt (See
illustration).
4. After the belt has retracted, tug on it. WARNING

If the belt is in the ALR function, you will  Child restraint system tether anchors are
not be able to pull it out. If the webbing designed only to withstand loads from cor-
can be pulled out from retractor, the ALR rectly fitted child restraint systems. Under
function has not been activated and you no circumstances are they to be used for
will need to repeat steps 3 and 4. adult seat belts, harnesses, or for attach-
ing other items or equipment to the vehi-
If your child restraint system requires the use cle.
of a tether strap, fasten the tether strap in
accordance with the following procedures. 8. Before putting your child in the restraint,
push and pull the restraint in all directions
6. Open the cover from the tether anchor to be sure it is firmly secure. Do this
installation point by pulling it back with before each use. If the child restraint sys-
your hand as illustrated below (6). tem is not firmly secure, repeat steps 1
through 7.

CAUTION  High back booster seat WARNING

 After removing the child restraint system, be 1. Place the high back booster seat on the  Child restraint system tether anchors are
sure to perform the following actions. designed only to withstand loads from cor-
seat where you wish to install it.
• Wind up the seat belt completely to deacti- rectly fitted child restraint systems.
To help assure proper fitting of the high
vate the ALR mode. Under no circumstances are they to be
back booster seat, always remove the head used for adult seat belts, harnesses, for
4 • Install the head restraint.
restraint. attaching other items, or equipment to the
If your high back booster seat requires the vehicle.
Booster seat use of a tether strap, fasten the tether strap
in accordance with the following proce- 4. Sit the child in the high back booster seat.
dures. Fit the seat belt to the high back booster
2. Open the cover from the tether anchor seat according to the child restraint sys-
installation point by pulling it back with tem’s manufacturer.
your hand as illustrated below (2).
3. Latch the tether strap hook (A) of the
CAUTION
child restraint system to the tether anchor
 After removing the high back booster seat,
bar (B) as illustrated below (3) and tighten install the head restraint.
the top tether strap so it is securely fas-
tened.
 Booster cushion
A- High back booster seat
B- Booster cushion
CAUTION
 Do not remove the head restraint when
installing a booster cushion.
WARNING
 To avoid injury to child, do not use the
lap/shoulder belt Automatic Locking 1. Place the booster cushion on the seat
Retractor (ALR) child restraint installa- where you wish to install it.
tion function when using a booster seat 2. Sit the child in the booster cushion. Fit the
with the seat belts. seat belt to the booster cushion according
to the child restraint system’s manufac-
turer.

Maintenance and inspection of seat belts
Children who have outgrown WARNING WARNING

child restraint systems  Keep your vehicle locked and the trunk lid  Do not attempt to repair or replace any
N00407601686
closed when not in use. Keep your vehicle part of the seat belt assemblies. This work
keys away from children. should be done by an authorized
Children who have outgrown a child restraint  Never allow children to play in the trunk Mitsubishi Motors dealer. Failure to have
system should be seated in the rear seat and an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer
wear the seat belt. If the shoulder belt crosses
of your vehicle.
perform the work could reduce the effec- 4
their face or neck, and/or the lap belt crosses tiveness of the belts and could result in a
their stomach, a commercially available Maintenance and inspection serious injury or death in an accident.
booster seat must be used to raise the child so of seat belts  Never use an organic solvent to clean the
that the shoulder belt crosses their shoulder seat belt webbing. Do not attempt to
N00407001404
and the lap belt remains positioned low bleach or re-dye the seat belt webbing.
Regularly check your seat belt buckles and These may weaken the seat belt webbing,
across their hips. The booster seat should fit
their release mechanisms for positive engage- increasing risk of injury or death in an
the vehicle seat and have a label certifying
ment and release of the latch plate. Check the accident.
compliance with Federal Motor Vehicle Clean seat belt webbing only with mild
retractors for automatic locking when in the
Safety Standards or Motor Vehicle Restraint soap or detergent solution and rinse it
Automatic Locking Retractor function.
Systems and Booster Seats Safety Regula- with lukewarm water, and dry the seat
tions. The entire seat belt assembly should be belt webbing completely before retracting
replaced if the webbing shows any obvious it.
WARNING cuts, tears, increase in thickness in any sec-
 Any child who is too small to properly tion of the webbing from broken fibers, or
wear a seat belt must be properly severe fading from sunlight. All of these con- Supplemental Restraint Sys-
restrained in an appropriate child ditions indicate a weakening of the belt, tem (SRS) - airbag
restraint system, to reduce their risk of which may adversely affect seat belt perfor-
N00407701850
serious injury or death in an accident. mance in an accident.
 A child should never be left unattended in, This vehicle is equipped with a Supplemental
or unsupervised around, your vehicle. Restraint System (SRS), which includes air-
When you leave the vehicle, always take bags for the driver and passengers.
the child out as well.
 Children can die from heat stroke if left or The SRS front airbags are designed to supple-
trapped inside the vehicle, especially on ment the primary protection of the driver and
hot days. front passenger seat belt systems by provid-
ing those occupants with protection against
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) - airbag

head and chest injuries in certain moderate to The SRS airbags are NOT a substitute for use
severe frontal collisions. The SRS front air- of the seat belts. For maximum protection in
WARNING
• Seat belts reduce the risk of being
bags, together with sensors at the front of the all types of accidents, seat belts must
thrown from your vehicle in a collision or
vehicle and sensors attached to the front ALWAYS be worn by everyone who drives or
rollover.
seats, form an advanced airbag system. rides in this vehicle (with infants and small
 IT IS VERY IMPORTANT TO BE PROP-
children in an appropriate child restraint sys-
4 The SRS driver’s knee airbag is designed to tem in the rear seat, and older children buck-
ERLY SEATED.
• A driver or front passenger sitting too
supplement the primary protection of the led in the rear seat). Refer to “Child restraint close to the steering wheel or instrument
driver’s seat belt system. It can reduce the systems” on page 4-14. panel during airbag deployment can be
forward movement of the driver’s lower legs seriously injured or killed.
and provide increased overall body protection
in certain moderate to severe frontal colli-
WARNING • Airbags inflate very quickly and with
great force. If the driver and front pas-
 IT IS VERY IMPORTANT TO ALWAYS
sions. senger are not properly seated and
WEAR YOUR SEAT BELT PROPERLY
restrained, the airbag may not provide
The SRS side airbags and the curtain airbags EVEN WITH AN AIRBAG.
the proper protection, and can cause
are also designed to supplement the seat belts. • Seat belts help keep the driver and pas-
serious injuries or death when it inflates.
sengers properly positioned. This
The SRS side airbags provide the driver and • To reduce the risk to the driver of serious
reduces the risk of injury in all collisions,
front passenger with protection against chest and reduces the risk of serious injuries or
injury or death due to a deploying
injuries by deploying the bag on the side driver’s airbag, always properly wear
death when the airbags inflate.
impacted in moderate to severe side impact your seat belt and adjust the driver’s seat
During sudden braking just before a col-
collisions. The SRS curtain airbags provide as far back as possible, maintaining a
lision, an unrestrained or improperly
position that still allows the driver to
the driver and passengers on the front seat restrained driver or passengers can move
have good control of the steering wheel,
and rear outboard seat with protection against forward into direct contact with, or
brake, accelerator, and other vehicle con-
head injuries by deploying the curtain airbag within close proximity to, the airbag
trols.
on the side impacted in moderate to severe when it begins to inflate.
The beginning stage of airbag inflation is • To reduce the risk to the front passenger
side impact collisions and by deploying both of serious injury or death from a deploy-
the most forceful and can cause serious
curtain airbags when a rollover is detected. ing passenger’s airbag, make sure the
injuries or death if the occupant comes in
The curtain airbags are also designed to help contact with the airbag at this time. passenger always wears the seat belt
reduce the risk of complete and partial ejec- • Seat belts reduce the risk of injury in
properly, remains seated upright and all
tion from the vehicle through side windows the way back in the seat, and positions
rear impact collisions, and in lower-
in both side impact and rollover type acci- the seat as far back as possible.
speed frontal collisions because the air-
dents. bags are not designed to inflate in those
situations.


• Seat all infants and children in the rear  Infants and small children should never  NEVER put REAR-FACING CHILD
seat, properly restrained in an appropri- ride unrestrained, or lean against the RESTRAINT SYSTEMS or INFANT
ate child restraint system. instrument panel. They should never ride RESTRAINT SYSTEMS in the front pas-
 Airbags inflate very quickly and with held in your arms or on your lap. They senger seat. This places the infant too
can be seriously injured or killed in an close to the passenger’s airbag. During
great force. Do not sit on the edge of the
seat or sit with your lower legs too close to accident, especially when the airbags deployment of that airbag, the infant can 4
the instrument panel, or lean your head or inflate. Seat all infants and children in the be seriously injured or killed.
chest close to the steering wheel or the rear seat, properly restrained in an appro- Rear-facing child restraint systems or
instrument panel. priate child restraint system. Refer to infant restraint systems must only be used
 Do not put your feet or legs on or against “Child restraint systems” on page 4-14. in the rear seat.
the instrument panel.
Airbag

WARNING How the Supplemental

 FRONT-FACING CHILD RESTRAINT Restraint System works
SYSTEMS should be used in the rear seat N00407801587
whenever possible. If they must be used in
The SRS includes the following components:
the front passenger seat, move the seat to
the most rearward position and make sure
4 the child stays in the child restraint sys-
tem, properly restrained. Failure to follow
these instructions could result in serious
injury or death to the child.
10- Front impact sensors

11- Side impact sensors
12- Curtain airbag modules
The airbag control unit monitors the readiness

1- Airbag module (Driver) of the electronic parts of the system whenever
2- Passenger’s airbag off indicator the ignition switch or the operation mode is
3- SRS warning light under the following conditions. These include
4- Airbag module (Passenger) all of the items listed above and all related
5- Side airbag modules wiring.
6- Driver’s seat position sensor [Except for vehicles equipped with the
7- Passenger’s seat occupant classifica- F.A.S.T.-key]
WARNING tion sensor system The ignition switch is in the “ON” or
 Older children should be seated in the 8- Airbag module (Driver’s knee) “START” position.
rear seat with their seat belt properly 9- Airbag control unit [Vehicles equipped with the F.A.S.T.-key]
worn, and with an appropriate booster The operation mode is in ON.
seat if needed.
Refer to “Children who have outgrown The airbags will operate under the same con-
child restraint systems” on page 4-25. ditions as the airbag control unit.


When the impact sensors detect a sufficient unit with information on the seat’s fore-aft
front or side impact to deploy the airbag(s), position. The airbag control unit controls
Passenger’s seat occupant clas-
the appropriate airbag(s) will be deployed. deployment of the driver’s front airbag in sification sensor system
accordance with the information it receives N00418000364
When the airbag control unit detects rollover from this sensor. The passenger’s seat occupant classification
of the vehicle, curtain airbags will be If there is a problem involving the driver’s sensor system is attached to the front passen-
deployed. seat position sensor, the SRS warning light in ger seat cushion and provides the airbag con- 4
the instrument panel will come on. Refer to trol unit with information regarding the
When airbags deploy, some smoke is released
“SRS warning light” on page 4-31. occupant on the front passenger seat. The air-
accompanied by a loud noise. The smoke is
bag control unit controls deployment of the
not harmful, but do not intentionally inhale
the smoke as it may cause temporary irrita- WARNING passenger’s front airbag in accordance with
 If the SRS warning light comes on, have the information it receives from this system.
tion to people with respiratory problems.
the vehicle inspected by an authorized The passenger’s front airbag will not deploy
An inflated airbag will deflate quickly, so you Mitsubishi Motors dealer as soon as possi- in an impact when the system senses no occu-
may not even notice that the airbag was ble. pant on the front passenger seat or a child in a
inflated.  Please observe the following instructions child restraint system. In this case, the pas-
Airbag inflation does not prevent the driver to ensure that the driver’s seat position senger’s airbag off indicator will illuminate.
sensor can operate correctly. Refer to “Passenger’s airbag off indicator” on
from seeing or being able to steer the vehicle,
• Adjust the seat to the correct position, page 4-30.
and does not prevent people from leaving the
and sit well back against the seatback. If there is a problem involving the passen-
vehicle.
Refer to “Front seats” on page 4-2. ger’s seat occupant classification sensor sys-
• Do not recline the seatback more than tem, the SRS warning light in the instrument
CAUTION necessary when driving.
panel will come on.
 Airbags inflate very quickly and with great • Do not place metallic objects or luggage
Refer to “SRS warning light” page 4-31.
force. In certain situations, contact with an under the front seat.
inflating airbag may cause small cuts, abra-  If the vehicle is involved in a severe
sions, and bruises. impact, have the SRS sensor inspected by WARNING
an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer as  If any of the following conditions occur,
soon as possible. you should immediately have your vehicle
Driver’s seat position sensor inspected by an authorized Mitsubishi
Motors dealer as soon as possible:
N00417900223
The driver’s seat position sensor is attached

to the seat rail and provides the airbag control
WARNING WARNING
• The SRS warning light does not initially • Do not use a seat cover or a cushion.
come on when the ignition switch or the • Do not modify or replace the seat and
operation mode is under the following seat belt.
conditions. • Do not place luggage or other objects
4 • [Except for vehicles equipped with the
F.A.S.T.-key]
under the seat.
• Do not place and use an electronic device
The ignition switch is in the “ON” or such as a computer on the seat.
“START” position. • Do not place heavy objects on the seat or
[Vehicles equipped with the F.A.S.T.-key] stick pins, needles, or other objects into
The operation mode is in ON. it.
• The SRS warning light does not go out • Do not remove the seat cushion skin. The indicator normally comes on when the
after several seconds. • If any liquid is spilled on the seat, wipe it ignition switch is turned to the “ON” position
• The SRS warning light comes on while and dry the seat immediately. or the operation mode is put in ON, and goes
you are driving.  If the vehicle is involved in a severe out a few seconds later. In the following situ-
 To ensure that the passenger’s seat occu- impact, have the SRS sensors inspected by ations, the indicator will stay on to show that
pant classification sensor system can sense an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer as
correctly, observe the following instruc- the passenger front airbag is not operational.
soon as possible.
tions. Failure to follow these instructions
can adversely affect the performance of
 The front passenger seat is not occupied.
the passenger’s airbag system. Passenger’s airbag off indicator  The system senses that a child is using a
• Adjust the seat to the correct position, N00418101405
child restraint system on the front passen-
and sit well back against the seatback. ger seat.
The passenger’s airbag off indicator is
Refer to “Front seats” on page 4-2.
located as shown in the illustration. When the passenger’s seat occupant classifi-
• Do not recline the seatback more than
necessary. cation sensor system senses there is a person
• Never have more than one person (adult seated in the front passenger seat, the indica-
or child) sitting on the seat. tor goes out to show that the passenger’s front
• Do not place anything between the seat airbag is operational.
and the floor console.
• When attaching a child restraint system,
secure it firmly.
• Do not place luggage or other objects on
the seat.

WARNING SRS warning light WARNING

 If any of the following conditions occur, N00408300579  If any of the following conditions occur,
you should immediately have the airbag There is a Supplemental Restraint System there may be a problem with the SRS air-
system in your vehicle inspected by an bags and/or seat belt pre-tensioners, and
(SRS) warning light on the instrument panel.
authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer as they may not function properly in a colli-
soon as possible: sion or may suddenly activate without a
• The passenger’s airbag off indicator collision: 4
comes on when an adult is sitting on the • Even when the ignition switch or the
front passenger seat. operation mode is in ON, the SRS warn-
• The passenger’s airbag off indicator does ing light does not come on or it remains
not come on when the front passenger on.
seat is not occupied. • The SRS warning light comes on while
• The passenger’s airbag off indicator does driving.
not come on when the ignition switch is The SRS airbags and seat belt pre-ten-
turned to the “ON” position or the oper- sioners are designed to help reduce the
ation mode is put in ON. risk of serious injury or death in certain
• The passenger’s airbag off indicator does collisions. If either of the above conditions
not come on when a child is in a child The system checks itself every time the igni- occurs, immediately have your vehicle
restraint system on the front passenger checked by an authorized Mitsubishi
tion switch is turned to the “ON” position or
seat. Motors dealer.
the operation mode is put in ON. The SRS
• The passenger’s airbag off indicator
warning light will come on for several sec-
comes on and goes out repeatedly.
onds and then go out. This is normal and
 Do not attach any accessory to your vehi-
means the system is working properly. Driver’s and passenger’s front
cle that makes the passenger’s airbag off
indicator difficult or impossible to see. If there is a problem involving one or more of airbag system
You must be able to see the passenger’s the SRS components, the warning light will N00407900321
airbag off indicator and verify the status come on and stay on. The driver’s airbag is located under the pad-
of the passenger’s airbag system. The SRS warning light is shared by the SRS ded cover in the middle of the steering wheel.
airbag and the seat belt pre-tensioner system. The front passenger’s airbag is contained in
the instrument panel above the glove com-
partment. The driver’s airbag and the front
passenger’s airbag are designed to deploy at
the same time. However, the front passen-


ger’s airbag does not deploy when the front
passenger seat is not occupied or when the
system senses that a child is in the child
restraint system.
Driver
Front passenger
Driver’s knee airbag system

N00404500036
The driver’s knee airbag is located under the

steering wheel. The driver’s knee airbag is
designed to deploy at the same time as the
driver’s front airbag.

Deployment of front airbags

N00408001690
The front airbags and driver’s knee airbag ARE DESIGNED TO DEPLOY when …
Head-on collision with a solid wall at speeds Moderate to severe frontal impact within the shaded 4
of approx. 15 mph (25 km/h) or higher area between the arrows
The front airbags and driver’s knee airbag are The front airbags and driver’s knee airbag another stationary vehicle, a pole or a guard
designed to deploy when the vehicle suffers a will deploy if the impact to the vehicle’s main rail).
moderate to severe frontal impact. A typical structure is above a specific threshold level. The initial stage of airbag inflation is the
condition is shown in the illustration to the The threshold level is approximately 15 mph most forceful, and can cause serious injury or
left. (25 km/h) for a frontal collision straight into a death if you are too close to the deploying air-
solid flat wall that does not bend or deform. If bag. Accordingly, it is important that you
The front airbags and driver’s knee airbag are the impact to the vehicle’s main structure is always wear the available seat belt.
designed to deploy only in certain moderate below this threshold level, the front airbags
to severe frontal collisions within the shaded and driver’s knee airbag may not deploy. This
area between the arrows in the illustration to threshold level may also be higher if the vehi-
the right. cle hits something that absorbs the impact,
either by bending or moving (for example,


they cannot provide protection to the occu-
The front airbags and driver’s Collision with a utility pole, tree or other narrow
pants.
knee airbag MAY NOT DEPLOY object
Some typical situations are shown in the
when … illustration.
In certain types of front collisions, the front Since the front airbags and driver’s knee air-
4 airbags and driver’s knee airbag may not bag do not protect the occupants in all types
deploy, even if the deformation of the body of collisions, be sure to always wear your seat
Collision where the vehicle slides under the
seems to be large, because the vehicle’s body belts properly.
rear body of a truck
structure is designed to absorb the impact and
deform in order to help protect the occupants. Rear end collision to your vehicle
Some typical situations where the front air-
bags and driver’s knee airbag may not deploy
are shown in the illustrations.
Oblique frontal impact
Since the front airbags and driver’s knee air-
bag do not protect the occupant in all types of Side collision to your vehicle
frontal collisions, be sure to always wear your
seat belts properly.
The front airbags and driver’s Vehicle rolls onto its side or roof
knee airbag ARE NOT
DESIGNED TO DEPLOY when
…
The front airbags and driver’s knee airbag are

not designed to deploy in situations where

The front airbags and driver’s Collision with an elevated median/island or

knee airbag MAY DEPLOY when curb
…
The front airbags and driver’s knee airbag

may deploy if the underside of the vehicle 4
suffers a moderate to severe impact (under- Vehicle travels over a deep hole/pothole
carriage impact). Some typical situations are
shown in the illustration.
Since the front airbags and driver’s knee air-

bag may deploy in certain types of unex- WARNING
pected impacts, as shown in the illustrations,  Do not attach accessories to, or put them
and these unexpected impacts can move you Vehicle drives down a steep slope and hits the in front of, the windshield. They could
ground restrict the airbag inflation, or strike and
out of position, it is important to always wear
your seat belts properly. When worn properly, injure an occupant, when the airbag
seat belts can help maintain your distance inflates.
from the airbags when they begin to inflate.  Do not attach additional keys or accesso-
ries (hard, pointed or heavy objects) to the
The initial stage of airbag inflation is the
ignition key. Such objects could prevent
most forceful and can cause serious injury or the driver’s knee airbag from inflating
death if you are close to the deploying airbag. normally or could be propelled to cause
serious injury if the airbag inflates.
WARNING  Do not attach accessories to the lower por-
 Do not attach anything to the steering tion of the driver’s side instrument panel.
wheel’s padded cover, such as trim mate- Such objects could prevent the driver’s
rial, badges, etc. These could strike and knee airbag from inflating normally or
injure an occupant if the airbag inflates. could be propelled to cause serious injury
 Do not set anything on, or attach anything if the airbag inflates.
to, the instrument panel above the glove
compartment. Such items could strike and
injure an occupant if the airbag inflates.

Side airbag system Curtain airbag system

N00408100421 N00419201357
The side airbags (A) are contained in the The curtain airbags are contained in the front
driver and front passenger seatbacks. pillars and roof side rail.
The side airbag is designed to inflate only on The curtain airbag is designed to inflate only
4 the side of the vehicle that is impacted, even on the side of the vehicle that is impacted,
with no passenger in the front seat. even with no passenger in the seat.
Also, when the airbag control unit detects
rollover of the vehicle, the curtain airbags
will deploy.
WARNING
 Do not attempt to remove, install, disas-
semble or repair the SRS airbags.
 Do not place objects, such as packages or
pets, between the airbags and the driver
or the front passenger. Such objects can
adversely affect airbag performance, or
cause serious injury or death when the
airbag deploys. A label is attached to the seatbacks in vehi-
 Immediately after airbag inflation, some cles equipped with side airbags.
parts of the airbag system will be hot. Do
not touch them. You could otherwise be
burned. WARNING
 The airbag system is designed to work  The side airbags and curtain airbags can
only once. After the airbags deploy, they cause serious injury or death to anyone
will not work again. They must promptly too close to the airbag when it deploys. To
be replaced and the entire airbag system reduce the risk of injury from a deploying
must be inspected by an authorized side airbag and curtain airbag, all occu-
Mitsubishi Motors dealer. pants must be properly restrained and
seated well back, upright, and in the mid-
dle of the seat. Do not lean against the
door.

WARNING WARNING
 Do not attach a microphone (A) or any  Front-facing child restraint systems
other object around the part where the should also be used ONLY in the rear seat.
curtain airbag deploys, such as on the If a front-facing child restraint system
windshield, side door glass or front and must be used in the front passenger seat,
rear pillars and roof side rail. When the move the seat as far back as possible, and
curtain airbag inflates, the microphone or make sure that the child stays in the child 4
other object may be hurled with great restraint system, properly restrained and
force or the curtain airbag may not inflate away from the door.
correctly, resulting in death or serious  Do not allow a child to lean against or sit
injury. close to the passenger door, even if the
child is seated in a child restraint system.
WARNING The child’s head should also not lean
 In order to reduce the risk of injury from against or be close to the section of the
a deploying side airbag, do not allow any seatback where the side airbag and cur-
rear seat passengers to hold onto the back tain airbag are located. It is dangerous if
of either front seat. Special care should be the side airbag or curtain airbag deploys.
taken with children. Failure to follow all of these instructions
 Do not place any objects around the area could lead to serious injury or death to the
where the side airbags deploy. Such child.
objects can interfere with proper side air-  Work done on or in the vicinity of the side
bag deployment, and cause injury during airbag or curtain airbag components
deployment of the side airbag. should be done only by an authorized
 Do not place stickers, labels or additional Mitsubishi Motors dealer. There is a risk
of a serious injury or death. Improper
trim on the back of either front seat. They WARNING work methods can cause accidental side
can interfere with proper side airbag  Do not install seat covers or re-cover seats
deployment. airbag or curtain airbag deployment, or
that have side airbags. Covers can inter-
render a side airbag or curtain airbag
fere with proper side airbag deployment
inoperable. Either of these situations
and adversely affect side airbag perfor-
could result in serious injury or death.
mance.
 Never install a rear-facing child restraint
system in the front passenger seat. Rear-
facing child restraint systems MUST
ONLY be used in the rear seat.


The seat belts in your vehicle are your pri-
Deployment of side airbag and mary means of protection in an accident. The Side impact in an area away from the passenger
curtain airbag SRS side airbags and curtain airbags are
compartment
N00408201588 designed to provide additional protection.
Therefore, for your safety and the safety of all
The side airbag and curtain airbag occupants, be sure to always wear your seat
4 ARE DESIGNED TO DEPLOY belts properly.
when...
Motorcycle or other similar small vehicle colli-
The side airbag and curtain airbag sion with the side of vehicle
The side airbag and curtain airbag are MAY NOT DEPLOY when...
designed to deploy when the vehicle suffers a
moderate to severe side impact to the middle In certain types of side collisions, the side air-
of the passenger compartment. bag and curtain airbag may not deploy, even
Also when the vehicle detects rollover of the if the deformation of the body seems to be
vehicle, the curtain air bags will deploy. large, because the vehicle’s body structure is Collision with a utility pole, tree or other narrow
Typical situations are shown in the illustra- designed to absorb the impact and to deform object
tion. in order to help protect the occupants. There
are also cases where the side airbag and cur-
Moderate to severe impact to the middle of the tain airbag may not deploy at the same time,
vehicle body’s side structure depending on the location of the impact.
Some typical situations where the side air-
bags and curtain airbags may not deploy are
shown in the illustrations on the following
page.
Since the side airbags and curtain airbags do

When the vehicle detects rollover of the vehicle
not protect the occupant in all types of side
(Curtain airbag only)
collisions, be sure to always wear the seat
belts properly.

Oblique side impact Head-on collision SRS servicing

N00408501813
WARNING
 Any maintenance performed on or near
the components of the SRS should be per-
formed only by an authorized Mitsubishi
4
Rear end collision to your vehicle
Motors dealer. Do not permit anyone else
Vehicle rolls onto its side or roof (Side airbag to do any service, inspection, maintenance
only) or repair on any SRS components or wir-
ing. Similarly, no part of the SRS should
ever be handled, removed or disposed by
anyone except an authorized Mitsubishi
Pitch end over end Motors dealer.
Improper work methods on the SRS com-
ponents or wiring could result in an acci-
dental airbag deployment or could make
The side airbag and curtain airbag the SRS inoperable. Either of these situa-
ARE NOT DESIGNED TO tions could result in serious injury or
death.
DEPLOY when...
 Do not modify your steering wheel or any
other SRS component or related vehicle
The side airbag and curtain airbag are not part. For example, replacement of the
designed to deploy in situations where they steering wheel, or modifications to the
cannot provide protection to the occupants. front bumper or body structure can
Some typical situations are shown in the adversely affect SRS performance and
illustration. may lead to injury.
 If your vehicle has received any damage,
Since the side airbags and curtain airbags do you should have the SRS inspected by an
not protect the occupant in all types of colli- authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer to
sions, be sure to always wear your seat belts make sure it is in proper working order.
properly.

WARNING NOTE [For vehicles sold in Guam]

 Do not modify your front seats, center pil- • Steering wheel To contact Triple J Enterprises
lar or center console. Such modifications • Instrument panel Inc.
can adversely affect SRS performance and call (671) 649-3673 or write to:
may lead to injury. [For vehicles sold in U.S.A.]
Also, if you discover any tear or open Triple J Enterprises, Inc.
4 seam in the seat fabric near the side air-
To contact Mitsubishi Motors
P.O. Box 6066
North America, Inc.
bag, have the seat inspected by an autho- TAMUNING
rized Mitsubishi Motors dealer. call 1-888-648-7820 or write to:
GUAM 96931
 If you have found any scratch, crack or Mitsubishi Motors North Amer-
damage to the portion of the front and
ica, Inc. [For vehicles sold in Saipan]
rear pillars and roof side rail, you should
have the SRS inspected by an authorized Customer Relations Depart- To contact Triple J Motors
Mitsubishi Motors dealer. ment call (670) 234-7133 or write to:
P.O. Box 689040 Triple J Motors
Franklin, TN 37068 P.O. Box 500487
NOTE
 When you transfer ownership of the vehicle SAIPAN, MP96950-0487
to another person, we urge you to alert the [For vehicles sold in Puerto
new owner that it is equipped with the SRS Rico]
and refer that owner to the applicable sec- To contact Mitsubishi Motor Sales
tions in this owner’s manual.
of Caribbean, Inc.
 If you decide to junk or scrap your vehicle,
we urge you to first take it to an authorized call 1-787-251-8715 or write to:
Mitsubishi Motors dealer so that the SRS can Mitsubishi Motor Sales of
be made safe for disposal. Caribbean, Inc.
 If any of the following parts needs to be
modified for use by a handicapped person,
Customer Service Department
the advanced airbag system will be greatly P.O. Box 192216
affected. Please consult an authorized SAN JUAN PR 00919-2216
Mitsubishi Motors dealer.
• Driver’s seat
• Front passenger seat
• Front seat belt

Warning label
N00408600383
Occupant restraint warning labels for the SRS

are located in the vehicle as shown in the
illustration.
4
* - Located in the passenger’s side as well.

Features and controls
Break-in recommendations ..............................................................5-2 Lane Departure Warning (LDW) (if so equipped) .........................5-68
Keys .................................................................................................5-2 Tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) .....................................5-71
Electronic immobilizer (Anti-theft starting system) ........................5-3 Rear-view camera ..........................................................................5-74 5
Keyless entry system (if so equipped) ..............................................5-6 Instrument cluster ..........................................................................5-77
Free-hand Advanced Security Transmitter (F.A.S.T.-key) Multi-information display .............................................................5-77
(if so equipped) ............................................................................5-9 Indicator and warning light package .............................................5-87
Door locks ......................................................................................5-25 Indicators .......................................................................................5-88
Power door locks ...........................................................................5-27 Warning lights ................................................................................5-88
Child safety locks for rear door .....................................................5-28 Combination headlights and dimmer switch .................................5-91
Trunk lid ........................................................................................5-28 Turn signal lever ............................................................................5-98
Inside emergency trunk lid release ................................................5-30 Hazard warning flasher switch ......................................................5-99
Power window control ...................................................................5-31 Front fog light switch (if so equipped) ..........................................5-99
Parking brake .................................................................................5-33 Wiper and washer switch .............................................................5-100
Steering wheel height adjustment ..................................................5-34 Electric rear window defogger switch .........................................5-104
Inside rearview mirror ...................................................................5-35 Horn switch .................................................................................5-104
Outside rearview mirrors ...............................................................5-37 Link System .................................................................................5-104
Ignition switch ...............................................................................5-38 USB input terminal ......................................................................5-104
Starting the engine .........................................................................5-39 Sun visors ....................................................................................5-106
Manual transaxle (if so equipped) ..................................................5-41 12 V power outlets .......................................................................5-106
Continuously variable transmission (CVT) (if so equipped)..........5-43 Interior lights ...............................................................................5-107
Service brake .................................................................................5-48 Storage spaces ..............................................................................5-108
Hill start assist ................................................................................5-49 Cup holders ..................................................................................5-108
Brake assist system ........................................................................5-50 Bottle holders ...............................................................................5-109
Anti-lock braking system ...............................................................5-51 Convenience hook ....................................................................... 5-110
Electric power steering system (EPS) ............................................5-52 Assist grips .................................................................................. 5-110
Active stability control (ASC) .......................................................5-53
Cruise control (if so equipped) .......................................................5-56
Forward Collision Mitigation system (FCM) ................................5-60
Break-in recommendations
Break-in recommendations Keys

N00508701382 N00508801804
Advanced automobile manufacturing tech-

niques permit you to operate your new vehi- Type 1
cle without requiring a long break-in period
of low-speed driving. Two keys are provided. The keys fit all locks.
However, you can add to the future perfor-
5 mance and economy of your vehicle by
Keep one in a safe place as a spare key.
observing the following precautions during

the first 300 miles (500 km).
Drive your vehicle at moderate speeds during 1- F.A.S.T.-key
the break-in period. (with electronic immobilizer and key-
less entry system function)
 Avoid revving the engine. 2- Emergency key
 Avoid rough driving such as sudden starts, 3- Key number plate
sudden acceleration, prolonged high-
speed driving and sudden braking. These
would have a detrimental effect on the NOTE
engine and also cause increased fuel and  The keyless entry key and F.A.S.T.-key are a
oil consumption, which could result in 1- Key for the electronic immobilizer and precision electronic device with a built-in
malfunction of the engine components. Be keyless entry system signal transmitter. Please observe the follow-
2- Key number plate ing in order to prevent damage.
particularly careful to avoid full accelera-
• Do not leave where it may be exposed to
tion while in low shift position (low
heat caused by direct sunlight, such as on
gears). top of the dashboard.
 Do not overload the vehicle. Stay within Type 2 • Do not take the remote control transmitter
the seating capacity. (Refer to “Cargo load apart.
precautions” on page 6-11.) Two F.A.S.T.-keys and two emergency keys • Do not excessively bend the key or subject
 Do not use this vehicle for trailer towing. are provided. it to strong impacts.
Keep one F.A.S.T.-key and one emergency • Keep the remote control transmitter dry.
key in a safe place together as a set of spare • Keep away from magnetic objects such as
keys. key rings.
5-2 Features and controls

Electronic immobilizer (Anti-theft starting system)

[Except for vehicles equipped with the Free-
NOTE NOTE hand Advanced Security Transmitter
• Keep away from devices that produce mag-  When the theft-alarm is in the system opera-
(F.A.S.T.-key)]
netism, such as audio systems, computers tional status, the alarm operates if a door is
The electronic immobilizer is designed to sig-
and televisions. opened after using the key, the door lock
knob or the power door lock switch to unlock nificantly reduce the possibility of vehicle
• Keep away from devices that emit strong
electromagnetic waves, such as cellular the vehicle. theft. The purpose of the system is to immo-
phones, wireless devices and high fre-  The system does not enter the preparation bilize the vehicle if an invalid start is
attempted. A valid start attempt can only be
quency equipment (including medical
devices).
status if the keyless entry system or the
F.A.S.T.-key was not used to lock the vehi- achieved (subject to certain conditions) using
5
• Do not clean with ultrasonic cleaners. cle. a key “registered” to the immobilizer system.
• Do not leave the key where it may be All of the keys provided with your new vehi-
exposed to high temperature or high humid- cle have been programmed to the vehicle’s
ity.
Electronic immobilizer electronics.
 If you lose your key, to prevent the theft of (Anti-theft starting system)
the vehicle immediately contact an autho-
rized Mitsubishi Motors dealer.
N00509101963
NOTE
If you notify an authorized Mitsubishi CAUTION  In the following cases, the vehicle may not
Motors dealer of the key number, they can be able to recognize the registered ID code
 Do not make any alterations or additions to
make a new key. The key number is stamped from the key. This means the engine will not
the immobilizer system. Alterations or addi-
on the key number plate. Keep the key num- start even when the key is turned to the
tions could cause failure of the immobilizer.
ber plate in a safe place separate from the “START” position.
key itself. • When the key contacts a key ring or other
 No keys other than those registered in [For vehicles equipped with the Free-hand metallic or magnetic object
advance can be used to start the engine. Advanced Security Transmitter (F.A.S.T.-
Refer to “Electronic immobilizer (Anti-theft key)]
starting system)” on page 5-3. For information on operations for vehicles
Refer to “Free-hand Advanced Security equipped with the Free-hand Advanced Secu-
Transmitter (F.A.S.T.-key): “Electronic rity Transmitter (F.A.S.T.-key), refer to
immobilizer (Anti-theft starting system)” on “Free-hand Advanced Security Transmitter
page 5-20. (F.A.S.T.-key): Electronic immobilizer (Anti-
theft starting system)” on page 5-20.
Features and controls 5-3

NOTE NOTE Additional keys

• When the key grip contacts metal of  Electronic immobilizer is not compatible
another key with commercially available remote starting To add a key, you must already have 2 regis-
systems. Use of commercially available
tered keys. You need to register the ID code
remote starting systems may result in vehicle
to the vehicle.
starting problems and a loss of security pro-
tection. Registering the ID code can be done by your-
self, or by your authorized Mitsubishi Motors
5  A system failure is suspected when the igni-
tion switch is turned to the “START” posi- dealer.
tion, and the engine does not start. In such a For you to register the ID code yourself, fol-
case, contact an authorized Mitsubishi low the “Customer key programming” proce-
Motors dealer. dure below.
• When the key contacts or is close to other If you choose to have your authorized
immobilizer keys (including keys of other Mitsubishi Motors dealer register the ID
vehicles) Replacement keys
code, take your vehicle and all remaining
keys to your authorized Mitsubishi Motors
Only keys that have been programmed to the dealer.
vehicle’s electronics can be used to start the
vehicle.
NOTE
If you lose the key, you can order a key from  You are provided with 2 keys, but you may
your authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer by register up to 8 keys.
referring to the key number.
 In cases like the above, move the offending To prevent vehicle theft, the ID code for the
object(s) away from the key and turn the key vehicle keys must be changed. Customer key programming
back to the “ACC” or “OFF” position. Then Take your vehicle and all remaining keys to N00562201224
try to start the engine again. If the engine your authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer to You can program new keys to the system if
does not start, contact an authorized have your ID code changed. you have two valid (already registered) keys
and blank immobilizer key (specially cut for
 The key may not operate properly when it is
your vehicle at your Mitsubishi Motors
near an object or facility that emits strong
dealer) by doing the following:
electromagnetic waves.


1. Insert the first valid key into the ignition
switch and turn the key to the “ON” posi-
NOTE General information
 When the key registration is completed, the N00562301137
tion for 5 seconds.
immobilizer indicator will come on within 3 Your electronic immobilizer operates on a
2. Turn the key to the “OFF” position and
seconds of turning the ignition switch to the
remove the first key. radio frequency subject to Federal Communi-
“ON” position with the blank immobilizer
3. Within 30 seconds of removing the first cations Commission (FCC) Rules. This
key (specially cut for your vehicle at your
key, insert the second valid key into the Mitsubishi Motors dealer). device complies with part 15 of FCC Rules.
ignition and turn it to the “ON” position. Operation is subject to the following two con-
About 10 seconds later, the immobilizer ditions. 5
5. If you wish to register another key, per-
indicator will start to blink.
form the process again from step 1.  This device may not cause harmful inter-
4. When the immobilizer indicator starts
blinking, turn the second valid key to the ference.
“OFF” position and remove it. Within 30 NOTE  This device must accept any interference
seconds after doing so, insert a blank  It is not possible to register a key if:
received, including interference that may
immobilizer key into the ignition switch • the immobilizer indicator goes off during
cause undesired operation of this device.
and turn it to the “ON” position. Perform the procedure
this operation no more than 30 seconds • the immobilizer indicator does not come on WARNING
after the immobilizer indicator starts within 30 seconds after step 4.  Changes or modifications not expressly
blinking. When registration of the ID  The procedure will be terminated automati- approved by the party responsible for
code is complete, the immobilizer indica- cally if: compliance could void the user’s authority
tor will come on for 3 seconds then go off. • a period of 30 seconds or longer elapses to operate the equipment.
from the moment when the first key is
If an error occurs, the immobilizer indica-
turned to the “OFF” position to the moment
tor will go off during the procedure.
when the second key is turned to the “ON”
position
• a period of 30 seconds or longer elapses
from the moment when the second key is
turned to the “OFF” position to the moment
when the blank immobilizer key is turned
to the “ON” position
• more than 20 seconds elapses after the
immobilizer indicator starts blinking

Keyless entry system (if so NOTE Answerback function

 If you press the LOCK button (1) twice the
equipped)
horn will sound once. The horn of the keyless entry system answer-
N00509002190
back function can be changed as required.
Press the remote control transmitter buttons
This is done with the key removed from the
to lock or unlock the doors. To unlock ignition switch.
It can also help you signal for attention by
5 setting off the panic alarm.
Press the UNLOCK button (2) to unlock the NOTE
driver’s door only.  The answerback function will not operate if
Within approximately 2 seconds, press the any of the doors are open.
UNLOCK button one more time to unlock all
the doors.
The dome light will turn on for 30 seconds. Horn deactivation/reactivation
The turn signal lights will also blink twice.
The front side-marker and parking lights will
The answerback function can be set in the
also turn on for approximately 30 seconds.
following three ways.
Refer to “Welcome light” on page 5-97.
Each time the answerback function is set, a
chime will sound to tell you the condition of
1- LOCK ( ) button
NOTE the answerback function.
 If the UNLOCK switch (2) is pressed and no
2- UNLOCK ( ) button door or tailgate is opened within approxi- One chime: The horn will not sound.
3- PANIC button mately 30 seconds, relocking will automati- Two chimes: The horn will sound.
4- Indicator light cally occur. Four chimes: The horn will sound if the
 The amount of time after unlocking until the LOCK button is pressed twice
vehicle relocks automatically can be within 1 second.
adjusted. See an authorized Mitsubishi
To lock Motors dealer for details.
1. Remove the key from the ignition switch.
Press the LOCK button (1) to lock all the
2. Open the driver’s door and turn the com-
doors.
bination headlights and dimmer switch to
The turn signal lights will also blink once.
the “OFF” position.


3. Press the LOCK button (1) for 4 to 10 sec-
onds and press the UNLOCK button (2)
Replacement remote control NOTE
during this time. transmitters  You are provided with 2 remote control
transmitters, but you may register up to 4
4. Release in sequence the UNLOCK and N00543801090
remote control transmitters.
LOCK buttons within 10 seconds of Only remote control transmitters pro-
pressing the UNLOCK button in step 3. grammed with the vehicle’s electronics can
lock or unlock all doors.
General information
Turn signal lights deactiva-
If you lose the remote control transmitter, you N00546101153 5
tion/reactivation can order a remote control transmitter from Your keyless entry system operates on a radio
your authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer by frequency subject to Federal Communica-
The turn signal lights answerback function referring to the key number. tions Commission (FCC) Rules. This device
can be changed. To prevent vehicle theft, the ID code for the complies with Part 15 of FCC Rules.
If you want to change the answerback func- remote control transmitter must be changed. Operation is subject to the following two con-
tion, please contact an authorized Mitsubishi Take your vehicle and all remote control ditions.
Motors dealer. transmitters to your authorized Mitsubishi
Motors dealer to have your ID code changed.  This device may not cause harmful inter-
ference.
Using the panic alarm  This device must accept any interference
N00543700034 Additional remote control received, including interference that may
If you are near your vehicle and feel threat- transmitters cause undesired operation of this device.
ened, you may acti-vate the alarm to call N00543900078
attention as follows: To add a remote control transmitter, you must WARNING
already have 1 registered remote control  Changes or modifications not expressly
1. Press the PANIC button (3) for more than
transmitter. approved by the party responsible for
1 second.
Registering the ID code can be done by your compliance could void the user’s authority
2. The headlights will blink on and off and
authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer. to operate the equipment.
the horn will sound intermittently for
Take your vehicle and any remaining keys to
about 3 minutes.
your authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer.
3. To turn off the alarm, press any button on
the remote control transmitter.


3. With the Mitsubishi mark facing you,
Procedure for replacing the WARNING insert the cloth-covered tip of a flat blade
remote control transmitter bat- • Do not use, store, or take a battery any
screwdriver into the notch in the remote
place where it may be exposed to
tery extremely high temperature or extremely
control transmitter case and use it to open
N00544101263
low air pressure. the case.
WARNING
5  Do not swallow a coin type battery. CAUTION
• This product contains coin type battery.  When the remote control transmitter case is
If a coin type battery is swallowed, it can opened, be careful to keep water, dust, etc.
cause severe internal burns and can lead out. Also, do not touch the internal compo-
to death. nents.
There have been cases where a swallowed
 Dispose of used battery according to regula-
battery has caused severe internal burns
tions for the disposal of battery.
in just 2 hours.
• Keep new and used batteries away from
children. 1. Before replacing the battery, remove static
• If the remote control transmitter case electricity from your body by touching a
does not close securely, stop using the metal grounded object.
NOTE
 Be sure to perform the procedure with the
product and keep it away from children. 2. Remove the screw (A) from the remote
Mitsubishi mark facing you. If the
• If you think batteries might have been control transmitter.
Mitsubishi mark is not facing you when you
swallowed or placed inside any part of a
open the remote control transmitter case, the
person’s body, seek immediate medical
buttons may come out.
attention.
 To prevent an explosion or leakage of
flammable liquid or gas:
• Do not replace the battery with an incor-
rect type. Replace only with the same or
equivalent type.
• Do not dispose of a battery into a fire or
incinerator, or by mechanically crushing
or cutting the battery.

Free-hand Advanced Security Transmitter (F.A.S.T.-key) (if so equipped)

8. Check the keyless entry system to see that The F.A.S.T.-key must be carried by the
NOTE it works.
 The Federal Communications Commission
driver. The F.A.S.T.-key is required for
(FCC) ID number and the model number vehicle operations such as locking and
(radio certification) are indicated in the illus- NOTE unlocking the doors, starting the engine,
trated position.  You may purchase a replacement battery at and changing the operation mode. When
an electric appliance store. leaving the vehicle, make sure you are
 An authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer can carrying the F.A.S.T.-key and then lock
replace the battery for you if you prefer. the vehicle. 5
Free-hand Advanced Secu- WARNING

 Individuals who use implantable pace-
rity Transmitter (F.A.S.T.- makers or implantable cardiovascular-
key) (if so equipped) defibrillators should keep away from the
external and internal transmitters. The
4. Remove the used battery.
N00503101251
5. Install a new battery with the + side (B) electromagnetic waves used in the
up. F.A.S.T.-key may affect the operation of
The Free-hand Advanced Security Transmit-
implantable pacemakers and implantable
ter (F.A.S.T.-key) enables the doors to be
cardiovascular-defibrillators.
locked and unlocked, the trunk lid to be
+ side
opened, and the engine to be started and the
operation mode to be changed simply by car-
- side rying it.
The F.A.S.T.-key can also be used as the
Coin type remote control transmitter of the keyless
battery entry system.
CR1620 Refer to “Free-hand Advanced Security
Transmitter (F.A.S.T.-key): Keyless entry
system” on page 5-22.
6. Close the remote control transmitter
firmly.
7. Attach the screw (A) removed in step 2.


The operations possible with the F.A.S.T.-
key can be modified as stated below.
NOTE
Use the emergency key in such circum-
(Keyless entry operations are possible.)
stances.
For details, contact an authorized
Refer to “To operate without using the
Mitsubishi Motors dealer. F.A.S.T.-key” on page 5-20.
• Enabling only the locking and unlocking  The F.A.S.T.-key is constantly performing
of the doors and the opening of the trunk reception operations in its communication
lid
5 • Enabling only the starting of the engine
with the vehicle. This means that the battery
is always running down, regardless of how
• Deactivating the F.A.S.T.-key often the F.A.S.T.-key is used. The battery
life is about 1 to 2 years, depending on the
usage conditions.
NOTE  Since the F.A.S.T.-key is constantly perform-
 The F.A.S.T.-key uses weak electromagnetic ing reception operations, the reception of
waves. strong electromagnetic waves can accelerate
A- External transmitter In cases such as the following, operation the running down of the battery. Do not place
B- Internal transmitter may be improper or unstable. near to electrical appliances such as televi-
• The vehicle is near a facility that emits sions or computers.
strong electromagnetic waves, such as a TV
WARNING transmitting tower, a power station, a radio
 Individuals using other electro-medical station or an airport Operating range of the
apparatus besides implantable pacemak- • The key is carried together with other com- F.A.S.T.-key
ers and implantable cardiovascular-defi- munication devices such as cellular phones N00503201308
brillators should check with the or radios, or electrical appliances such as
computers
When a person enters the operating range of
manufacturer of the apparatus to confirm
the effect of the electromagnetic waves • The F.A.S.T.-key touches or is covered by a
the F.A.S.T.-key while carrying the F.A.S.T.-
used by the F.A.S.T.-key. The electromag- metal object key and presses the driver’s door lock/unlock
netic waves may affect the operations of • A keyless entry system is being used switch the trunk lid open switch, verification
the electro-medical apparatus. nearby of the ID code is performed.
• The battery of the F.A.S.T.-key is run down The doors can only be locked and unlocked,
• The vehicle is in a location with strong the trunk lid can only be opened, the engine
electromagnetic waves or noise can only be started and the operation mode
can only be changed when the ID codes of the
vehicle and F.A.S.T.-key match.

Operating range for starting the

engine and changing the opera-
tion mode
N00503301093
The operating range is the interior of the

vehicle.
5
*: Front of the vehicle

NOTE : Operating range
 When the battery of the F.A.S.T.-key has run
down or there are strong electromagnetic
waves or noise in the area, the operating NOTE
range could decrease or operations could  Only the F.A.S.T.-key that is detectable by
become unstable. the doors and the trunk lid can lock and
unlock the doors and open the trunk lid.
 The system may not operate if the F.A.S.T.- *: Front of the vehicle
Operating range for locking and key is too close to the windshield, door win- : Operating range
unlocking the doors and opening dows or trunk lid.
 Even if the F.A.S.T.-key is within about 2.3
the trunk lid feet (70 cm) of the driver’s door lock/unlock NOTE
switch or the trunk lid open switch, the sys-  Even if the F.A.S.T.-key is within the operat-
The operating range is within about 2.3 feet tem may not operate if the key is close to the ing range, it may not be possible to start the
(70 cm) of the driver’s door lock/unlock ground or in a high position.
engine and change the operation mode if the
switch and the trunk lid open switch.  If the F.A.S.T.-key is within the operating key is in a storage space such as the glove
range, even a person not carrying the compartment, on top of the instrument panel,
F.A.S.T.-key can lock and unlock the doors or in the door pocket or luggage compart-
or open the trunk lid by pressing the driver’s ment.
door lock/unlock switch or the trunk lid open
switch.


Also refer to “Door locks”, “Power door
NOTE Driver’s door lock/unlock switch
locks” on pages 5-25 and 5-27 respectively.
 Even if the F.A.S.T.-key is inside the vehicle,
it may not be possible to start the engine and Press the driver’s door lock/unlock switch
change the operation mode if the key is too (A) to unlock only the driver’s door.
close to a door or door window.
Within about 2 seconds, press the driver’s
door lock/unlock switch one more time to
To operate using the F.A.S.T.- unlock all the doors.
5 key
N00503401430 Driver’s door lock/unlock switch
To lock
NOTE
While carrying the F.A.S.T.-key, press the  In cases such as the following, the F.A.S.T.-
driver’s door lock/unlock switch (A) within key does not operate.
the operating range to lock all the doors and • There is a F.A.S.T.-key in the passenger
trunk lid. compartment
The turn signal lights will blink once and the • A door is open or ajar
buzzer will sound once. • The operation mode is not in OFF.
 The time within which locking confirmation
Also refer to “Doors locks”, “Power door is possible can be adjusted. See an autho- NOTE
locks” and “Trunk lid” on pages 5-25, 5-27 rized Mitsubishi Motors dealer for details.
 Settings can be changed so that all the doors
and 5-28 respectively. are unlocked automatically by pressing the
driver’s door lock/unlock switch once.
To unlock See an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer
for details.
While carrying the F.A.S.T.-key within the  If the doors are unlocked using the driver’s
operating range, you can unlock the doors by door lock/unlock switch when all doors are
locked and no doors are opened within about
using the F.A.S.T.-key.
30 seconds, the doors will automatically re-
The dome light will turn on for 30 seconds.
lock.
The turn signal lights will blink twice and the
buzzer will sound twice.

NOTE To open the trunk lid

 The amount of time after unlocking until the N00590900056
vehicle relocks automatically can be

adjusted. See an authorized Mitsubishi Press the trunk lid open switch (B) to open
Motors dealer for details. the trunk lid.
 In cases such as the following, the F.A.S.T.-
key does not operate. Trunk lid open switch
• The operation mode is not in OFF. 5
 Functions settings can be modified as stated
below.
See an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer
for details.
• Activating the operation confirmation func- CAUTION
tion (blinking of the turn signal lights) only  The indicator light (A) will flash orange
during locking, or only during unlocking. when there is a problem or malfunction in
• Deactivating the operation confirmation Free-hand Advanced Security Transmitter.
function (blinking of the turn signal lights) Never drive if the indicator light on the
and buzzer. engine switch is flashing orange. Immedi-
• Modifying the number of blinks in the ately contact your authorized Mitsubishi
operation confirmation function (blinking
Engine switch Motors dealer.
of the turn signal lights). N00513501186  If the engine switch operation is not smooth
• Making the buzzer sound when the To prevent vehicle theft, no F.A.S.T.-keys and feels like it is sticking, do not operate the
F.A.S.T.-key is removed from the passenger other than those registered in advance can be switch.
compartment when all the doors are closed. Immediately contact an authorized
used to start the engine. (Electronic immobi-
lizer function)
While carrying the F.A.S.T.-key, the engine
switch can be used to start the engine.
NOTE
 When operating the engine switch, press the
switch all the way in. If the switch is not
fully pressed, the engine may not start or the
operation mode may not change. If the
engine switch is pressed correctly, there is no
need to hold the engine switch down.


The indicator light on the engine switch illu-
NOTE minates orange.
 When the battery in the F.A.S.T.-key has
worn out, or the F.A.S.T.-key is out of the
vehicle, a warning lamp will blink for 5 sec- ON
onds.
All electrical accessories can be used.
The indicator light on the engine switch illu-
minates green.
5 The indicator light turns off when the engine
is running.
NOTE CAUTION
 Your vehicle is equipped with an electronic
 When the engine is not running, put the oper-
immobilizer. To start the engine, the ID code
ation mode in OFF. Leaving the operation
which the F.A.S.T.-key sends must match the
Operation mode of the engine one registered to the immobilizer computer.
mode in ON or ACC for a long time when
the engine is not running may cause the bat-
switch and its function (Refer to “Electronic immobilizer (Anti-theft
tery to be discharged, making it impossible
starting system)” on page 5-20)
to start the engine.
OFF  When the battery is disconnected, the current
operation mode is memorized. After recon-
The indicator light on the engine switch turns Changing the operation mode necting the battery, the memorized mode is
off. N00568001181 selected automatically. Before disconnect-
On vehicles equipped with continuously vari- If you press the engine switch without pressing the battery for repair or replacement,
able transmission (CVT), the operation mode ing the brake pedal {continuously variable make sure to put the operation mode in OFF.
transmission (CVT)} or the clutch pedal Be careful if you are not sure which opera-
cannot be put in OFF when the selector lever
tion mode the vehicle is in when the battery
is in any position other than the “P” (PARK) (manual transaxle) while the vehicle is sta-
is run down.
position. tionary, you can change the operation mode
 The operation mode cannot be changed from
in the order of OFF, ACC, ON, OFF. OFF to ACC or ON if the F.A.S.T.-key is not
ACC detected to be in the vehicle. Refer to “Oper-
ating range for starting the engine and
Allows operation of some electrical accesso- changing the operation mode” on page 5-11.
ries.

NOTE NOTE Put the operation mode in

 If the operation mode cannot be changed to • The ACC power auto-cutout function can
OFF and then start the engine
OFF, perform the following procedure. be deactivated. again.
1. Move the selector lever to the “P” For details, we recommend you to consult an If the warning is not can-
(PARK) position, and then change the authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer. celled, there is a fault in the
operation mode to OFF. (for vehicles electronic immobilizer (Anti-
with continuously variable transmission theft starting system).
Warning activation
(CVT))
N00503501284
Please contact an authorized 5
2. One of the other causes could be low bat- Mitsubishi Motors dealer.
tery voltage. If this occurs, the keyless With the F.A.S.T.-key, warnings are given
entry system and the F.A.S.T.-key opera- through buzzers and displayed symbols in If the following warnings show, the light goes
tion will also not operate. Contact an order to prevent mistaken operations or vehi- off if the correct action is taken.
authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer. cle theft.
When a warning operates, be sure to check  The ID codes of the F.A.S.T.-key and the
the vehicle and the F.A.S.T.-key. A warning is vehicle cannot be verified
ACC power auto-cutout function also shown if there is a problem in the
N00568101049
F.A.S.T.-key. Someone may be carrying a
When the vehicle is in ACC operation mode F.A.S.T.-key with a different
for approximately 30 minutes, the ACC If the following warning shows, contact an ID code, or the F.A.S.T.-key
power auto-cutout function automatically authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer. may not be within the operat-
cuts power to the audio system and other ing range
electronic devices that can be used during There is a problem in the Refer to “F.A.S.T.-key take-
ACC operation mode. F.A.S.T.-key out monitoring system” on
To enable power after ACC power auto-cut-
page 5-16.
out function, press the engine switch while in
ACC. The battery of the F.A.S.T.-
key is run down
NOTE
 It is possible to modify the functions as fol-  All the doors cannot be locked even when
lows: the driver’s door lock/unlock switch is
• The time until the power cuts out can be pressed.
changed to approximately 60 minutes.

Refer to “Key lock-in preven- NOTE Door ajar prevention system

tion system” on page 5-16.  The F.A.S.T.-key take-out monitoring system N00560001185
does not function if the F.A.S.T.-key is

Refer to “Door ajar preven- removed through a window without opening
tion system” on page 5-16. a door.
This setting can be changed.
Refer to “Operation mode See an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer When the operation mode is in OFF, and
OFF reminder system” on someone tries to lock the vehicle by pressing
5 page 5-16.
for details.
 The warning may display even if the the driver’s door lock/unlock switch while
F.A.S.T.-key is in the operating range for one of the doors is not fully closed, the warn-
starting the engine and changing the opera- ing light blinks and the buzzer sounds for
F.A.S.T.-key take-out monitoring tion mode. The surrounding environment or about 3 seconds as a warning, and the doors
system electromagnetic waves may make it impossi- cannot be locked.
N00559801196 ble to verify the ID codes of the F.A.S.T.-key
and vehicle.
Operation mode OFF reminder
system
Key lock-in prevention system N00560101199
When the operation mode is in any mode N00559901184
other than OFF, and a door is opened and the
F.A.S.T.-key is removed from the passenger
compartment the ID codes of the F.A.S.T.-
key and the vehicle can no longer be verified. When the operation mode is in any mode
When the door is closed, the warning light When the operation mode is in OFF, the other than OFF, and someone tries to lock the
blinks and the buzzer sounds 4 times as a F.A.S.T.-key is left in the passenger compart- vehicle by pressing the driver’s door
warning. If the vehicle starts, the inner buzzer ment, all the doors are closed, and someone lock/unlock switch, the warning light blinks
sounds once. tries to lock the vehicle by pressing the and the buzzer sounds for about 3 seconds as
driver’s door lock/unlock switch, the warning a warning, and the doors cannot be locked.
light blinks and the buzzer sounds for about 3
seconds as a warning, and the doors cannot be
locked.

Starting and stopping the WARNING NOTE

engine  Never run the engine in a closed or poorly  After the engine has not started for a while,
N00514601357
ventilated area any longer than is needed the brake pedal effort needed to start the
to move your vehicle out of the area. Car- engine may become greater. If this occurs,
bon monoxide gas, which is odorless and depress the brake pedal more firmly than
Tips for starting extremely poisonous, could build up and usual.
cause serious injury or death.
 The operation mode can be in any mode
to start the engine. 4. Press and hold the clutch pedal all the way 5
 The starter motor will be turning for up to down (manual transaxle).
CAUTION
approximately 15 seconds if the engine
switch is released at once. Pressing the
 Do not push-start the vehicle. NOTE
 Do not run the engine at high rpms or drive
engine switch again while the starter  For vehicles equipped with a manual trans-
at high speeds until the engine has had a
motor is still turning will stop the starter axle, the engine will not start unless the
chance to warm up.
motor. The starter motor will be turning clutch pedal is fully depressed (Clutch inter-
lock). This is a safety feature.
for up to approximately 30 seconds while
the engine switch is pressed. Starting the engine
If the engine does not start, wait for a 5. On vehicles equipped with manual trans-
while and then attempt to start the engine axle, place the gearshift lever in the “N”
Your vehicle is equipped with an electroni- (Neutral) position.
again. Trying repeatedly with the starter
cally controlled fuel injection system. This is On vehicles equipped with continuously
motor still turning will damage the starter
a system that automatically controls fuel variable transmission (CVT), make sure
mechanism.
injection. There is usually no need to depress the selector lever is in the “P” (PARK)
 If the engine will not start because the bat-
the accelerator pedal when starting the position.
tery is weak or discharged, refer to
engine.
“Jump-starting the engine” on page 8-2
To prevent battery drain, wait a few seconds
for instructions.
between attempts to restart the engine.
 A longer warm up period will only con-
sume extra fuel. 1. Make sure all occupants are properly
The engine is warmed up enough for driv- seated with seat belts fastened.
ing when the low coolant temperature 2. Make sure the parking brake is applied.
indicator goes out. 3. Press and hold the brake pedal down
Refer to “Low coolant temperature indi- firmly with your right foot.
cator” on page 5-88.

2. While depressing the brake pedal {contin- When the ambient temperature is -4 °F (-20
NOTE uously variable transmission (CVT)} or °C) or lower, it may not be possible to start
 On vehicles equipped with continuously
the clutch pedal (manual transaxle), press from a standstill even with the selector lever
variable transmission (CVT), the engine can
the accelerator pedal halfway and hold it in the “D” (DRIVE) or “R” (REVERSE)
only be started when the selector lever is in
the “P” (PARK) or “N” (NEUTRAL) posi- there, then crank the engine. Release the position.
tion. accelerator pedal, immediately after the This phenomenon occurs because the trans-
For safety reasons, the engine should be engine starts. axle has not warmed up sufficiently; it does
3. If the engine still will not start, the engine not indicate a problem. If this occurs, place
5 started when the selector lever is in the “P”
(PARK) position in which the driving wheels could be flooded with too much gasoline. the selector lever in the “P” (PARK) position
lock. While depressing the brake pedal (CVT) and let the engine idle for at least 10 minutes.
or the clutch pedal (manual transaxle), The transaxle will warm up, and you will be
6. Press the engine switch. push the accelerator pedal all the way able to start normally.
7. Confirm that all warning lights and warn- down and hold it there, then press the Do not leave the vehicle during warm-up
ing displays are functioning properly. engine switch to crank the engine. If the operation.
engine does not start after 5 to 6 seconds,
push the engine switch to stop cranking Stopping the engine
NOTE the engine, and release the accelerator N00568200014
 Minor noises may be heard on engine start- pedal. Put the operation mode in OFF.
up. These will disappear as the engine warms Wait a few seconds, and then press the WARNING
up. engine switch to crank the engine again  Do not operate the engine switch while
while depressing the brake pedal (CVT) driving except in an emergency. If the
When the engine is hard to start or the clutch pedal (manual transaxle), but engine is stopped while driving, the brake
do not push the accelerator pedal. If the servomechanism will cease to function and
After several attempts, you may experience braking efficiency will deteriorate. Also,
engine fails to start, repeat these proce-
that the engine still does not start. the power steering system will not func-
dures. If the engine still will not start, con-
tact your local Mitsubishi Motors dealer tion and it will require greater manual
1. Make sure that all electric devices, such effort to operate the steering. This could
as lights, air conditioning blower and rear or a repair facility of your choice for
result in a serious accident.
window defogger, are turned off. assistance.
Startability of continuously variable trans-

mission (CVT) vehicles with an ambient
temperature of -4 °F (-20 °C) or lower

NOTE If the F.A.S.T.-key is not operat- NOTE

 If you have to bring the engine to an emer- ing properly  Remove the object or additional key from the
gency stop while driving, press and hold the N00568301139
F.A.S.T.-key before inserting the key into the
engine switch for 3 seconds or more, or press key slot. The vehicle may not be able to
Insert the F.A.S.T.-key into the key slot of the
it quickly 3 times or more. The engine will receive the registered ID code from the regis-
floor console. Starting the engine and chang-
stop and the operation mode will go to ACC. tered key. Therefore, the engine may not start
ing the operation mode should be now possi- and the operation mode may not change.
 On vehicles equipped with continuously
ble.
variable transmission (CVT), do not stop the
engine with the selector lever in any position Remove the F.A.S.T.-key from the key slot
 The F.A.S.T.-key is fixed in the key slot
when inserted in the illustrated direction.
5
other than the “P” (PARK) position. If the after starting the engine or changing the oper- Simply pull out the key to remove it from the
engine is stopped with the selector lever in ation mode. key slot.
any position other than the “P” (PARK) posi-
tion, the operation mode will go to ACC
rather than OFF.
F.A.S.T.-key reminder
Put the operation mode in OFF after placing
the selector lever in the “P” (PARK) posi-
tion.
If the operation mode is in OFF and the

1. Stop the vehicle.
driver’s door is opened with the F.A.S.T.-key
2. Fully engage the parking brake while
in the key slot, a warning is issued with the
depressing the brake pedal.
warning light and the buzzer buzzing for
3. On vehicles with a manual transaxle,
approximately 3 seconds to remind you to
press the engine switch to stop the engine,
remove the key.
and then move the gearshift lever to the
1st (on a uphill) or “R” (Reverse) (on a
NOTE
 Do not insert into the key slot anything other
downhill) position.
than the F.A.S.T.-key. This could cause dam-
On vehicles equipped with continuously
age or a malfunction.
variable transmission (CVT), move the
selector lever to the “P” (PARK) position,
and then press the engine switch to stop
the engine.

To operate without using the NOTE Electronic immobilizer (Anti-

F.A.S.T.-key  Only use the emergency key in an emer- theft starting system)
N00514800017
gency. When the battery of the F.A.S.T.-key N00529600055
has run down, replace the battery as soon as
possible and use it as a F.A.S.T.-key again. The electronic immobilizer is designed to sig-
Emergency key  After using the emergency key, be sure to nificantly reduce the possibility of vehicle
N00515201174
reinsert it into the F.A.S.T.-key. theft. The purpose of the system is to immo-
bilize the vehicle if an invalid start is
5 The emergency key is built into the F.A.S.T.-
attempted. A valid start attempt can only be
key. Locking and unlocking the passenger’s
When the F.A.S.T.-key cannot be used, such door achieved (subject to certain conditions) using
as when the battery of the F.A.S.T.-key or the a F.A.S.T.-Key “registered” to the immobi-
vehicle has run down, the emergency key can Turn the emergency key toward the front of lizer system.
be used to lock and unlock the passenger’s the vehicle to lock the door. After checking All of the keys provided with your new vehi-
door. that the door is locked, turn the emergency cle have been programmed to the vehicle’s
key back to the center and remove it. electronics.
To use the emergency key (A), unlock the
lock knob (B) and remove it from the
Replacement F.A.S.T.-keys
F.A.S.T.-key (C).
N00561000042
Only the F.A.S.T.-keys that have been pro-

grammed to the vehicle’s electronics can be
used to start the vehicle.
If you lose the F.A.S.T.-key, you can order a

F.A.S.T.-key from your authorized Mitsubishi
Motors dealer by referring to the key number.
To prevent vehicle theft, take your vehicle
1- Lock and the remaining F.A.S.T.-keys to an autho-
2- Unlock rized Mitsubishi Motors dealer to have the ID
codes reprogrammed.


For F.A.S.T.-key programming, follow the 5. Release in sequence the LOCK and
Additional F.A.S.T.-keys
procedures below. UNLOCK buttons within 8 seconds of
N00561101109
pressing the LOCK button in step 4. (Per-
To add a F.A.S.T.-key, you must already have 1. Open the driver’s door. form the following procedure within 30
2 registered F.A.S.T.-keys. You need to regis- seconds.)
ter the ID code to the vehicle. NOTE 6. With the second valid F.A.S.T.-key, press
Registering the ID code can be done by your  Keep the driver’s door open until F.A.S.T.- the UNLOCK button for 4 to 8 seconds
authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer. Or it key programming is finished. Do not open or and press the LOCK button during this
can be done by yourself. close other doors. time.
5
For you to register the ID code yourself, fol- 7. Release in sequence the LOCK and
low the “Customer F.A.S.T.-key program- UNLOCK buttons within 8 seconds of
2. While carrying the first valid F.A.S.T.-
ming” procedure below. pressing the LOCK button in step 6. The
key, put the operation mode in ON. (Per-
If you choose to have your authorized immobilizer warning light will blink.
form the following procedure within 30
Mitsubishi Motors dealer register the ID
seconds.)
code, take your vehicle and all remaining
3. Insert the new F.A.S.T.-key into the key
F.A.S.T.-keys to your authorized Mitsubishi
slot.
Motors dealer.
NOTE
When registration of ID code is complete,
 You are provided with 2 F.A.S.T.-keys, but
you may register up to 4 F.A.S.T.-keys. the buzzer will sound 3 times and the
You can obtain blank F.A.S.T.-keys for your immobilizer indicator will come on for 30
vehicle from your Mitsubishi Motors dealer. seconds.
If an error occurs, F.A.S.T.-key program-
ming will be terminated and the buzzer
Customer F.A.S.T.-key program- will sound for 3 seconds.
ming
N00561201331 4. With the first valid F.A.S.T.-key, press the NOTE
UNLOCK button for 4 to 8 seconds and  F.A.S.T.-key programming will be termi-
You can program new F.A.S.T.-keys to the nated if the operation mode is put in OFF
system if you have two valid (already regis- press the LOCK button during this time.
before the immobilizer warning light starts
tered) F.A.S.T.-keys and blank (not regis- blinking.
tered) F.A.S.T.-key.


8. If you wish to register another F.A.S.T.-
To unlock
key, repeat the process from step 1 after
the operation mode is put in OFF. Press the UNLOCK button (2) to unlock the
9. When all F.A.S.T.-keys are registered, driver’s door only.
remove the F.A.S.T.-key from the key Within approximately 2 seconds, press the
slot. UNLOCK button one more time to unlock all
the doors.
NOTE
5  The immobilizer display will go off immedi-
The dome light will turn on for 30 seconds.
The turn signal lights will also blink twice.
ately if the operation mode is put in OFF. The front side-marker and parking lights will
 It is not possible to register a F.A.S.T.-key if also turn on for approximately 30 seconds.
the immobilizer warning light goes off dur- 1- LOCK ( ) button
Refer to “Welcome light” on page 5-97.
ing the procedure. 2- UNLOCK ( ) button
3- Trunk button NOTE
4- PANIC button  The door unlock function can be set so that
Keyless entry system 5- Operation indicator light all doors unlock when the UNLOCK button
N00515501441
(2) is pressed once.
Press the remote control transmitter buttons Refer to “Setting of door unlock function” on
to lock or unlock the doors. To lock page 5-23.
It can also help you signal for attention by
setting off the panic alarm. Press the LOCK button (1) to lock all the
doors. To open the trunk lid
The turn signal lights will also blink once. N00544401035
Press the trunk button (3) twice within about

NOTE 5 seconds and the trunk lid will be opened.
 If you press the LOCK button (1) twice, the The trunk lid must be closed manually after it
horn will sound once. has been opened.


3. Press the LOCK button (1) for 4 to 10 sec-
Answerback function Turn signal light deactivation/reactiva-
onds and press the UNLOCK button (2)
N00544501108 tion
during this time.
The horn of the keyless entry system answer- 4. Release in sequence the LOCK and
The turn signal lights answerback function
back function can be changed as required. UNLOCK buttons within 10 seconds of
can be changes.
This is done with the operation mode in OFF. pressing the LOCK button in step 3.
If you want to change the answerback func-
Horn deactivation/reactivation tion, please contact an authorized Mitsubishi
The answerback function can be set in the

Motors dealer. Using the panic alarm 5
N00544701171
following three ways. Buzzer deactivation/reactivation If you are near your vehicle and feel threat-
ened, you can activate the alarm to call atten-
One chime: The horn will not sound. The buzzer answerback function can be
tion as follows:
Two chimes: The horn will sound. turned ON or OFF as required.
Four chimes: The horn will sound if the 1. Press the PANIC button (4) for more than
LOCK button is pressed twice
Setting of door unlock function 1 second.
within 1 second. 2. The headlights will blink on and off and
N00544601138
The door unlock function can be set to the the horn will sound intermittently for
following two conditions. about 3 minutes.
1. Put the operation mode in OFF.
Each time the door unlock function is set, a 3. To turn off the alarm, press any button on
chime will sound to tell you the condition of the remote control transmitter.
the “OFF” position. the door unlock function.
3. Press the LOCK button (1) for 4 to 10 sec- NOTE
onds and press the UNLOCK button (2) Number of  The indicator light (5) comes on each time a
Condition
during this time. chimes button is pressed.
4. Release in sequence the UNLOCK and One chime All doors unlock  The F.A.S.T.-key can be used from about 40
LOCK buttons within 10 seconds of feet (12 m) away. However, this distance
Two chimes Driver’s door unlock only may change if your vehicle is near a TV
pressing the UNLOCK button in step 3.
transmitting tower, a power station, or a
1. Put the operation mode in OFF. radio station.

 This device may not cause harmful inter-
NOTE ference.
WARNING
 If the following conditions are observed after • If you think batteries might have been
 This device must accept any interference
pressing the LOCK (1) or UNLOCK (2) but- swallowed or placed inside any part of a
received, including interference that may
ton on the remote control transmitter, the person’s body, seek immediate medical
buttery in the F.A.S.T.-key may need to be cause undesired operation of this device. attention.
replaced.  To prevent an explosion or leakage of
• The doors cannot be locked or unlocked. WARNING flammable liquid or gas:
5 • The panic alarm cannot be operated.  Changes or modifications not expressly • Do not replace the battery with an incor-
rect type. Replace only with the same or
• The indicator light (5) is dim or does not approved by the party responsible for
come on. compliance could void the user’s authority equivalent type.
 If you lose your F.A.S.T.-key, please contact to operate the equipment. • Do not dispose of a battery into a fire or
an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer for a incinerator, or by mechanically crushing
replacement. or cutting the battery.
 If you wish to obtain an additional F.A.S.T.- • Do not use, store, or take a battery any
key, please contact an authorized Mitsubishi
Procedure for replacing the place where it may be exposed to
Motors dealer. A maximum of four F.A.S.T.- remote control transmitter bat- extremely high temperature or extremely
key can be programmed for your vehicle. tery low air pressure.
 To use the new remote control transmitters, it N00562101177
is necessary to register the key with the elec-
tronic immobilizer and keyless entry system. WARNING CAUTION
Refer to “Electronic immobilizer (Anti-theft  When the remote control transmitter case is
 Do not swallow a coin type battery.
starting system): Customer F.A.S.T.-key pro- opened, be careful to keep water, dust, etc.
• This product contains coin type battery.
gramming” on page 5-21. out. Also, do not touch the internal compo-
If a coin type battery is swallowed, it can
nents.
cause severe internal burns and can lead
 Dispose of used battery according to regula-
General information to death.
tions for the disposal of battery.
N00562001118 There have been cases where a swallowed
battery has caused severe internal burns
Your F.A.S.T.-key operates on a radio fre- in just 2 hours. 1. Before replacing the battery, remove static
quency subject to Federal Communications • Keep new and used batteries away from electricity from your body by touching a
Commission (FCC) Rules. This device com- children. metal grounded object.
plies with Part 15 of FCC Rules. • If the remote control transmitter case 2. Remove the emergency key from the
Operation is subject to the following two con- does not close securely, stop using the F.A.S.T-key.
ditions. product and keep it away from children.
Refer to “Emergency key” on page 5-20.

Door locks
3. With the Mitsubishi mark facing you, 5. Install a new battery with the + side (A)
insert the cloth-covered tip of a flat blade up.
WARNING
• Locked doors, in combination with the
screwdriver into the notch in the case and
+ side use of seat belts, can help reduce the risk
use it to open the case.
of ejection in an accident.
• Locked doors can help keep passengers,
especially small children, from opening
- side doors and falling out of moving vehicles.
• Locked doors can help prevent outsiders
from gaining access to your vehicle when
5
Coin type
you slow or come to a stop.
battery
 Lock your vehicle whenever you leave it.
CR2032
Children who get into unlocked vehicles
may not be able to get out. Children
6. Close the case firmly. trapped inside vehicles can quickly be
7. Install the emergency key removed in step overcome by heat and suffer serious
2. injury or death due to heat stroke.
NOTE 8. Check the keyless entry system to see that  Never leave a child alone in the vehicle. In
 Be sure to perform the procedure with the it works. addition to the risk of heat stroke, chil-
Mitsubishi mark facing you. If the dren can activate switches and controls,
Mitsubishi mark is not facing you when you resulting in an injury or fatal accident.
open the case, the transmitter may come out. NOTE  When closing a door, make sure that the
 You may purchase a replacement battery at door is fully closed and the door-ajar
an electric appliance store. warning display goes out on the informa-
4. Remove the used battery.  An authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer can tion screen on the multi-information dis-
replace the battery for you if you prefer. play. If the door is ajar it could open while
driving and cause an accident.
Door locks
N00509201599
WARNING
 Make sure all doors are tightly closed and
locked while driving.

Door locks
To lock and unlock with the key NOTE

(driver’s door) (except for vehi-  When locking or unlocking with the key,
only the driver’s door will be locked or
cles equipped with the F.A.S.T.- unlocked.
key) To lock or unlock all doors, use the power
door lock switches, the keyless entry system
or the F.A.S.T-key operation. (if so
Turn the key toward the front of the vehicle to
5 lock the door. After checking that the door is
equipped)
Refer to “Power door locks” on page 5-27,
locked, turn the key back to the center and “Keyless entry system” on pages 5-6 and
remove it. 5-22, and “To operate using the F.A.S.T.-
key” on page 5-12. 1- Lock
 In vehicles equipped with the F.A.S.T.-key, 2- Unlock
the passenger’s door can be locked and
unlocked using the emergency key.
The driver’s door can be unlocked without
Refer to “Emergency key” on page 5-20.
using the lock knob by pulling on the inside
door handle.
To lock or unlock the door from
the inside To lock the door without using
the key
Move the lock knob to the lock position to 1. Move the inside lock knob to the locked
1- Lock lock the door. position.
2- Unlock All doors should be kept locked while driv- 2. Be sure the keys are not inside the vehi-
ing. cle. Close the door.

Power door locks
Operation mode ON reminder To lock and unlock the doors

system (vehicles equipped with
the F.A.S.T.-key)
N00503800150
Using the power door lock switch
If the driver’s door is opened while the engine
is stopped and the operation mode is in any
position other than OFF, the operation mode 5
ON buzzer will sound intermittently to
remind you to put the operation mode in OFF.
Power door locks

Key reminder system (except N00509301688
for vehicles equipped with the

F.A.S.T.-key) NOTE
 When locking or unlocking with the key on 1- Lock
N00549600253
the driver’s door, only the driver’s door will 2- Unlock
If the ignition switch is turned off and the lock or unlock.
driver’s door is opened with the key in the  Repeated continuous operation between lock
ignition switch, the key reminder buzzer will and unlock could activate the power door All of the doors can be locked or unlocked by
sound intermittently to remind you to remove locking system’s built-in protection circuit, pressing the power door lock switch on the
the key. and prevent the system from operating. If driver’s or the front passenger door.
this occurs, wait about 1 minute before oper-
ating the power door lock switch.
Lock out protection
N00517300042
If the key is in the ignition switch or the oper-

ation mode is in any mode other than OFF
when you push the lock knob forward with
the driver’s door or passenger’s door open,
the lock knob will automatically return to the
unlocked position.

Child safety locks for rear door

door can be opened using the inside door han-
To unlock the doors Child safety locks for rear dle.
N00563401207
door
You can select the functions to unlock the N00509401315
WARNING
doors either using the ignition switch or the  Always keep the doors tightly closed and
engine switch, or using the selector lever locked when driving. An unlocked door
position {continuously variable transmis- may be accidentally opened by a passen-
sion (CVT)}.
5 These functions are not activated when the
ger, especially by a child who could fall
out. Also, if the doors are not locked, there
vehicle is shipped from the factory. To acti- is a greater risk of someone being thrown
vate or deactivate these functions, please from the vehicle in an accident.
contact your authorized Mitsubishi Motors
dealer.
Trunk lid
N00509501231
Using the selector lever position 1- To lock
{continuously variable transmis- 2- To release WARNING
sion (CVT)}  It is dangerous to drive with the trunk lid
Child safety locks help prevent rear passen- open since carbon monoxide (CO) gas can
All doors will unlock when the selector lever gers, especially children, from opening the enter the cabin. CO is an invisible, odor-
is moved to the “P” (PARK) position with the rear door using the inside door handle. less gas that can cause unconsciousness
ignition switch or the operation mode in ON. A lock lever for the child safety lock is pro- and even death.
vided on each rear door.  Do not allow children to have access to the
trunk by climbing into the trunk from
When the lever is in the lock position (1), the
outside of the vehicle. Always close the
rear door cannot be opened using the inside trunk lid when your vehicle is unattended.
door handle. If trapped in the trunk, it is possible to
To open the rear door when the child safety escape from the trunk by using the inside
lock lever is in the lock position, pull the out- emergency trunk release lever. (See
side door handle. “Inside emergency trunk lid release” on
When the lever is in the release position (2), page 5-30.)
the child safety lock is released and the rear

Trunk lid
CAUTION Using the remote control transmitter NOTE

 Do not stand behind the exhaust pipe when (Vehicles with F.A.S.T.-key)  The trunk area light comes on when the trunk
loading and unloading luggage. Heat from lid is opened, and goes out when it is closed.
the exhaust could lead to burns. Press the trunk button (Vehicles with
F.A.S.T.-key). (See “Free-hand Advanced
Security Transmitter (F.A.S.T.-key)” on page
5-9.)
To close
To open
The trunk lid will pop up to slightly. Lift it to
Pull the center portion of the trunk lid down- 5
ward as illustrated. Gently slam the trunk lid
open the trunk.
Operation from outside the vehicle from the outside so that it is completely
closed. Always ensure the trunk lid is
Operation from inside the vehicle securely closed.
Using the key (Vehicles with key cylin-
der)
Insert the key and turn it clockwise.
The trunk lid will pop up slightly. Lift it to

open the trunk.
Pull the trunk lid release lever, located to the

left of the driver’s seat, up to open the trunk. CAUTION
 Be careful to prevent catching anyone’s fin-
gers when closing the trunk lid.
CAUTION  Before starting the vehicle, be sure to con-
 Do not use the trunk lid release lever while firm that the trunk lid is closed. If the trunk
the vehicle is moving. If the trunk lid is lid opens while driving the vehicle, objects
opened, objects in the trunk could fall onto stored in the trunk could fall out onto the
the road and cause an accident. road.

Inside emergency trunk lid release

To open the trunk from the inside, move the
NOTE lever (A) in the direction of the arrow on the
 When closing the trunk lid, if you operate
lever. Push up on the trunk lid to open the
other than the center portion of the lid, it may
trunk and climb out.
be deformed and cannot be completely
closed.
5 Inside emergency trunk lid

release
N00509801188
The emergency trunk lid release is designed You and your family should familiarize your-
to provide a way to open the trunk lid from selves with the location and operation of the
inside the trunk. It was developed to help pre- emergency trunk lid release lever. Children
vent death and serious injuries to children should be taught not to play in or around
who might become locked inside a vehicle vehicles.
trunk. CAUTION
The emergency trunk lid release lever (see
WARNING  When loading the trunk, place your things so
 Children should never be left unsuper- that they will not touch the emergency trunk
illustration) is mounted on the trunk lid. lid release lever when you close the trunk.
vised in or around vehicles.
 Unsupervised children could lock them- Otherwise you could damage the lever and
The lever glows in the dark after exposure to
selves in an open vehicle or trunk. make it unusable.
sunlight.
 People trapped inside a vehicle or trunk,
even if only for a short period of time, can
quickly die from suffocation or heat
stroke, especially on hot days. Interior
temperatures in vehicles can rise in min-
utes.
 Keep your vehicle doors locked and the
trunk lid closed when not in use. Keep
your vehicle keys away from children.

Power window control
Power window control WARNING Driver’s switch

N00510800370  Never leave the vehicle without carrying
the key.
 Never leave children or unreliable adults
unattended inside the vehicle.
Main switch
N00548701195
5
The main switch located on the driver’s door
can be used to operate all the windows.
1- Driver’s door window switch
A window can be opened or closed by operat-
2- Front passenger door window switch
ing the corresponding switch.
3- Left rear door window switch
1- Open (down) Press the switch down to open the window,
4- Right rear door window switch
2- Close (up) and pull up the switch to close it.
5- Lock switch
If the driver’s door window switch is fully
pressed down/pulled up, the driver’s door
NOTE window automatically opens/closes com-
 Never try to operate the main switch and pletely.
sub-switch in different directions at the same If you want to stop the window movement,
time. This will freeze the window in posi- operate the switch lightly in the reverse direc-
tion. tion.
 Operating the power windows repeatedly
with the engine stopped will run down the
battery. Use the window switches only while
the engine is running.
WARNING
 Before operating the power windows,
make sure that nothing can be trapped
(head, hands, fingers, etc.) in the window.

Power window control

stopped. However, once the driver’s door or
Sub switch the front passenger’s door is opened, the
WARNING
N00548800098  Before driving with a child in the vehicle,
power windows cannot be operated.
be sure to lock the window switch to make
it inoperative. Children tampering with
Lock switch the switch could easily trap their hands or
N00549001195 heads in the window.
When this switch is in the lock mode, the pas-
5 senger door switches cannot be used to open
or close the door windows, and the main Safety mechanism (Driver’s
switch will open or close only the driver’s door window)
door window. To unlock the switch, press it N00528801220
again.
If a hand or head is trapped, for safety the
1- Close door window is automatically lowered a little.
2- Open After the door window is lowered, clear the
obstruction, then pull up the switch again to
close the door window.
Each sub-switch can be used for it’s own pas-
senger door window, unless the driver’s win-
dow lock switch is activated. WARNING
 If the battery terminals are disconnected
or the fuse for electric window is replaced,
NOTE the safety mechanism will be cancelled.
 The rear door windows open only half-way. If a hand or head got trapped, a serious
injury could result.
1- Lock
Power window timer function 2- Unlock
N00548900132 CAUTION
The power windows can be run up or down  The safety mechanism is deactivated just
before the door window closes. This allows
when the ignition switch or the operation
the door window to close completely. There-
mode is in ON.
fore be especially careful that fingers are not
The door windows can be opened or closed trapped in the door window opening.
for a 30-second period after the engine is

Parking brake
CAUTION NOTE Parking brake

 The safety mechanism is deactivated while  If the battery terminals are disconnected or N00511400399
the switch is pulled up. Therefore be espe- the fuse for electric window is replaced, the
To park the vehicle, first bring it to a com-
cially careful that fingers are not trapped in safety mechanism will be cancelled and the
the door window opening. door window will not automatically
plete stop, fully engage the parking brake,
 Do not deliberately trap your hands or head open/close completely. and then move the gearshift lever to 1st (on a
in order to activate the safety mechanism. If the window is open, repeatedly raise the uphill) or “R” (Reverse) (on a downhill) posi-
tion for vehicles equipped with a manual
Your hand or head could be trapped and per-
sonal injury could result.
driver’s door window switch until the win-
dow has been fully closed. Following this, transaxle, set the selector lever to “P” 5
release the switch, raise the switch once (PARK) position for vehicles equipped with a
again and hold it in this condition for at least continuously variable transmission (CVT).
NOTE 1 second, then release it. You should now be
able to operate the driver’s door window in
 The safety mechanism can be activated if the
the normal fashion.
driving conditions or other circumstances
cause the door window to be subjected to a
physical shock similar to that caused by What to do if you hear wind
trapped hand or head.
 If the safety mechanism is activated 5 or
buffeting when driving
N00551400043
more times in a row, the safety mechanism
will be cancelled and the door window will Wind buffeting can be described as the per-
not close correctly. ception of pressure on the ears or a booming
In such a case, the following procedure or rumbling sound. Your vehicle may exhibit
should be implemented to rectify this situa- wind buffeting when driving with one or both
tion.
rear door windows down or partially opened.
If the window is open, repeatedly raise the
This is a normal occurrence that can be mini-
driver’s door window switch until that win-
dow has been fully closed. Following this, mized. If the buffeting occurs with the rear
release the switch, raise the switch once door windows open, open the front door win-
again and hold it in this condition for at dows as well as the rear door windows to
least1 second, then release it. You should minimize the condition.
now be able to operate in the normal fashion.

Steering wheel height adjustment
To apply To deactivate CAUTION

 Before driving, be sure that the parking
brake is fully released and brake warning
light is off.
If you drive without the parking brake fully
released, the warning lamp will illuminate
and a buzzer sounds when the vehicle speed
5 exceeds 5 mph (8 km/h).
If a vehicle is driven without releasing the
parking brake, the brakes will be overheated,
resulting in ineffective braking and possible
brake failure.
1- Pull the lever up without pushing the 1- Pull the lever up slightly.
button at the end of hand grip. 2- Press and hold the button at the end of Steering wheel height
When the parking brake is set and the the hand grip.
ignition switch or the operation mode is 3- Push the lever downward.
adjustment
N00511500231
in the “ON” position, the brake warn-
ing light in the instrument cluster will To adjust the steering wheel to the desired
When parking on a hill, set the parking brake, position, move the lever upward or down-
come on.
and turn the front wheels toward the curb on a ward while moving the steering wheel to the
Before driving, be sure to release the downhill, or away from the curb on an uphill. desired level.
parking brake.

Inside rearview mirror
Inside rearview mirror WARNING

N00511601532  Do not attempt to adjust the inside rear-
Adjust the inside rearview mirror only after view mirror while driving. This can be
making any seat adjustments so as to have a dangerous.
clear view to the rear of the vehicle. Be sure to adjust the mirror before driv-
ing.
Adjust the inside mirror to maximize the

Type 1
view through the rear window. 5
A- Wheel lock To adjust the vertical mirror

B- Release position
It is possible to move the mirror up and down
Type 2
WARNING to adjust its position.
 After adjusting, make sure the lever is
secured in the locked (A) position.
 Do not attempt to adjust the steering
wheel while driving. This can be danger-
ous.
 When releasing the lever (moving it to the Type 3
position (B)), be sure to hold the steering
wheel firmly. Otherwise, the steering
wheel may slip down too suddenly.

Inside rearview mirror
To adjust the mirror position To reduce the glare Type 2

It is possible to move the mirror up/down and When the headlights of the vehicles behind
left/right to adjust its position. you are very bright, the reflection factor of
Type 1
the rearview mirror is automatically changed
The day/night knob (A) at the bottom of the to reduce the glare.
mirror can be used to adjust the mirror to
5 reduce the glare from the headlights of vehi-
cles behind you during night driving.
When the ignition switch is turned to the

“ON” position or the operation mode is put in
ON, the reflection factor of the mirror is auto-
1- Daytime position matically changed.
2- Night position
NOTE
 Do not hang items on, or spray glass cleaner
on the sensor (1), as reduced sensitivity
could result.

Outside rearview mirrors
Type 3 NOTE WARNING

 If you want to stop automatic mode, press  Your passenger’s side mirror is convex.
When the headlights of the vehicles behind the switch (3) for approximately 2 seconds The objects you see in the mirror will look
you are very bright, the reflection factor of and the indicator (1) will go off. smaller and farther away than they
the rearview mirror is automatically changed To return to automatic mode, press the appear in a regular flat mirror.
to reduce the glare. switch again or perform the following opera- Do not use this mirror to estimate the dis-
tion. tance of vehicles following you when
[Except for vehicles equipped with the Free-
hand Advanced Security Transmitter
changing lanes.
5
(F.A.S.T.-key)]
Turn the ignition switch to the “ON” position To adjust the mirror position
after turning to “OFF” or “ACC” position. N00549100144
[For vehicles equipped with the Free-hand The outside rearview mirrors can be adjusted
Advanced Security Transmitter (F.A.S.T.- when the ignition switch or the operation
key)] mode is in ON or ACC.
Put the operation mode in ON after putting
Move the lever (A) to the same side as the
the operation mode in OFF.
mirror you wish to adjust.
Normally, use the automatic mode. When the Outside rearview mirrors
ignition switch is turned to the “ON” position N00512200206
or the operation mode is put in ON, the green Adjust the outside rearview mirrors only after
indicator (1) illuminates and the reflection making any seat adjustments so as to have a
factor of the mirror is automatically changed. clear view to the rear of the vehicle.
NOTE WARNING
 Do not hang items on, or spray glass cleaner  Do not attempt to adjust the outside rear-
on the sensor (2), as reduced sensitivity view mirrors while driving. This can be
could result. dangerous.
Be sure to adjust the mirrors before driv- L- Left outside mirror adjustment
ing. R- Right outside mirror adjustment

Ignition switch
Press the switch (B) to adjust the mirror posi-
tion. Ignition switch OFF
N00512401739
1- Up [For vehicles equipped with the Free-hand The engine is off. The key can be inserted and
2- Down Advanced Security Transmitter (F.A.S.T.- removed only when the switch is in this posi-
3- Right key)] tion.
4- Left For information on operations for vehicles
equipped with the Free-hand Advanced Secu- ACC
5 rity Transmitter (F.A.S.T.-key), refer to
NOTE “Free-hand Advanced Security Transmitter
Allows operation of some electrical accesso-
 After adjusting, return the lever to the “•” (F.A.S.T.-key):
ries with the engine off.
(OFF) position (C). Engine switch” on page 5-13.
[Except for vehicles equipped with the ON

To fold the mirror Free-hand Advanced Security Transmit-
ter (F.A.S.T.-key)]
N00549200099 The engine runs and all accessories can be
The outside mirror can be manually folded in used.
towards the side window to prevent damage
when parking in tight locations. START
Engages the starter. Release the key when the

engine starts.It will automatically return to
the “ON” position.
NOTE
 Your vehicle is equipped with an electronic
immobilizer. To start the engine, the ID code
(which the transponder inside the key sends)
must match the one registered to the immobi-
lizer computer. (Refer to “Electronic immo-
bilizer” on page 5-3.)

Starting the engine
To remove the key CAUTION Tips for starting

N00550901240  Do not turn the key to the “START” position
1. Set the selector lever to the “P” (PARK) when the engine is running, doing so could  Do not operate the starter motor continu-
position {continuously variable transmis- damage the starter motor. ously for longer than 15 seconds as this
sion (CVT)}. could run the battery down or damage the
2. Turn the key to the “OFF” position and starter motor. If the engine does not start,
remove it.
Starting the engine turn the ignition switch back to the “OFF”
N00512601861
position, wait a few seconds, and then try 5
[For vehicles equipped with the Free-hand again. Trying repeatedly with the engine
Advanced Security Transmitter (F.A.S.T.- or starter motor still turning will damage
key)] the starter mechanism.
For information on operation for vehicles  If the engine will not start because the bat-
equipped with the Free-hand Advanced Secu- tery is weak or discharged, refer to
rity Transmitter (F.A.S.T.-key), refer to “Jump-starting the engine” (on page 8-2)
“Free-hand Advanced Security Transmitter for instructions.
(F.A.S.T.-key): Starting and stopping the  A longer warm up period will only con-
engine” on page 5-17. sume extra fuel. The engine is warmed up
enough for driving when the low coolant
[Except for vehicles equipped with the temperature indicator goes out.
Free-hand Advanced Security Transmit- Refer to “Low coolant temperature indi-
CAUTION ter (F.A.S.T.-key)] cator” on page 5-88.
 If the engine is stopped while driving, the
power brake booster will cease to function
and braking efficiency will deteriorate. Also, WARNING
the power steering system will not function  Never run the engine in a closed or poorly
and it will require greater manual effort to ventilated area any longer than is needed
operate the steering. to move your vehicle out of the area. Car-
 Do not leave the key in the “ON” position for bon monoxide gas, which is odorless and
a long time when the engine is not running. extremely poisonous, could build up and
Doing so will cause the battery to be dis- cause serious injury or death.
charged.

Starting the engine
CAUTION NOTE NOTE

 Do not push-start the vehicle.  On vehicles equipped with manual transaxle,  Minor noises may be heard on engine start-
 Do not run the engine at high rpms or drive the starter will not operate unless the clutch up. These will disappear as the engine warms
at high speeds until the engine has had a pedal is fully depressed (Clutch interlock). up.
chance to warm up.
 Release the ignition switch as soon as the 6. On vehicles equipped with manual trans-
engine starts. Otherwise, the starter motor axle, place the gearshift lever in the “N” When the engine is hard to start
5 will be damaged.
(Neutral) position.
On vehicles equipped with continuously After several attempts, you may experience
variable transmission (CVT), make sure that the engine still does not start.
Starting the engine the selector lever is in the “P” (PARK)
position. 1. Make sure that all electric devices, such
This model is equipped with an electronically as lights, air conditioning blower and rear
controlled fuel injection system. This is a sys- NOTE window defogger, are turned off.
tem that automatically controls fuel injection.  On vehicles equipped with CVT, the starter 2. While depressing the brake pedal {contin-
There is usually no need to depress the accel- will not operate unless the selector lever is in uously variable transmission (CVT)} or
erator pedal when starting the engine. the “P” (PARK) or “N” (NEUTRAL) posi- the clutch pedal (manual transaxle), press
The starter should not be run for more than 15 tion. the accelerator pedal halfway and hold it
seconds at a time. For safety reasons, start the engine in the “P” there, then crank the engine. Release the
(PARK) position so that the wheels are accelerator pedal, immediately after the
To prevent battery drain, wait a few seconds
locked. engine starts.
between attempts to restart the engine.
1. Make sure all occupants are properly 7. Turn the ignition switch to the “ON” posi-
seated with seat belts fastened. tion and make certain that all warning
2. Insert the ignition key. lights are functioning properly before
3. Make sure the parking brake is applied. starting the engine.
4. Press and hold the brake pedal down 8. Turn the ignition switch to the “START”
firmly with your right foot. position without pressing the accelerator
5. Press and hold the clutch pedal all the way pedal. Release the key when the engine
down (manual transaxle). starts.

Manual transaxle (if so equipped)

3. If the engine still will not start, the engine not indicate a problem. If this occurs, place
could be flooded with too much gasoline. the selector lever in the “P” (PARK) position
NOTE
 During cold weather, shifting may be diffi-
While depressing the brake pedal (CVT) and let the engine idle for at least 10 minutes.
cult until the transaxle lubricant has warmed
or the clutch pedal (manual transaxle), The transaxle will warm up, and you will be
up. This is normal and not harmful to the
push the accelerator pedal all the way able to start normally. transaxle.
down and hold it there, then crank the Do not leave the vehicle during warm-up
engine for 5 to 6 seconds. Return the igni- operation.
tion switch to the “OFF” position and
release the accelerator pedal. Wait a few
To start 5
seconds, and then crank the engine again
Manual transaxle (if so
for 5 to 6 seconds while depressing the equipped) Press the clutch pedal all the way down and
brake pedal (CVT) or the clutch pedal N00512701237
shift into 1st or “R” (Reverse) position, oper-
(manual transaxle), but do not push the ating the gearshift lever slowly. Then gradu-
accelerator pedal. Release the ignition The shift pattern below is shown on the gear- ally release the clutch pedal while depressing
switch if the engine starts. If the engine shift lever. Press the clutch pedal all the way the accelerator pedal.
fails to start, repeat these procedures. If down while shifting gears.
the engine still will not start, contact your CAUTION
local Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair  Do not move the gearshift lever into reverse
facility of your choice for assistance. while the vehicle is moving forward; doing
so will damage the transaxle.
Startability of CVT vehicle with  Do not rest your foot on the clutch pedal
because this will cause premature clutch
ambient temperature of -4 °F (-20 wear or damage.
°C) or lower  Do not coast in the “N” (Neutral) position
(illegal in many states).
When the ambient temperature is -4 °F (-20  Do not use the gearshift lever as a handrest,
°C) or lower, it may not be possible to start because this can result in premature wear of
the transaxle shift forks.
from a standstill even with the selector lever
in the “D” (DRIVE) or “R” (REVERSE)
position.
This phenomenon occurs because the trans-
axle has not warmed up sufficiently; it does

Manual transaxle (if so equipped)
NOTE Upshifting Shift point Upshift speeds

 If it is hard to shift into 1st, depress the N00512900131 4th gear to 5th gear 45 mph (72 km/h)
clutch pedal a second time; the shift will then For the best fuel economy and performance in
be easier.
using your manual transaxle, upshift as listed Downshifting
 To shift into reverse from 5th gear, move the
below.
gearshift lever to the “N” (Neutral) position, N00513000096
and then shift it into reverse. At low altitude locations, shift at the vehicle It is recommended that you downshift to a
5  To avoid grinding noises when shifting into
reverse, wait approximately 3 seconds with
speeds listed. Upshifting earlier during cruise lower gear when needed to maintain the
conditions (relatively steady speeds) will desired speed, according to the table.
the clutch pedal depressed when the vehicle Avoid downshifting at too high a speed. The
is stationary.
improve your fuel economy.
engine may suffer damage.
Upshift speeds To maintain a safe speed and prolong brake
Shift point life, shift down to 2nd or 1st when descend-
Proper shift points Acceleration Cruise
ing a steep hill.
N00537400065 1st gear to 15 mph 15 mph Downshifting is also important to avoid “lug-
Always use care to change the gear with the 2nd gear (24 km/h) (24 km/h) ging” the engine at too low a speed, such as
vehicle speed matched to the engine speed. 2nd gear to 28 mph 19 mph when turning a corner or when driving up a
Proper shifting will improve fuel economy 3rd gear (45 km/h) (31 km/h) steep hill.
and prolong engine life.
3rd gear to 36 mph 33 mph
4th gear (58 km/h) (53 km/h) Recommended downshifting speed
CAUTION 4th gear to 45 mph 45 mph
 Avoid downshifting that may cause the
5th gear (72 km/h) (72 km/h) Downshifting speed Shift point
tachometer pointer to enter the red zone.
This puts the engine at risk of being dam- Under 20 mph Shift down from cur-
aged. At high altitude locations, upshift as listed (32 km/h) rent gear to 2nd gear.
below. 20 to 30 mph (32 to Shift down from cur-
48 km/h) rent gear to 3rd gear.
Shift point Upshift speeds
1st gear to 2nd gear 15 mph (24 km/h)
2nd gear to 3rd gear 25 mph (40 km/h)
3rd gear to 4th gear 40 mph (64 km/h)

Continuously variable transmission (CVT) (if so equipped)

driving conditions. This helps achieve
Driving precautions smooth driving and excellent fuel efficiency.
NOTE
N00513100244  The selector lever cannot be moved from “P”
 Do not use the gearshift lever as a han- (PARK) to another position if the ignition
drest. This can result in premature wear of DRIVING UPHILL switch is set to the “OFF” or “ACC” posi-
the transaxle shift forks. tion, or if the key has been removed, or oper-
ation mode is in “OFF” or “ACC”, or if the
The transmission prevents unnecessary
brake pedal is not pressed and held down.
Maximum possible driving speed upshifts even when the accelerator pedal is
released and ensures smooth driving. 5
The CVT selects an optimum ratio automati-
Shift Maximum possible driving cally when the selector lever is in the “D”
points speed DRIVING DOWNHILL (DRIVE) position, depending on the speed of
1st gear 28 mph (45 km/h) the vehicle and the position of the accelerator
According to the conditions, the transmission pedal.
2nd gear 53 mph (85 km/h) will automatically shift to a lower gear ratio
3rd gear 78 mph (125 km/h) to achieve stronger engine braking. This may
4th gear 105 mph (170 km/h) help reduce your need to use the service
brake.
 The table above shows the maximum rec-
ommended driving speed for in each gear. Selector lever operation
Do not drive near or at these speeds for N00560301087
prolonged periods of time. As an additional safety precaution, models

equipped with a continuously variable trans-
Continuously variable mission have a shift-lock device that holds
the selector lever in the “P” (PARK) position.
transmission (CVT) (if so To move the selector lever from the “P”
equipped) (PARK) position to another position, follow
N00560200050
the steps below.
The CVT will automatically and continuously 1. Press and hold the brake pedal down.
change its gear ratio depending on road and 2. Move the selector lever to the desired
position.


If you need to move the vehicle, shift the
NOTE selector lever as follows.
 To prevent mistakes in operating the lever,
make sure you stop briefly at each position. 1. Make sure the parking brake is fully
After operating, check the position in the applied.
multi-information display.
2. Stop the engine if it is running.
 If the brake pedal is not depressed and held,
3. Insert a screwdriver with a cloth over its
the shift-lock device activates to prevent the
tip into the notch (A) of the cover. Pry
5 selector lever from being moved from the
“P” (PARK) position. gently as shown to remove the cover.
 For a shift indicated by in the illustra-

tion, depress the brake pedal before moving
Set the selector lever in the gate to the selector lever. If you attempt to move the
operate while the brake pedal is selector lever before depressing the brake
depressed. pedal, the selector lever may not move.
Set the selector lever in the gate to
operate.
When the selector lever cannot be
shifted from the “P” (PARK) posi-
WARNING tion
 Always press the brake pedal when shift- N00563300049 4. Depress the brake pedal with the right
ing the selector lever into a selector posi-
When the selector lever cannot be shifted foot.
tion from the “N” (NEUTRAL) position.
from the “P” (PARK) position to another 5. Insert a screwdriver in the shift-lock
When beginning to drive, do not shift the
selector lever from the “N” (NEUTRAL) position while the brake pedal is pressed and release hole (B). Shift the selector lever to
position while pressing the accelerator held down with the ignition switch or the the “N” (NEUTRAL) position while
pedal. This will cause the vehicle to operation mode in ON, the battery may be flat pressing the screwdriver down.
“jump” forward or backward. or the shift-lock mechanism may be malfunc-
tioning.
Immediately have your vehicle checked by an
authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a
repair facility of your choice.

Selector lever positions WARNING

N00560601093  Never move the selector lever to the “N”
(NEUTRAL) position while driving since
“P” PARK you could accidentally slip it into the “P”
(PARK) or “R” (REVERSE) position,
damaging the transmission.
This position locks the transmission to pre-  To prevent the vehicle from rolling when
vent the vehicle from moving. The engine can
be started from the “P” (PARK) position.
stopped on a slope, the engine should be
started in the “P” (PARK) position, not in
5
“N” (NEUTRAL) position.
“R” REVERSE  To prevent rolling, always keep your foot
on the brake pedal when the vehicle is in
“N” (NEUTRAL) position, or when shift-
Selector lever position display Move the lever to this position only after the ing into or out of “N” (NEUTRAL) posi-
N00560400078 vehicle has come to a complete stop. tion.
When the ignition switch is turned to the
“ON” position or the operation mode is put in CAUTION
ON, the selector lever position is shown on  Never shift into the “P” (PARK) or “R” “D” DRIVE
the multi-information display. (REVERSE) position while the vehicle is in
motion. If the lever is shifted into the “P” This position is used for most city and high-
(PARK) or “R” (REVERSE) position while way driving. The transmission will automati-
the vehicle is in motion, the transmission cally and continuously change its gear ratio
may be damaged.
depending on road and driving conditions.
“N” NEUTRAL CAUTION

 To prevent transmission damage, never shift
into the “D” (DRIVE) position from the “R”
At this position, the transmission is disen- (REVERSE) position while the vehicle is in
gaged. It is the same as the neutral position on motion.
a manual transaxle and should be used when
the vehicle is not moving for an extended
length of time during driving, such as in a
traffic jam.
“Ds” DOWNSHIFT & SPORTY When a malfunction occurs in CAUTION

DRIVING the automatic transaxle  If a malfunction occurs in the CVT while
N00549500018
driving, the indicator will blink.
In this case, immediately park your vehicle
Use when engine braking is needed, or for
in a safe place and follow these procedures:
high-power sport drive. When the selector lever position [If the indicator blinks rapidly (once per sec-
indicator blinks ond), the CVT fluid is overheating.]
5 “L” LOW N00574601049 Park your vehicle in a safe place but do not
When the selector lever position indicator turn off the engine. Move the selector lever
blinks while you are driving, there could be a to the “P” (PARK) position and open the
This position is for driving up very steep hills engine hood. Keep the engine, idling.
and for engine braking at low speeds when malfunction in the automatic transaxle system
After a while, move the selector lever into
driving down steep hills. or CVT fluid temperature becomes abnor-
any position other than “P” (PARK) position
mally high. and confirm that the indicator stops blinking.
WARNING It is safe to continue driving if the indicator
no longer blinks.
 This position can be used for maximum
If the indicator continues blinking, contact
engine braking.
an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or
Be very careful not to shift into “L”
repair facility of your choice immediately.
(LOW) suddenly.
[If the indicator blinks slowly (once per 2
Sudden engine braking may cause the
seconds), the CVT may be operating in fail-
tires to skid.
safe mode due to a malfunction.]
Select this position according to the road
Have the vehicle inspected at an authorized
conditions and vehicle speed.
Mitsubishi Motors dealer or repair facility of
your choice immediately.
NOTE
 The “A” indicator blinks only if the CVT
selector lever switch is broken.
It is not seen during normal driving.

Operation of the CVT CAUTION Waiting

N00560801095  Use the selector lever in the correct shift
position in accordance with driving condi- For short waiting periods, such as at traffic
CAUTION tions. lights, the vehicle can be left in selector lever
 Before selecting a position with the engine Never coast downhill backward in the driv- position and held stationary with the service
running and the vehicle stationary, firmly ing shift position “D” (DRIVE), “Ds”
brake.
depress the brake pedal to prevent the vehi- (DOWNSHIFT & SPORTY DRIVING), “L”
For longer waiting periods with the engine
cle from creeping.
The vehicle will begin to move as soon as the
(LOW) or coast forward in the “R”
(REVERSE) position. running, place the selector lever in the “N” 5
CVT is engaged, especially when the engine Engine stopping and increased brake pedal (NEUTRAL) position and apply the parking
speed or idle speed is high, or with the air and steering effort could lead to an accident. brake, while holding the vehicle stationary
conditioning operating.  Do not rev the engine with the brake pedal with the service brake.
Do not release the brake pedal until you are pressed when the vehicle is stationary. Prior to moving off after having stopped the
ready to drive away. This can damage the CVT. vehicle, make sure that the selector lever is in
 Depress the brake pedal with the right foot at Also, when you depress the accelerator pedal “D” (DRIVE) position.
all times. while holding down the brake pedal with the
Using the left foot could cause driver move- selector lever in the “D” (DRIVE) position,
ment delay in case of an emergency. the engine revolutions may not rise as high CAUTION
 To prevent sudden acceleration, never run as when performing the same operation with  To avoid transmission overheating, never try
the engine at high rpms when shifting from the selector lever in the “N” (NEUTRAL) to keep your vehicle stationary on a hill by
the “P” (PARK) or “N” (NEUTRAL). position. using the accelerator pedal. Always apply
the parking brake and/or service brake.
 Operating the accelerator pedal while the
 Do not rev the engine unnecessarily while
other foot is resting on the brake pedal will Passing acceleration the vehicle is stationary. Unexpected acceler-
affect braking efficiency and may cause pre-
mature wear of brake pads. ation may occur if the selector lever is in a
To gain extra acceleration in “D” (DRIVE) position other than “P” (PARK) or “N”
position (when passing another vehicle) push (NEUTRAL).
the accelerator to the floor. The CVT will
automatically downshift.
Parking
To park the vehicle, first bring it to a com-

plete stop, fully engage the parking brake,

Service brake
and then move the selector lever to the “P” If the power brake unit or either of the two
(PARK) position.
WARNING brake hydraulic systems stops working prop-
 Do not leave any objects near the brake
erly, the rest of the brake system will still
pedal or let a floor mat slide under it;
When the CVT makes no speed work, but the vehicle will not slow down as
doing so could prevent the full pedal
quickly.
change stroke that would be necessary in an
You will know this has happened if you find
emergency. Make sure that the pedal can
be operated freely at all times. Make sure you need to press the brake down farther, or
If the CVT does not shift while driving, or harder when slowing down or stopping, or if
5 your vehicle does not pick up enough speed
the floor mat is securely held in place.
the brake warning light and the warning dis-
when starting on an uphill slope, it may be play in the multi-information display come
that there is something unusual happening in CAUTION on. Have the brake system repaired at an
the transmission. Have your vehicle checked  It is important not to drive the vehicle with authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a
at an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or your foot resting on the brake pedal when repair facility of your choice immediately.
a repair facility of your choice immediately. braking is not required. This practice can
result in very high brake temperatures, pre-
mature lining wear, and possible damage to
WARNING
Service brake the brakes.  Never coast downhill with the engine OFF.
N00517501328 Keep the engine running whenever your
vehicle is in motion. If you turn off the
engine while driving, the power brake
Brake pedal Power brakes booster will stop working and your brakes
N00517600436 will not work as well.
Overuse of the brake can cause weakening, Your vehicle is equipped with power brakes  If the power assist is lost or if either brake
resulting in poor brake response and prema- for more braking force with less brake pedal hydraulic system stops working properly,
ture wear of the brake pads. effort. take your vehicle to an authorized
When driving down a long or steep hill, use Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facil-
Your brakes are designed to operate at full
engine braking by moving the selector lever ity of your choice immediately.
capacity, even if the power assist is not being
to “Ds” (DOWNSHIFT & SPORTY DRIV- used.
ING) or “L” (LOW) position. If the power assist is not being used, the effort
needed to press the brake pedal is greater.
If you should lose the power assist for some
reason, the brakes will still work.

Hill start assist

2. On vehicles with manual transaxle, place
Brake pad wear alarm CAUTION the gearshift lever into the 1st position.
N00550700124  Do not overly rely on the hill start assist to
On vehicles with CVT, place the selector
The disc brakes have an alarm that makes a prevent backwards movement of the vehicle.
lever into the “D” (DRIVE) position.
Under certain circumstances, even when hill
metallic squeal when the brake pads have
start assist is activated, the vehicle may
worn down enough to need service.
move backwards if the brake pedal is not suf- NOTE
If you hear this sound, have the brake pads ficiently depressed, if the vehicle is heavily  When reversing on an uphill slope, place the
replaced at an authorized Mitsubishi Motors gearshift lever or selector lever into the “R”
dealer or a repair facility of your choice.
loaded, or if the road is very steep or slip-
pery. position. 5
 The hill start assist is not designed to keep
WARNING the vehicle stopped in place on uphill slopes
3. Release the brake pedal and the hill start
for more than 2 seconds.
 Driving with worn brake pads will make it assist will maintain the braking force
harder to stop, and can cause an accident.  When facing uphill, do not rely on using the
hill start assist to maintain a stopped position applied while stopped for approximately 2
as an alternative to depressing the brake seconds.
pedal. 4. Depress the accelerator pedal and the hill
Hill start assist Doing so could cause an accident. start assist will gradually decrease the
N00562601127  Do not perform the following operation braking force as the vehicle starts moving.
The hill start assist makes it easy to start off while the hill start assist is operating.
on a steep uphill slope by preventing the
[Except for vehicles equipped with the NOTE
F.A.S.T.-key]  The hill start assist is activated when all of
vehicle from moving backwards. It keeps the Turn the ignition switch to the “OFF” or
brakes applied for approximately 2 seconds the following conditions are met.
“ACC” position.
when you move your foot from the brake • The engine is running.
(The hill start assist will not be activated
pedal to the accelerator pedal. Put the operation mode in OFF or ACC. The
while the engine is starting or immediately
hill start assist could stop operating, which
after the engine is started.)
could result in an accident.
To operate
N00562701131
1. Stop the vehicle completely using the

brake pedal.

Brake assist system

If the brake pedal is depressed suddenly, the
NOTE Warning indicator brakes will be applied with more force than
• On vehicles with manual transaxle, the N00562800092
usual.
gearshift lever is in the following position. If an abnormal condition occurs in the sys-
[When starting an uphill slope forwards.]
tem, the following indicator will turn on.
The gearshift lever is in any position other CAUTION
than “R” (Reverse).  The brake assist system is not a device
(The hill start assist will operate, even if the - ASC indicator designed to exercise braking force greater
5 gearshift lever is in the “N” (Neutral) posi-
tion.)
than its capacity. Make sure to always keep a
sufficient distance between your vehicle and
[When starting an uphill slope backwards.] a vehicle in front of you without relying too
The gearshift lever is in the “R” (Reverse) CAUTION much on the brake assist system.
position.  If the warning is displayed, the hill start
(The hill start assist will not operate when assist will not operate. Start off carefully.
the gearshift lever is in the “N” (Neutral)  Park your vehicle in a safe place and stop the
position.) engine.
NOTE
Restart the engine and check whether the  Once the brake assist system is operational,
• On vehicles with CVT, the selector lever is
indicator goes out, in which case the hill start it maintains great braking force even if the
in any position other than “P” (PARK) or
assist is again working normally. brake pedal is lightly released.
“N” (NEUTRAL).
If they remain displayed or reappear fre- To stop its operation, completely remove
• The vehicle is completely stationary, with
quently, it is not necessary to stop the vehicle your foot from the brake pedal.
the brake pedal depressed.
immediately, but the vehicle should be  When the brake assist system is in use while
• The parking brake is released.
inspected by an authorized Mitsubishi driving, you may feel as if the depressed
 The hill start assist will not operate if the brake pedal is soft, the pedal moves in small
Motors dealer or a repair facility of your
accelerator pedal is depressed before the motions in conjunction with the operation
choice as soon as possible.
brake pedal is released. noise, or the vehicle body and the steering
 The hill start assist also operates when wheel vibrate. This occurs when the brake
reversing on an uphill slope. assist system is operating normally and does
 When the hill start assist is activated, you Brake assist system not indicate faulty operation. Continue to
may feel the operating sound or vibration N00567301116 depress the brake pedal.
from under the body.  When the anti-lock brake system warning
The brake assist system is a device assisting
This is a normal result of the hill start assist light is illuminated, the brake assist system is
operation, and does not indicate a problem.
drivers who cannot depress the brake pedal
not functioning.
firmly such as in emergency stop situations
and provides greater braking force.

Anti-lock braking system

 When the anti-lock braking system is in
Anti-lock braking system use, you may feel the brake pedal vibrat-
Anti-lock braking system warn-
N00517900338
ing and hear a unique sound. It may also ing light
The anti-lock braking system helps prevent feel as if the pedal resists being pressed. N00531600674
the wheels from locking up when braking. In this situation, simply hold the brake
This helps maintain vehicle drivability and pedal down firmly. Do not pump the
steering wheel handling. brake, which will result in reduced
braking performance.
5
Driving hints
CAUTION
 When using the anti-lock brakes (sudden  The anti-lock braking system cannot prevent
braking), steering is slightly different accidents. It is your responsibility to take
from normal driving conditions. Use the safety precautions and to drive carefully.
steering wheel carefully.  To prevent failure of the anti-lock braking
 Always keep a safe distance from the system, be sure all 4 wheels and tires are the
vehicle in front of you. Even if your vehi- same size and the same type.
If there is a malfunction in the system, the
cle is equipped with the anti-lock braking
anti-lock braking system warning light will
system, leave a greater braking distance
NOTE come on.
when:
Under normal conditions, the ABS warning
• Driving on gravel or snow-covered  You may feel the operating sound or vibra-
tion from under the body when driving light comes on when the ignition switch is
roads.
immediately after starting the engine. This is turned to the “ON” position or the operation
• Driving on uneven road surfaces.
a normal result the anti-lock braking system mode is put in ON and goes off a few seconds
 Operation of anti-lock braking system is
makes when performing a self-check. It does later.
not restricted situations where brakes are
not indicate a problem.
applied suddenly. This system may also
 The anti-lock braking system can be used CAUTION
prevent the wheels from locking when
after the vehicle has reached a speed over
you drive over manholes, steel roadwork approximately 6 mph (10 km/h). It stops
 Any of the following indicates that the anti-
plates, road markings, or any uneven road lock braking system is not functioning and
working when the vehicle slows below 3
surface. only the standard brake system is working.
mph (5 km/h).
(The standard brake system is functioning
normally.) If this happens, take your vehicle
to an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or
a repair facility of your choice.

Electric power steering system (EPS)
CAUTION If the anti-lock braking system Front Rear

• When the ignition switch is turned to the warning light and brake warning
“ON” position or the operation mode is put light illuminate at the same time
in ON, the warning light does not come on
or it remains on and does not go off.
• The warning light comes on while driving
5 If the warning light illuminate

while driving The anti-lock braking system and brake force
N00531701731 distribution function may not work, so hard
braking could make the vehicle unstable.
If only the anti-lock braking sys- Avoid hard braking and high-speed driving.
Stop the vehicle in a safe place and contact an Electric power steering sys-
tem warning light illuminate authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or repair tem (EPS)
 Avoid hard braking and high-speed driv- facility of your choice. N00568400074
ing. Stop the vehicle in a safe place. The power steering system operates while the
Test the system by restarting the engine After driving on icy roads engine is running. It helps reduce the effort
and driving at a speed of about 12 mph N00529200080 needed to turn the steering wheel.
(20 km/h) or higher. The power steering system has mechanical
After driving on snow or icy roads, remove
If the warning light then remains off dur- steering capability in case the power assist is
any snow and ice which may have be left
ing driving, there is no abnormal condi- lost. If the power assist is lost for some rea-
around the wheels. On vehicles that have an
tion. son, you will still be able to steer your vehi-
anti-lock braking system, be careful not to
However, if the warning light does not cle, but you will notice it takes much more
damage the wheel speed sensors (A) or the
disappear, or if they come on again when effort to steer. If this happens, have your vehi-
cables located at each wheel.
the vehicle is driven, have the vehicle cle inspected at an authorized Mitsubishi
checked by an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility of your
Motors dealer or repair facility of your choice.

Active stability control (ASC)
WARNING Electric power steering system Active stability control

 Do not stop the engine while the vehicle is warning light (ASC)
moving. Stopping the engine would make
N00559100176
the steering wheel extremely hard to turn,
possibly resulting in an accident. The Active stability control (ASC) takes
overall control of the anti-lock braking sys-
tem, traction control function and skid control
NOTE function to help maintain the vehicle’s control 5
 During repeated full-lock turning of the and traction. Please read this section in con-
steering wheel (for example, while you are junction with the page on the anti-lock brak-
manoeuvring the vehicle into a parking ing system, traction control function and skid
space), a protection function may be acti- control function.
vated to prevent overheating of the power
steering system. This function will make the Anti-lock braking system  P.5-51
steering wheel gradually harder to turn. In Traction control function  P.5-54
this event, limit your turning of the steering Skid control function  P.5-54
wheel for a while. When the system has If there is a malfunction in the system, the
cooled down, the steering effort will return warning light will come on.
to normal. Under normal conditions, the warning lamp CAUTION
 If you turn the steering wheel while the vehi- comes on when the ignition switch is turned  Do not over-rely on the ASC. Even the ASC
cle is stationary with the headlights on, the to the “ON” position or the operation mode is cannot prevent the natural laws of physics
headlights may become dim. This behavior put in ON, and goes off after the engine has from acting on the vehicle. This system, like
is not abnormal. The headlights will return to any other system, has limits and cannot help
started.
their original brightness after a short while. you to maintain traction and control of the
vehicle in all circumstances. Reckless driv-
CAUTION ing can lead to accidents. It is the driver’s
 If the warning light appears while the engine responsibillty to drive carefully, This means
is running, have the vehicle inspected by an taking into account the traffic, road and envi-
authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a ronmental conditions.
repair facility of your choice as soon as pos-  Be sure to use the same specified type and
sible. It may become harder to turn the steer- size of tire on all four wheels. Otherwise, the
ing wheel. ASC may not work properly.


ning excessive, thus helping the vehicle to deactivate the system by pressing down the
CAUTION start moving from a stopped condition. It also “ASC OFF” switch for 3 seconds or longer.
 Do not install any aftermarket limited slip
provides sufficient driving force and steering When the ASC is deactivated, the indica-
differential (LSD) on your vehicle. The ASC
performance as the vehicle turns while press- tor will turn on. To reactivate the ASC,
may stop functioning properly.
ing the acceleration pedal. momentarily press the “ASC OFF” switch;
the indicator is turned off.
NOTE CAUTION
5  An operating sound or vibration may be  When driving a vehicle on a snowy or icy
emitted from under the body in the following road, be sure to install snow tires and drive
situations. The sound or vibration is associ- the vehicle at moderate speeds.
ated with checking the operations of the
ASC. At this time, you may feel a shock
from under the body and the brake pedal if
you depress it. These do not indicate a mal-
Skid control function
N00559300051
function.
• When the ignition switch is turned to the The skid control function is designed to help
“ON” position or the operation mode is put the driver maintain control of the vehicle on
in ON. slippery roads or during rapid steering
• When the vehicle is driven for a while after maneuvers. It works by controlling the engine
the engine is turned on. output and the brake on each wheel.
 When the ASC is activated, you may feel a CAUTION
vibration in the vehicle body or hear a whin-  For safety reasons, the “ASC OFF” switch
ing sound from the engine compartment. NOTE should be operated when your vehicle is
This indicates that the system is operating  The skid control function operates at speeds stopped.
normally. It does not indicate a malfunction. of about 9 mph (15 km/h) or higher.  Be sure to keep the ASC on while driving in
 When the anti-lock braking system warning normal circumstances.
light is illuminated, the ASC is not active.
ASC OFF switch
N00559400254 NOTE
Traction control function The ASC is automatically activated when the  Using the “ASC OFF” switch turns off both
the stability control function and the traction
N00559200076 ignition switch is turned to the “ON” position
control function.
On slippery surfaces, the traction control or the operation mode is put in ON. You can
function prevents the drive wheels from spin-

NOTE NOTE CAUTION

 When moving out of mud, sand or fresh  The indicator may turn on when you start  The system may be malfunctioning.
snow, pressing the accelerator pedal may not Park your vehicle in a safe place and stop the
the engine. This means that the battery volt-
allow the engine speed to increase. In such engine.
age momentarily dropped when the engine
situations, temporarily turning off ASC with Restart the engine and check whether the
was started. It does not indicate a malfunc-
the “ASC OFF” switch will make it easier to indicator goes out. If they go out, there is no
tion, provided that the display goes out
move out your vehicle. abnormal condition. If they do not go out or
immediately.
 If you continue to press the “ASC OFF”
switch after the ASC is turned off, the “mis-
 When a compact spare tire has been put on
appear frequently, it is not necessary to stop
the vehicle immediately, but you should have
5
your vehicle, the gripping ability of the tire
taken operation protection function” will your vehicle inspected by an authorized
will be lower, making it more likely that the
activate and the ASC will turn back on. Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility
indicator will blink. of your choice as soon as possible.
ASC operation indicator or

ASC OFF indicator ASC warning indicator Towing
N00546500118
N00546600119 N00546300031
ASC operation indicator If an abnormal condition occurs in the sys-

-
The indicator will blink when the tem, the following indicator will turn on.
CAUTION
ASC is operating.  When towing the vehicle with only the front
ASC OFF indicator wheels or only the rear wheels raised off the
-
This indicator will turn on when the - ASC indicator ground, do not place the ignition switch in
the “ON” position or do not put the operation
ASC is turned off with the “ASC - ASC OFF indicator mode in ON. Placing the ignition switch in
OFF” switch. the “ON” position or putting the operation
mode in ON could cause the ASC to operate,
resulting in an accident.
CAUTION Note that the correct towing method depends
on the transmission type and the vehicle’s
 When indicator blinks, ASC is operating,
drive configuration.
which means that the road is slippery or that For details, refer to “Towing” on page 8-12.
your vehicle’s wheels are beginning to slip.
If this happens, drive slower with less accel-
erator input.

Cruise control (if so equipped)
Cruise control (if so equipped) NOTE C- RES + switch

N00518300573  Your speed may increase to more than the set
speed on a steep downhill. You have to use Used to increase the set speed and to return to
Cruise control is an automatic speed control the brake to control your speed. As a result, the original set speed.
system that keeps a set speed. It can be acti- the set speed driving is deactivated.
vated at speeds from about 25 mph D- CANCEL switch
(40 km/h). Cruise control does not work at Cruise control switches
5 speeds below about 25 mph (40 km/h). Used to deactivate the set speed driving.
CAUTION NOTE
 When you do not wish to drive at a set speed,  When operating the cruise control switches,
turn off the cruise control for safety. press the cruise control switches correctly.
The set speed driving may be deactivated
 Do not use cruise control when driving con-
automatically if two or more switches of the
ditions will not allow you to stay at the same
cruise control are pressed at the same time.
speed, such as in heavy traffic or on roads
that are winding, icy, snow-covered, wet,
slippery, on a steep downhill slope.
 On vehicles equipped with manual transaxle, To activate
do not move the gearshift lever to the “N” N00518400385
(Neutral) position while driving at a set 1. With the ignition switch is in “ON” posi-
speed without depressing the clutch pedal. tion or the operation mode is in ON, press
A- CRUISE CONTROL ON/OFF switch
The engine will run too fast and might be the CRUISE CONTROL ON/OFF switch
damaged. Used to turn on and off the cruise control. (A) to turn on the cruise control. The indi-
cator in the meter cluster will come on.
NOTE B- SET - switch
 Cruise control may not be able to keep your Used to reduce the set speed and to set the
speed on uphills or downhills. desired speed.
 Your speed may decrease on a steep uphill.
You may use the accelerator pedal if you
want to stay at your set speed.


To increase your speed in small amounts,
NOTE press the RES + switch for less than about 1
 When you release the SET - switch, the vehi-
second and release it.
cle speed will be set.
Each time you press the RES + switch, your
vehicle will go about 1 mph (1.6 km/h) faster.
To increase the set speed

N00518500344
Accelerator pedal
There are 2 ways to increase the set speed. 5
While driving at the set speed, use the accel-
erator pedal to reach your desired speed and
RES + switch then press the SET - switch (B) and release
Indicator the switch momentarily to set a new desired
Press and hold the RES + switch (C) while cruising speed.
driving at the set speed, and your speed will
then gradually increase.
When you reach your desired speed, release
2. Accelerate or decelerate to your desired the switch. Your new cruising speed is now
speed, then press and release the SET - set.
switch (B) when the indicator is illumi-
nated. The vehicle will then maintain the
desired speed.
To decrease the set speed

N00518600273
There are 2 ways to decrease the set speed.


then press the SET - switch (B) and release
SET - switch
the switch momentarily to set a new desired
cruising speed.
Press and hold the SET - switch (B) while
driving at the set speed, and your speed will
slow down gradually.
When you reach your desired speed, release
the switch. Your new cruising speed is now
5 set.
To temporarily decrease the speed
Depress the brake pedal to decrease the

speed. To return to the previously set speed,
To temporarily increase or press the RES + switch (C).
decrease the speed Refer to “To resume the set speed” on page
N00541700056 5-59.
To slow down your speed in small amounts, To temporarily increase the speed
press the SET - switch for less than about 1
second and release it.
Depress the accelerator pedal as you would
Each time you press the SET - switch, your
normally. When you release the pedal, you
vehicle will slow down by about 1 mph (1.6
will return to your set speed.
km/h).
Brake pedal
While driving at the set speed, use the brake

pedal, which disengages the cruise control,


 When the active stability control (ASC)
To deactivate starts operating.
To resume the set speed
N00518801634 N00518900306
Refer to “Active stability control (ASC)”
The set speed driving can be deactivated as on page 5-53. If the set speed driving is deactivated by the
follows: condition described in “To deactivate” on
page 5-59, you can resume the previously set
 Press the CRUISE CONTROL ON/OFF WARNING speed by pressing the RES + switch (C) while
switch (A). (Cruise control will be turned  On vehicles equipped with continuously driving at a speed of about 25 mph (40 km/h)
off.) variable transmission (CVT), although the
or higher. 5
 Press the CANCEL switch (D). set speed driving will be deactivated when
 Depress the brake pedal. shifting to the “N” (NEUTRAL) position,
never move the selector lever to the “N”
(NEUTRAL) position while driving.
You would have no engine braking and
could cause a serious accident.
Also, the set speed driving may be deacti-

vated automatically when the engine speed
rises and approaches the tachometer’s red
zone (the red-colored part of the tachometer
dial).
Under either of the following conditions,

CAUTION however, using the switch does not allow you
The set speed driving is deactivated automati-  When the set speed driving is deactivated to resume the previously set speed. In these
cally in any of the following ways. automatically in any situation other than situations, repeat the speed setting procedure:
those listed above, there may be a system
 When you depress the clutch pedal (on malfunction.  The CRUISE CONTROL ON/OFF
vehicles equipped with manual transaxle). Press the CRUISE CONTROL ON/OFF
switch is pressed.
 When your speed slows to about 10 mph switch to turn off the cruise control and have
 [Except for vehicles equipped with the
(15 km/h) or more below the set speed your vehicle inspected by an authorized
Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility F.A.S.T.-key]
because of a hill, etc. Turn the ignition switch to the “OFF” or
of your choice.
 When your speed slows to about 25 mph “ACC” position.
(40 km/h) or less. [Vehicles equipped with the F.A.S.T.-key]

Forward Collision Mitigation system (FCM)

Put the operation mode in OFF or ACC. Stop lights are illuminated during automatic
 Indicator is turned OFF. braking.
WARNING
 The FCM is designed to help avoid certain
frontal collisions or reduce the crash
Forward Collision Mitiga- speed in such collisions. It is not a substi-
tute for your safe and careful driving.
tion system (FCM) Under certain circumstances, the system
N00577300141 may not operate or may not detect cor-
5 The Forward Collision Mitigation system rectly a vehicle or a pedestrian in front.
When your vehicle is approaching a vehi-
(FCM) is designed to help reduce the risk of a
collision with a vehicle or a pedestrian cle or a pedestrian too closely, take all nec-
essary actions to avoid a collision, such as
straight ahead of your vehicle. The FCM uses
braking and steering, regardless of
a sensor (A) to determine the distance and whether the FCM is activated or not.
relative speed to a vehicle and a pedestrian in Never rely on the FCM to prevent a colli-
front. The FCM is not designed as an auto- sion.
matic driving system or as a collision avoid-  Never attempt to test the operation of the
ance system. FCM. Doing so could cause an accident,
When your vehicle is approaching a vehicle resulting in serious injury or death.
or a pedestrian straight-ahead in your path
and the FCM judges that there is the risk of a
collision, the system will give audible and
visual warnings.
When the FCM judges that a collision with
the vehicle or the pedestrian straight-ahead is
imminent, the system will automatically
apply moderate braking to warn you to apply WARNING
the brakes immediately.  Before using the FCM, read this entire
When the FCM judges that a collision with section to fully understand the limitations
the vehicle or the pedestrian straight-ahead is of this system. Failure to follow instruc-
highly unavoidable, the system will apply tions could result in an accident.
emergency braking to reduce the severity of
the collision and, if possible, to avoid the col-
lision.


The forward collision warning function oper-
Forward collision warning ates when the following vehicle speed:
WARNING
function  If the Active stability control (ASC) is
N00577400096  Against a vehicle: Approximately 10 mph turned off, the FCM braking function will
(15 km/h) to 87mph (140 km/h). not operate. Refer to “Active stability con-
If the system judges that there is a risk of
trol (ASC)” on page 5-53.
your vehicle colliding with a vehicle or the  Against a pedestrian: Approximately
 If the brake pedal is not depressed within
pedestrian in front, this function warns you of 5 mph (7 km/h) to 40 mph (65 km/h).
2 seconds after your vehicle has been
the potential hazard with the indicator blinks
and audible alarms.
stopped by the FCM, a warning buzzer
5
FCM braking function will sound and the brakes activated by the
When this function is triggered, a buzzer FCM will automatically be released.
N00577700174
sounds and, at the same time, the following Apply the brakes as necessary to keep
When the FCM judges that a collision with
indicator blinks. your vehicle stationary.
the vehicle or the pedestrian straight-ahead is
The FCM will also prepare to provide quick  The FCM will not activate and will not
imminent, the FCM will automatically apply
brake response and greater brake force when provide either warning or braking in cer-
moderate braking to warn the driver to apply tain situations. Some of these include:
you apply the brakes.
the brakes immediately. • When the selector lever is in the “P”
If the FCM judges that the collision is highly (PARK) or “R” (REVERSE) position.
unavoidable, it will automatically apply • When an object other than a vehicle or a
emergency braking to reduce the severity of pedestrian is in front.
the collision and, if possible, to avoid the col- • When the FCM has detected a problem
lision. in the system.
When the FCM applies emergency braking, a • When a vehicle or a pedestrian suddenly
buzzer sounds and the indicator blinks in the cuts in front of your vehicle.
meter cluster.  The FCM may or may not detect a motor-
cycle, bicycle or wall depending on the sit-
The FCM braking function operates when the uation. The FCM is not designed to detect
following vehicle speed: these objects.
 The forward collision warning function
 Against a vehicle: Approximately 3 mph and/or the FCM braking function may not
(5 km/h) to 50 mph (80 km/h). activate in certain situations. Some of
 Against a pedestrian: Approximately these include:
3 mph (5 km/h) to 40 mph (65 km/h). • When a vehicle suddenly appears just in
front of your vehicle.


• When a vehicle cuts into your path at a • When driving in dark areas, such as in a • If the pedestrian is shorter than approxi-
close distance. tunnel or at night. mately 3.2 feet (1 m) or taller than
• When a vehicle ahead is not completely • When the system recognizes driver’s approximately 6.5 feet (2 m).
in your path. steering, accelerating, braking or gear • If the pedestrian is wearing loose-fitting
• When your vehicle changed lanes, and shifting actions as evasive actions to clothes.
your vehicle approached immediately avoid collision. • If part of a pedestrian’s body is hidden,
5 behind the vehicle ahead. • When the rear of your vehicle is weighed
down with the weight of passengers and
such as when holding an umbrella, large
bag, etc.
• When a vehicle ahead is towing a trailer.
• When a vehicle ahead is a truck loaded luggage. • If a pedestrian bends forward, sits or lies
with freight that protrudes rearward • Up to several seconds after starting driv- on the road.
from the cargo bed. ing. • When a pedestrian is pushing/pulling
• When the height of a vehicle ahead is • In adverse weather conditions, such as something, such as a stroller, bicycle or
extremely low or its road clearance is rain, snow, fog or sand-storm. wheelchair.
extremely high. • When the windshield of the sensor por- • When pedestrians gather in a group.
• When a vehicle ahead is extremely dirty. tion is covered with dirt, water droplets, • When a pedestrian clothing appears to
• When a vehicle ahead is covered with snow and ice, etc. be nearly the same color or brightness as
snow. • When a vehicle ahead or an oncoming its surroundings.
• When a vehicle ahead has a large glass vehicle is splashing water, snow or dirt. • When a pedestrian is very close to an
surface. • When using a windshield washer. object, such as a vehicle.
• When a vehicle ahead does not have • If windshield wipers are not Mitsubishi • When a pedestrian is in a dark area, such
reflectors (light reflector) or the position Motors Genuine parts or equivalent. as at night or in a tunnel.
of the reflector is low. • When the sensor becomes extremely hot • When a pedestrian is walking fast or
• When a vehicle ahead is a car carrier or or cold. running.
a similar shaped vehicle. • If the battery becomes weak or runs • When a pedestrian suddenly rushes in
• When accelerating and decelerating down. front of the vehicle.
quickly. • When the sensor is affected by strong • When the position of a pedestrian is close
• When driving on a slippery road covered light, such as direct sunlight or the head- to the edge of the vehicle.
by rain water, snow, ice, etc. lights of an oncoming vehicle.  When the system recognizes driver’s
• When driving on a road with alternating  The FCM may not detect a pedestrian in steering or accelerating actions as evasive
up and down steep slopes. certain situations. Some of these include: actions to avoid a collision, FCM control
• When driving on a curve. and alarm functions may be canceled.
• When driving on a bumpy or rough road.


 In certain situations, though there is little • When passing a vehicle, a pedestrian or • When the FCM detects a long object car-
or no risk of a collision, the FCM may an object closely. ried on your vehicle, such as skis or a
activate. Examples include: roof carrier.
• When overtaking a vehicle. • When driving through fog, steam, smoke
• When driving on a curve. or dust.
• When there is a road side object (B) that  The FCM should be tuned off if any of fol-
reflects the radar sensor signal, such as a lowing situations occur: 5
road sign. • When using an automatic car wash.
• When the tires are not properly inflated.
• When a vehicle in the next lane becomes • When the emergency spare tire is used.
positioned directly in front of your vehi- • When your vehicle is towed by another
cle due to winding road conditions. vehicle.
• When your vehicle is carried on a truck.
• When your vehicle is on a chassis dyna-
mometer or free rollers.
• When approaching a gate, a railroad • If the windshield on or surrounding the
crossing, an underpass, a narrow bridge, sensor is cracked or scratched.
manhole lid or a speed bump.
• When driving under an overpass or
pedestrian bridge. • When passing through an area that NOTE
• When driving in a narrow tunnel. objects may contact the vehicle, such as  When depressing the brake pedal while auto-
• When driving in a parking structure. thick grass, tree branches, or a banner. matic braking is applied, the brake pedal will
• When approaching a slope where the • When there are patterns on the road that feel firm. This is normal. Depress the brake
incline changes significantly. may be mistaken for a vehicle or a pedes- pedal harder to apply greater braking force.
• When trying to stop your vehicle very trian.  During the automatic braking, operating
close to a vehicle or an object in front. • When a vehicle cuts into your path in the sounds may be heard. This is normal.
detecting range of the sensor.
• When an oncoming vehicle is positioned
straight ahead of your vehicle on a
curved road.


To turn on the FCM again, press and hold the
FCM ON/OFF switch To turn on/off the FCM
N00577800146
FCM ON/OFF switch. The indicator on
This switch is used to turn on or off the FCM, Every time the ignition switch is turned to the the instrument cluster will go off, and a cur-
and also to select the distance which will trig- “ON” position or the operation mode is put in rent distance mode for the forward collision
ger the forward collision warning function. “ON”, the FCM will automatically be turned warning will be shown in the multi-informa-
on. tion display.
To turn off the FCM, press and hold the FCM
5 ON/OFF switch. The following message will
appear in the multi-information display and
the indicator will come on in the instru-
ment cluster.
To change forward collision warn-

ing distance
The distance to the vehicle ahead which trig-

gers the forward collision warnings can be
selected from three levels, “FAR”, “MID-
DLE” or “NEAR”.
To change the distance mode, press the FCM
ON/OFF switch. Every time the switch is
pressed, the distance mode will be switched.
The selected distance mode is shown on the
multi-information display.


The FCM indicator will blink and the FCM
When “FAR” is selected
System problem warning OFF indicator will illuminate.
N00594800066
If there is a malfunction in the system, the

following indicators will illuminate or blink
depending on the situation.
When “MIDDLE” is selected
When the sensor cannot detect 5

accurately
When “NEAR” is selected N00594900067
When the FCM system determines that its

performance has been degraded, the FCM
will become inoperative.
This can occur when When the sensor performance returns, the
FCM functions will resume operation.
 Foreign objects, such as dirt, snow, ice, If the indicators remain, there is a possibility
mist or dew condensation adhere to the that the sensor has a malfunction. Contact an
windshield of the sensor portion. authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer for
 In adverse weather conditions, such as inspection of the sensor.
rain, snow, sand storms, etc.
 A front vehicle or an oncoming vehicle is
NOTE splashing water, snow or dirt.
NOTE
 The indicators may temporarily blink and
 Actual distance which triggers the forward
illuminate when the sensor cannot detect a
collision warnings will vary depending on
vehicle, a pedestrian or an object within
your vehicle speed and the front vehicle
range. This is not a malfunction. When a
speed. The distance will become longer
vehicle or an object comes within range, the
when the vehicle speeds are higher.
FCM function will resume and the indicators
 The distance which will trigger the FCM
will go off.
braking function cannot be adjusted.
 The indicators may blink and illuminate
when driving on a nonbusy road with a few
vehicles and obstacles in front.

NOTE NOTE Handling of the sensor

 On vehicles with Lane Departure Warning  If the sensor or its surrounding area becomes N00593400140
(LDW), if the LDW is ON, the Lane Depar- extremely high temperature when parking The sensor (A) is located inside the wind-
ture Warning light (yellow) will blink at the the vehicle under a blazing sun, the indica- shield as shown in the illustration.
same time. tors may illuminate. The sensor is shared in the following sys-
If the indicators remain even after the tem- tems:
perature of the sensor or its surrounding area
FCM deactivation due to fault
5 N00595300084
is within normal range, please contact an
 FCM
If the FCM detects a malfunction in the sys-  Lane Departure Warning (LDW) (if so
tem, the following indicators will illuminate, equipped)
and the FCM will automatically be turned off.  Automatic High Beam (AHB) (if so
equipped)
If the indicators remain even after the ignition

switch is turned to the “OFF” position and
then turned back to the “ON” position or the CAUTION
operation mode is put in OFF and then turned  To maintain proper performance of the FCM,
back to ON, please contact your authorized LDW and AHB;
Mitsubishi Motors dealer. • Always keep clean the windshield.
If the inside of the windshield where the
sensor is installed becomes dirty or fogged,
contact an authorized Mitsubishi Motors
dealer.

CAUTION CAUTION Wavelength 905 nm

• Do not apply an impact or load on the sen- • Do not install an electronic device, such as Divergent angle
28° x 12°
sor or its surrounding area. antenna, or a device that emits strong elec- (horizon x vertical)
• Do not put anything including a sticker or tric waves, near the sensor.
film to the outer side of the windshield in • Always use tires of the same size, same
front of or surrounding area of the sensor. type and same brand, and which have no Laser classification label
Also, do not put anything including a significant wear differences.
For vehicles sold in U.S.A.
sticker or film to the inner side of the wind-
shield under the sensor.
• Do not modify the vehicle’s suspensions. 5
 If the windshield on the sensor or in the sur-
rounding area of the sensor is cracked or
scratched, the sensor may not detect an
object properly. This could cause a serious
accident. Turn off the FCM and have your
vehicle inspected as soon as possible at an
If you need to replace the windshield, con-
tact an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer.
 The sensor emits infrared rays when the igni- For vehicles sold in Canada
• Do not attempt to detach or disassemble the tion switch is turned to the “ON” position or
sensor. the operation mode is put in ON. Do not look
• If the windshield is misted, remove the mist into the sensor by using optical goods such
from the windshield by using the defogger as a magnifying glass. The infrared ray
switch. might injure your eyes.
• Maintain the wiper blades in good condi-
tion. Refer to “Wiper blades” on page 9-39.
When replacing the wiper blades, use only
Laser radar specifications Laser explanatory label
Mitsubishi Motors Genuine parts or equiva-
lent. FDA Assertion number: 1520863-000
• Do not dirty or damage the sensor.
• Do not spray glass cleaner on the sensor. Laser classification
Also, do not spill liquid, such as a bever-
age, to the sensor. Max average power 45 mW
Pulse duration 33 ns

Lane Departure Warning (LDW) (if so equipped)

To turn on the LDW, press the LDW switch.
Lane Departure Warning The LDW indicator (green) in the meter clus-
(LDW) (if so equipped) ter will illuminate.
N00577900150
The Lane Departure Warning (LDW) is a

driving aid system to help prevent uninten-
tional lane departure. The LDW is designed
5 to read lane markers by using a sensor (A)
under certain conditions. The LDW will give
you both visual and audible warnings when Green
your vehicle is leaving or has left the lane.
WARNING
 Never rely solely on the LDW. The LDW is
not a collision avoidance system and is not
a substitute for your safe and careful driv- To turn off the LDW, press the LDW switch.
ing. The LDW indicator (green) in the meter clus-
 Before using the LDW, read this entire ter will then go out.
section to understand the limitations of To return the LDW to “ON”, press the LDW
this system. Failure to follow instructions switch again.
could result in an accident.
To turn on/off the LDW
NOTE
 The LDW is turned on when the vehicle is
shipped from the factory.
 The currently selected LDW setting (on or
off) is stored even when the ignition switch
is turned to the “OFF” position or the opera-
tion mode is put in OFF.

Operation of the LDW Lane departure warning WARNING

N00581100108 N00581200095  The LDW will not function when no lane
The LDW, when turned ON, is capable of While the Lane Departure Warning indicator marker exists, such as at an intersection
(green) in the meter cluster is lit, if your vehi- or near a toll booth.
recognizing the lane in which your vehicle is
cle is leaving or has left the lane, a buzzer  The LDW may not operate correctly in the
travelling and issuing an audible warning
will sound intermittently and the Lane Depar- following situations and the LDW may not
when your vehicle begins to leave that travel
ture Warning light (yellow) will blink rapidly. give warnings or may give false warnings:
lane. The LDW will not operate, however, if
any of following conditions have occurred:
• When lane markers are not clearly visi-
ble due to rain, snow, fog, dark area, etc.
5
• When the road surface is shiny.
 The vehicle speed is less than approxi-
• When old lane markers remain on the
mately 38 mph (60 km/h).
road surface.
 The turn signal lever is being operated or
• When the lane markers are double lines
has been operated in the past 7 seconds. or the shape of the lane markers are
 The hazard warning light is being oper- Yellow complicated.
ated or has been operated in the past 7 • When driving in an extremely narrow
seconds. lane.
• When the distance between your vehicle
and a vehicle in front is short.
• When driving into the sun light.
NOTE • When driving on curves.
• When driving on bumpy roads.
 The warnings will not continue for more than
3 seconds, even if your vehicle continues • When driving in construction zones.
leaving the lane. • When passing through a place where the
 If the lane markers are only on one side of brightness suddenly changes, such as at
the road, the LDW will operate only for the the entrance to or exit of a tunnel.
appropriate side where the lane marker is • When the headlights of an oncoming
drawn. vehicle are very bright.
• When the rear of your vehicle is weighed
down with the weight of passengers and
luggage.
• When the headlights of your vehicle are
not clean or are not properly aimed.


tact an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer
WARNING When the sensor cannot detect
for inspection of the sensor.
• When the front windshield is not clean. accurately
• When the front windshield wipers do not N00598600020
clean the windshield properly. If the LDW system determines that its perfor-
NOTE
 If the Forward Collision Mitigation system
mance has been degraded, the Lane Depar-
(FCM) is ON, the FCM indicator will blink
ture Warning light (yellow) will blink slowly.
CAUTION and the FCM OFF indicator will illuminate
5  To maintain proper function of the LDW:
at the same time.
• Always keep the windshield and the head-
lights clean.
• Do not put anything, such as a sticker, on LDW deactivation due to fault
the front windshield in front of the sensor. N00598700021
• Avoid applying a shock or load to the sen- If the LDW detects a malfunction in the sys-
sor. Yellow tem, the Lane Departure Warning light (yel-
• Do not attempt to detach or disassemble the low) will illuminate, and the LDW will
sensor. automatically be turned off.
• Use only Mitsubishi Motors Genuine parts
when replacing the windshield wipers.
This can occur when

NOTE
 Foreign objects, such as dirt, snow, ice,
 When driving conditions are not suitable to
use the LDW, turn off the LDW.
mist or dew condensation adhere to the
Yellow
windshield of the sensor portion.
 In adverse weather conditions, such as
rain, snow, sand storms, etc.
System problem warning  A front vehicle or an oncoming vehicle is
N00578100074
splashing water, snow or dirt.
If there is a malfunction in the system, the If the warning light remains even after the
warning light will illuminate or blink depend- When the sensor performance returns, the ignition switch is turned to the “OFF” posi-
ing on the situation. LDW functions will resume operation. tion and then turned back to the “ON” posi-
If the warning light remains, there is a possi- tion or the operation mode is put in OFF and
bility that the sensor has a malfunction. Con- then turned back to ON, contact your autho-

Tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS)

rized Mitsubishi Motors dealer for inspection
of the system. Tire pressure monitoring NOTE
system (TPMS)  The TPMS is not a substitute for regularly
checking tire inflation pressures.
NOTE N00530201696
Be sure to check the tire inflation pressures
 If the sensor or its surrounding area becomes The tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) as described in “Tires” on page 9-12.
extremely high temperature when parking uses tire inflation pressure sensors (A) on the  The tire inflation pressure sensor (A) is
the vehicle under a blazing sun, the warning wheels to monitor the tire inflation pressures. installed in the illustrated location.
The system only indicates when a tire is sig-
light may illuminate.
If the warning light remains even after the nificantly under-inflated.
Replace rubber air valve (B) with a new one
when the tire is replaced.
5
temperature of the sensor or its surrounding For details, please contact your authorized
area is within normal range, please contact Mitsubishi Motors dealer.
an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer.
WARNING
 The compact spare wheel does not have a
tire inflation pressure sensor.
When the spare tire is used, the TPMS will
not work properly.
See an authorized Mitsubishi Motors
dealer as soon as possible to replace or
repair the original tire.


Each tire, including the spare, should be
Tire pressure monitoring sys- CAUTION checked monthly when cold and inflated to
tem warning light  If the tire pressure monitoring system warn-
the inflation pressure recommended by the
ing light does not illuminate when the igni-
N00532701448 vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard
tion switch is turned to the “ON” position or
the operation mode is put in ON, it means or tire inflation pressure label. (If your vehi-
that the TPMS is not working properly. Have cle has tires of a different size than the size
the system inspected by an authorized Mit- indicated on the vehicle placard or tire infla-
tion pressure label, you should determine the
5 subishi Motors dealer.
In such situations, a malfunctioning of the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires.)
system may be preventing the monitoring of As an added safety feature, your vehicle has
the tire pressure. Avoid sudden braking, been equipped with a tire pressure monitoring
sharp turning and high-speed driving. system (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire
 If a malfunction is detected in the TPMS, the pressure telltale when one or more of your
tire pressure monitoring system warning
tires is significantly under-inflated.
light will blink for approximately 1 minute
Accordingly, when the low tire pressure tell-
and then remain continuously illuminated.
When the ignition switch is turned to the The warning light will issue further warnings tale illuminates, you should stop and check
“ON” position or the operation mode is put in each time the engine is restarted as long as your tires as soon as possible, and inflate
ON, the tire pressure monitoring system the malfunction exists. them to the proper pressure. Driving on a sig-
warning light normally illuminates and goes Check to see whether the warning light goes nificantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to
off a few seconds later. off after few minutes driving. overheat and can lead to tire failure.
If it then goes off during driving, there is no Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency
If one or more of the vehicle tires (except for problem. and tire tread life, and may affect the vehi-
the spare tire) is significantly under-inflated, However, if the warning light does not go cle’s handling and stopping ability. Please
the warning light will remain illuminated off, or if it blinks again when the engine is
note that the TPMS is not a substitute for
while the ignition switch or the operation restarted, have the vehicle inspected by an
proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s
mode is in ON. authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer.
In such situations, a malfunctioning of the responsibility to maintain correct tire pres-
Refer to “If the warning light illuminates sure, even if under-inflation has not reached
system may be preventing the monitoring of
while driving” on page 5-73 and take the nec- the tire pressure. For safety reasons, when the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS
essary measures. the warning light appears while driving, low tire pressure telltale.
avoid sudden braking, sharp turning and
high-speed driving. Your vehicle has also been equipped with a
TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when


the system is not operating properly. The 2. If the tire pressure monitoring system
TPMS malfunction indicator is combined
If the warning light illuminates warning light remains illuminated after
with the low tire pressure telltale. while driving you have been driving for approximately
When the system detects a malfunction, the N00532801612 20 minutes after you adjust the tire infla-
telltale will flash for approximately one min- 1. If the tire pressure monitoring system tion pressure, one or more of the tires may
ute and then remain continuously illuminated. warning light illuminates, avoid hard have a puncture. Inspect the tire and if it
This sequence will continue upon subsequent braking, sharp steering maneuvers and has a puncture, have it repaired by an
vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction high speeds. You should stop and adjust authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer as
exists. the tires to the proper inflation pressure as soon as possible.
5
When the malfunction indicator is illumi- soon as possible. Adjust the spare tire at
nated, the system may not be able to detect or the same time. Refer to “Tires” on page
signal low tire pressure as intended. 9-12. WARNING
 If the warning light illuminates while you
TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety
are driving, avoid hard braking, sharp
of reasons, including the installation of NOTE steering maneuvers and high speeds.
replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the  When inspecting or adjusting the tire pres-
Driving with an under-inflated tire
vehicle that prevent the TPMS from function- sure, do not apply excessive force to the
adversely affects vehicle performance and
ing properly. Always check the TPMS mal- valve stem to avoid breakage.
can result in an accident.
function telltale after replacing one or more  After inspecting or adjusting the tire pres-
sure, always reinstall the valve cap on the
tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that
valve stem.
the replacement or alternate tires and wheels
Without the valve cap, dirt or moisture could
CAUTION
allow the TPMS to continue to function prop- get into the valve, resulting in damage to the  The warning light may not illuminate imme-
erly. tire inflation pressure sensor. diately in the event of a tire blowout or rapid
 Do not use metal valve caps, which may leak.
cause a metal reaction, resulting in corrosion
and damage of the tire inflation pressure sen-
sors. NOTE
 Once adjustments have been made, the warn-  To avoid the risk of damage to the tire infla-
ing light will go off after a few minutes of tion pressure sensors, have any punctured
driving. tire repaired by an authorized Mitsubishi
Motors dealer. If the tire repair is not done by
an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer,
damage to the tire inflation pressure sensor is
not covered by your warranty.

Rear-view camera
NOTE NOTE General information

 Do not use an aerosol puncture-repair spray  Tire inflation pressures vary with the ambi- N00533001275
on any tire. ent temperature. If the vehicle is subjected to Your TPMS operates on a radio frequency
Such a spray could damage the tire inflation large variations in ambient temperature, the
subject to Federal Communications Commis-
pressure sensors. tire inflation pressures may be under-inflated
sion (FCC) Rules. This device complies with
Have any puncture repaired by an authorized (causing the warning light come on) when
Mitsubishi Motors dealer. the ambient temperature is relatively low. If part 15 of FCC Rules.
Operation is subject to the following two con-
5 The TPMS may not work normally in the fol-
the warning light comes on, adjust the tire
inflation pressure. ditions.
lowing circumstances:
 This device may not cause harmful inter-
 A wireless facility or device using the ference.
same frequency is near the vehicle.
Whenever the tires and wheels  This device must accept any interference
 Snow or ice is stuck inside the fenders are replaced with new ones received, including interference that may
and/or on the wheels. N00532901235 cause undesired operation.
 The tire inflation pressure sensor’s battery If new wheels with new tire inflation pressure
is dead. sensors are installed, their ID codes must be WARNING
 Wheels other than Mitsubishi Motors programmed into the TPMS. Have tire and
 Changes or modifications not expressly
Genuine wheels are being used. wheel replacement performed by an autho- approved by the manufacturer for compli-
 Wheels that are not fitted with tire infla- rized Mitsubishi Motors dealer to avoid the ance could void the user’s authority to
tion pressure sensors are being used. risk of damaging the tire inflation pressure operate the equipment.
 Wheels whose ID codes are not memo- sensors. If the wheel replacement is not done
rized by the vehicle are used. by an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer, it
 Compact spare tire is fitted on a road is not covered by your warranty.
wheel.
Rear-view camera
N00546201444
 A window tint that affects the radio wave CAUTION
signals is installed. When the gearshift lever or the selector lever
 The use of non-genuine wheels will prevent is in the “R” position with the ignition switch
the proper fit of the tire inflation pressure
or the operation mode is in ON, the rear-view
sensors, resulting air leakage or damage of
the sensors.
image will be displayed on the screen of the
DISPLAY AUDIO or the Smartphone-link
Display Audio (SDA).

Rear-view camera
When the gearshift lever or the selector lever
is shifted out of the “R” position, the rear-
Location of rear-view camera Reference lines on the screen
view image will go off. The rear-view camera (A) is built-in to the Reference lines and upper surface of the rear
trunk lid. bumper (A) are displayed on the screen.
WARNING
 Never rely solely on the rear-view camera  The red line (B) indicates approximately
to clear the area behind your vehicle. 20 inches (50 cm) behind the rear bumper.
Always check visually behind and all
around your vehicle for persons, animals,
 The Green lines (C) indicate approxi-
mately 8 inches (20 cm) outside of the
5
obstructions or other vehicles. Failure to vehicle body.
do so can result in vehicle damage, serious  Short transverse lines (1 to 3) indicate dis-
injury or death. tance from the rear bumper.
 The rear-view camera is an aid system for
backing up, but it is not a substitute for
your visual confirmation.
 The view on the screen is limited, and
objects outside the view, such as under the
bumper or around either corner of the
bumper, cannot be seen on the screen.
CAUTION
 If the camera lens gets dirty, a clear image
cannot be obtained. As necessary, rinse the
lens with clean water and gently wipe with a
clean, soft cloth.
 To avoid damaging the camera;
• Do not rub the cover excessively or polish
it by using an abrasive compound. 1: Approximately at the rear edge of the
• Do not disassemble the camera. rear bumper
• Do not splash hot water directly on the lens. 2: Approximately 39 inches (100 cm)
• Do not spray the camera and its surround- 3: Approximately 79 inches (200 cm)
ings with high-pressure water.
• Make sure that the trunk lid is securely
closed when backing up.

Rear-view camera
CAUTION Case 2
 The rear-view camera uses a wide-angle
lens. As a result, images and distances shown
on the screen are not exact.
 Actual distance may be different from dis-
tance indicated by the lines on the screen,
depending on the loading condition of the
5 vehicle and road surface condition.
The reference lines for distance and vehicle A- Actual objects
width are based on a level, flat road surface. B- Objects shown on the screen
In the following cases, objects shown on the
screen will appear to be farther off than they
actually are. CAUTION NOTE
• When the rear of the vehicle is weighed  The reference lines for distance and vehicle  Mirror image is displayed on the screen.
down with the weight of passengers and width are intended to indicate the distance to  Under certain circumstances, it may become
luggage in the vehicle. (Case 1) a flat object such as a level, flat road surface. difficult to see an image on the screen, even
• When there is an upward slope at the back. They may not indicate correct distance when the system is functioning correctly.
(Case 2) depending on the shape of an obstacle. • In a dark area, such as at night.
For example, when there is an object behind • When water drops or condensation are on
the vehicle that has upper sections projecting the lens.
Case 1 in the direction of the vehicle, the reference • When sun light or headlights shine directly
lines on the screen will indicate that point A into the lens.
is the farthest point and point B is the closest
point to the vehicle. In reality, point A and B
are actually the same distance from the vehi-
cle, and point C is farther off than point A
and B.
A- Actual objects
B- Objects shown on the screen

Instrument cluster
Instrument cluster Type A CAUTION

N00519001428  The red zone indicates an engine speed
beyond the range of safe operation.
Select the correct shift position (manual
transaxle) or selector position (CVT) to con-
trol the engine speed so that the tachometer
indicator does not enter the red zone.
5
Type B
1- Tachometer  P.5-77
2- Multi-information display  P.5-77
3- Speedometer  P.5-77
4- Multi-information display switch
Multi-information display
N00555001507
Speedometer The multi-information display includes the
N00519101344
odometer, trip odometer, service reminder,
The speedometer shows the vehicle speed in fuel remaining, selector lever position, aver-
miles per hour (mph) or kilometers per hour age fuel consumption, driving range, etc.
(km/h). Tachometer
N00519201332
The tachometer shows engine revolutions per

minute. This allows the driver to determine
the most efficient selector position and engine
speed combinations.
This gauge also assists in evaluating engine
performance.

1- Information display  P.5-79

2- Frozen road warning  P.5-82
3- Fuel remaining display  P.5-82
4- Selector lever position display (if so
equipped)  P.5-45
NOTE
 When the ignition switch or the operation
mode is in OFF, the selector lever position
display, fuel remaining display and frozen
road warning are not displayed.

Information display
N00574801096
Each time you lightly press the multi-information display switch (A), the display switches in the following order.
1- Odometer  P.5-80 5- Driving range display  P.5-81

2- Trip odometer  P.5-80 6- Average fuel consumption display
3-  P.5-81
Trip odometer  P.5-80
7- Outside temperature display  P.5-81
4- Instrument panel light dimmer control
8- Service reminder (distance)  P.5-83
 P.5-80
9- Service reminder (month)  P.5-83
NOTE
 When the ignition switch or the operation mode is in OFF, the driving range display, average fuel consumption display and outside temperature display are
not displayed.
 While driving, the service reminder is not displayed even if you operate the multi-information display switch.

NOTE
 When the parking lights are not illuminated, the instrument panel light dimmer control is not displayed even if you operate the multi-information display
switch.
Odometer If trip odometer is displayed, only trip

Bright Dim
N00574900016 odometer will be reset.
5 The odometer indicates the total distance the

vehicle has traveled. NOTE
 Both trip odometers and can count
up to 9999.9 miles/kilometers.
Trip odometer When a trip odometer goes past 9999.9
N00575000014
miles/kilometers, it returns to 0.0 miles/kilo-
The trip odometer indicates the distance trav- meters.
eled between two points.  When disconnecting the battery terminal, the
memories of trip odometer displays and 1- Brightness level
Usage examples for trip odometer , trip are cleared, and their displays return to 2- Multi-information display switch
odometer “0.0 miles/kilometers”.
It is possible to measure two currently trav-
eled distances, from home using trip odom- NOTE
Instrument panel light dimmer  When the parking lights are illuminated, you
eter and from a particular point on the
can adjust to 8 levels.
way using trip odometer . control  Each time you reduce two brightness levels,
N00575101041 the segment display of the brightness level
Turn the parking lights on and press the decreases by one segment.
To reset the trip odometer multi-information display switch (2), there is  If you press and hold the switch for longer
a sound and the brightness changes. than about 1 second, the brightness automati-
cally scrolls through its different levels, and
To return the display to 0, hold down the stops scrolling when you release the switch.
multi-information display switch for about 1 Select your desired level of brightness.
second or more. Only the currently displayed
value will be reset.
Example
NOTE NOTE NOTE

 The brightness level of the instruments is  When your vehicle is stopped on an  The initial (default) setting is “Auto reset
stored when the ignition switch is turned to extremely steep hill, the driving range value mode”.
the “OFF” position or the operation mode is may change. This is due to the movement of  Average fuel consumption may vary depend
put in OFF. fuel in the tank and does not indicate any on the driving conditions (road conditions,
On vehicles equipped with the automatic breakdown. how you drive, etc.).
light control, the instrument panel light dim-  The display setting can be changed to the The actual fuel consumption may differ from
mer control display is not displayed when it
is bright outside the vehicle and the ignition
preferred units (miles or km).
Refer to “Changing the function settings” on
the fuel consumption displayed, so treat the
fuel consumption displayed as just a rough
5
switch or the operation mode is ON. page 5-84. guideline.
 Disconnecting the battery cable will erase
from memory the manual reset mode or auto
Driving range display Average fuel consumption dis- reset mode setting for the average fuel con-
N00575201042
play sumption display.
This displays the approximate driving range N00575300017  The display setting can be changed to the
(how many more miles or kilometers you can This displays the average fuel consumption preferred units {mpg, km/L, L/100 km}.
drive). When the driving range falls below from the last reset to the present.
Refer to “Changing the function settings” on
approximately 30 miles (50 km), “---” is dis- page 5-84.
The reset mode conditions for the average
played. fuel consumption display can be switched
between “Auto reset” and “Manual reset”. Outside temperature display
NOTE For information on how to change the aver- N00556501150
 The driving range is determined based on the age fuel consumption display setting, refer to Shows the temperature outside the vehicle.
fuel consumption data. This may vary “Changing the function settings” on page
depending on the driving conditions and hab- 5-84.
its. Treat the distance displayed as just a NOTE
rough guideline.  The display setting can be changed to the
 When you refuel, the driving range display is NOTE preferred units (°F or °C).
updated.  The average fuel consumption display can be Refer to “Changing the function settings” on
However, if you only add a small amount of reset separately in both auto reset mode and page 5-84.
fuel, the correct value will not be displayed. manual reset mode.  Depending on factors such as the driving
Fill to a full tank whenever possible.  “---” is displayed when the average fuel con- conditions, the displayed temperature may
sumption cannot be measured. vary from the actual outside temperature.

turned to the “ON” position or the operation
Frozen road warning mode is changed to ON.
N00579000067
When the remaining fuel level runs very low
If the outside air temperature drops below (no segments displayed), the bar graph
approx. 37 °F (3 °C), the alarm sounds and flashes.
the outside air temperature warning symbol If the warning display appears, refuel imme-
(A) flashes for about 10 seconds. diately.
5
1- Full
0- Empty
NOTE
 It may take several seconds to stabilize the
display after refilling the tank.
 If fuel is added with the ignition switch or
the operation mode in ON, the remaining
CAUTION fuel display may incorrectly indicate the fuel NOTE
 There is a danger the road might be icy, even level.
 On hills or curves, the display may be incor-
when this symbol is not flashing, so please  The fuel lid mark (A) indicates that the fuel rect due to the movement of fuel in the tank.
take care when driving. tank filler door is located on the left side of
the vehicle. (Refer to “Filling the fuel tank”
on page 3-3.)
CAUTION
Fuel remaining display  Running out of gas could damage the cata-
N00575401057 lytic converter. If the warning display
Fuel remaining warning display appears, refuel immediately.
The fuel remaining display indicates the fuel
level in the fuel tank when the ignition switch
When the remaining fuel level runs low (one
or the operation mode in ON.
segment is displayed), the last segment of the
fuel gauge flashes when the ignition switch is

Service reminder NOTE To reset

N00556701312  Shows the distance in units of 100 miles (100
Displays the approximate time until the next km) and the time in units of 1 month. The “---” display can be reset while the igni-
recommended periodic inspection. “---” is tion switch or the operation mode is in OFF.
displayed when the inspection time has 2. This informs you that a periodic inspec-
arrived. tion is due. Contact an authorized 1. When you lightly press the multi-informa-
Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facil- tion display switch a few times, the infor-
NOTE ity of your choice to have the system mation display switches to the service 5
checked. reminder display.
 The service reminder time can be modified
by an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer, 3. After your vehicle is inspected at an
to adjust for severe usage, etc. Refer to authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer, it
“Severe maintenance schedule” in your vehi- displays the time until the next periodic
cle’s Warranty and Maintenance Manual. For inspection.
further information, please contact your
authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer. NOTE
 When the next periodic inspection is
approaching, the wrench symbol will be dis-
Distance played whenever the ignition switch is
turned from the “OFF” position to the “ON”
position or when the operation mode is
changed from OFF to ON.
The wrench symbol will continuously be dis- 2. Press and hold the multi-information dis-
Month played, even on non-service reminder display switch for about 1 second or more to
plays (odometer, trip meter, etc.), until the make the wrench symbol start flashing. (If
service reminder is reset.
there is no operation for about 10 seconds
When the service reminder resets, the
with flashing, the display will revert to its
wrench symbol will not be displayed until
the next periodic inspection. original indication.)
1. Shows the time until the next periodic

inspection.

3. With this indicator flashing, if you lightly 1. When you lightly press the multi-informa-
press the multi-information meter switch,
NOTE tion display switch a few times, the infor-
 When “---” is displayed, after a certain dis-
the display switches from “---” to mation display switches to the driving
tance and a certain period of time, the dis-
“cLEAr”. After that, the time until the range display.
play is reset and the time until the next
next periodic inspection is shown. periodic inspection is displayed. Refer to “Information display” on page
 If you accidentally reset the display, consult 5-79.
an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer for 2. Each time you press the multi-information
display switch for 1 second or more on
5 assistance.
driving range display, you can switch
reset mode for average fuel consumption.
Changing the function settings (A: Auto reset mode, B: Manual reset
N00556801267
mode)
The “Average fuel consumption reset mode”,
“Fuel consumption unit” and “Temperature
unit” setting can be modified as desired, Auto reset mode Manual reset mode
when the ignition switch or the operation
mode is ON.
CAUTION
 The customer is responsible for making sure
that regular inspections and maintenance and
CAUTION
 The driver should not operate the display
periodic inspections and maintenance are
while the vehicle is in motion.
performed.
Inspections and maintenance must be per-  When operating the system, stop the vehicle
formed to prevent accidents and malfunc- in a safe area.
tions.
Manual reset mode
Changing the reset mode for aver-
 When the average fuel consumption is
NOTE age fuel consumption being displayed, if you hold down the
 The “---” display cannot be reset while the N00575501032
multi-information display switch, these
ignition switch or the operation mode is in You can change the mode condition for the calculations will be reset to zero.
ON.
average fuel consumption display to “Auto  When the following operation is per-
reset” or “Manual reset”. formed, the mode setting changes auto-
matically from manual to auto.

[Except for vehicles equipped with the 3. Press and hold the multi-information dis-
F.A.S.T.-key]
NOTE play switch to switch in sequence from
 The average fuel consumption display can be
Turn the ignition switch to the “ON” posi- “km/L”  “L/100 km”  “mpg” 
reset separately for the auto reset mode and
tion from the “ACC” or “OFF” position. “km/L”.
for the manual reset mode.
[For vehicles equipped with the F.A.S.T.-  Disconnecting the battery cable will erase
from memory the manual reset mode or auto
key]
reset mode setting for the average fuel con-
Change the operation mode to ON from
ACC or OFF.
sumption display.
 The initial (default) setting is “Auto reset
5
mode”.
Auto reset mode
 When the average fuel consumption is Changing the fuel consumption

being displayed, if you hold down the
display unit
multi-information display switch, these
N00557100156
calculations will be reset to zero.
 When the engine switch or the operation The fuel consumption display unit can be
changed. The distance and amount units are NOTE
mode is in the following conditions, the
also switched to match the selected fuel con-  The display units for the driving range, the
average fuel consumption display will average fuel consumption are changed, but
automatically reset. sumption unit.
the units for the indicating needle (speedom-
1. When you lightly press the multi-informa- eter), the odometer, the trip odometer and the
[Except for vehicles equipped with the service reminder will remain unchanged.
F.A.S.T.-key] tion display switch a few times, the infor-
 If the battery is disconnected, the memory of
The ignition switch has been set to the mation display switches to the average
the unit setting is erased and it returns auto-
“ACC” or “OFF” position for about 4 fuel consumption display.
matically to factory setting.
hours or more. Refer to “Information display” on page
5-79.
[For vehicles equipped with the F.A.S.T.- 2. Press and hold the multi-information dis- The distance units is also changed in the fol-
key] play switch for about 5 seconds or more lowing combinations to match the selected
The operation mode has been set to ACC until buzzer sound is heard twice. fuel consumption unit.
or OFF for about 4 hours or more.

Distance
Fuel consumption
(driving range)
km/L km
L/100 km km
mpg mile (s)
5 Changing the temperature unit

N00557201268
The temperature display unit can be switched.
1. When you lightly press the multi-informa-

tion display switch a few times, the infor-
mation display switches to the outside
temperature display.
Refer to “Information display” on page
5-79.
2. Each time you press the multi-information
display switch for 5 seconds or more on
outside temperature display, you can
switch from °F to °C or from °C to °F unit
of outside temperature display.
NOTE
 The temperature value on air conditioning
panel is switched in conjunction with outside
temperature display unit of the multi-infor-
mation display.
However, “°F” or “°C” are not shown to tem-
perature display of an air conditioning.

Indicator and warning light package
Indicator and warning light package

N00519801976
1- High beam indicator  P.5-88 9- High coolant temperature warning light 18- Cruise control indicator (if so
2- Electric power steering system warning (red)  P.5-90 equipped)  P.5-56
light  P.5-52 10- Low coolant temperature indicator 19- Driver’s seat belt reminder/warning
3- Tire pressure monitoring system warn- (green)  P.5-88 light  P.4-11
ing light  P.5-72 11- ECO indicator  P.5-88 20- Forward Collision Mitigation system
4- Turn signal indicators/Hazard warning 12- Oil pressure warning light  P.5-90 (FCM) OFF indicator  P.5-64
lights  P.5-88 13- Engine malfunction indicator (“SER- 21- Active stability control (ASC) indica-
5- Forward Collision Mitigation system VICE ENGINE SOON”)  P.5-89 tor/warning light  P.5-55
(FCM) indicator  P.5-66 14- Charging system warning light 22- Lane Departure Warning (LDW) light
6- Front fog light indicator (if so P.5-90 (yellow) (if so equipped)  P.5-70
equipped)  P.5-88 15- Brake warning light  P.5-88 23- Automatic High Beam (AHB) warning
7- Door-ajar warning light  P.5-90 16- Anti-lock braking system warning light light (yellow) (if so equipped)
8- Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)  P.5-51  P.5-97
warning light  P.4-31 17- Multi-information display  P.5-77

Indicators
24- Active stability control (ASC) OFF
indicator/warning light  P.5-55
High beam indicator ECO indicator
N00520100086 N00568800036
25- Position indicator (if so equipped)
P.5-88 A blue light comes on when the headlights This indicator comes on while fuel-efficient
26- Lane Departure Warning (LDW) indi- are on high beam. driving is achieved.
cator (green) (if so equipped)  P.5-68
27- Automatic High Beam (AHB) indicator Front fog light indicator (if so Warning lights
(green) (if so equipped)  P.5-95
5 28- For details, refer to “Warning activa-
equipped) N00520300147
N00520200175
tion” on page 5-15 (if so equipped)
29- For details, refer to “Warning activa- Brake warning light and buzzer
This indicator comes on while the front fog
N00520400526
tion” on page 5-15 (if so equipped) lights are on.
This light comes on when the ignition switch
is turned to the “ON” position (engine off) or
Indicators Position indicator (if so equipped) the operation mode is put in ON.
N00519900127
N00551301049 When the engine is started, the light should
go off a few seconds later.
This indicator light illuminates while the
Turn signal indicators/Hazard The warning light also illuminates after start-
parking lights are on.
warning lights ing the engine under the following condi-
N00520000216 tions.
The arrows will flash in time with the corre-
Low coolant temperature indi-
 When the parking brake is still applied.
sponding exterior turn signals when the turn cator - green  When the brake fluid level is low.
signal lever is used. N00575600010
 When the brake system circuit is not
This indicator comes on in green while the working properly.
Both arrows will flash when the hazard warn- coolant temperature is low.
ing flasher switch is pressed.
When the vehicle is moving at more than 5
NOTE mph (8 km/h) and the parking brake applied,
NOTE  When the indicator goes out, this should be a buzzer will sound to inform the driver that
 If the indicator flashes faster than usual or if used as a rough indication of when the heat- the parking brake is not properly release.
the indicator stays on without flashing, check ing starts working.
for a malfunctioning turn signal light bulb or
turn signal connection.

Warning lights
Before driving, be sure that the parking brake
is fully released and the brake warning light
Engine malfunction indicator CAUTION
is off. (“SERVICE ENGINE SOON”)  Driving for a long time with the engine mal-
N00520501885
function indicator on may cause more dam-
age to the emission control system. This
CAUTION This indicator is a part of the onboard diag- could also affect fuel economy and drivabil-
 If the brake warning light and the Anti-lock nostic (OBD) system which monitors the ity.
braking system warning light are illuminated emissions, engine control system or continu-  If this indicator does not come on when the
ously variable transmission (CVT) control
at the same time, the braking force distribu-
tion function will not operate, the vehicle system. If a problem is detected in one of
ignition switch is turned to the “ON” posi-
tion or the operation mode is put in ON, have
5
may be destabilized during sudden braking these systems, this indicator illuminates or the system checked at an authorized
under the following conditions. flashes. When the ignition switch is turned to Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility
• When the brake warning light does not go the “ON” position or the operation mode is of your choice.
out even when the parking brake is put in ON, this indicator normally comes on  If the engine malfunction indicator comes on
released. while the engine is running, avoid driving at
and goes off after the engine has started.
• When the brake warning light stays on high speeds.
while driving. This indicator will come on if the fuel tank During vehicle operation with the indicator
If the above occurs, avoid sudden braking on, the vehicle may not accelerate when you
filler cap is not properly tightened. If this
and high-speed driving. Park the vehicle in a depress the accelerator pedal.
indicator comes on and stays on after refuel- When the vehicle is stationary with the indi-
safe place, and contact an authorized
ing, stop the engine and check that the cap is cator on, you must depress the brake pedal
Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility
properly tightened. (Turn the cap clockwise more firmly than usual since the engine
of your choice as soon as possible.
until you hear clicking sounds.) idling speed is higher than usual and a vehi-
 The vehicle should be brought to a halt in the
following manner when brake performance If this indicator does not go off after several cle with a CVT has a stronger tendency to
is deteriorated. seconds or lights up while driving, have the creep forward.
• Confirm that the vehicle slows down when system checked immediately at an authorized
you press down on the brake pedal harder Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility
than usual. In some cases, the brake pedal of your choice.
may go all the way to the floor.
• Should the brakes fail, use engine braking
to reduce your speed and slowly apply the
parking brake.
Depress the brake pedal to illuminate the
stop lights and to alert the vehicles behind
you.

Warning lights
NOTE Oil pressure warning light CAUTION

 Do not disconnect the battery cable when the N00520700170  If the light comes on during vehicle opera-
engine malfunction indicator (“SERVICE This light comes on when the engine oil pres- tion, it indicates that the engine is possibly
ENGINE SOON”) is on. overheating. Continued driving could make
sure is below normal. If the light stays on
The engine electronic control module stores the engine fail. Immediately stop the vehicle
while driving, stop the engine as soon as pos-
critical OBD information (especially exhaust in a safe place and take appropriate action.
emission data), which may be lost if the bat- sible. Do not run the engine until the cause of (Refer to “Engine overheating” on page 8-4.)
the low oil pressure is corrected.
5 tery cable is disconnected while the engine
malfunction indicator is on. This will make it
difficult to diagnose the cause of future prob- CAUTION NOTE
lems.
 If this light comes on when the engine oil  The high coolant temperature warning light
level is not low, have your vehicle checked at may illuminate when the vehicle has been
an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a driven at high speeds or on hilly roads. This
Charging system warning light repair facility of your choice. illuminating does not necessarily indicate a
N00520601365  This warning light does not show the amount problem. It should stop if you keep the
of oil in the crankcase. This can only be engine running for a while or continue driv-
This light comes on in the event of a malfunc-
determined by checking the oil level with the ing the vehicle.
tion in the charging system or when the igni-
dipstick with the engine turned off.
tion switch is turned to the “ON” position
(engine off) or the operation mode is put in
ON. When the engine is started, the light Door-ajar warning light and
should go out. Check to make sure that the High coolant temperature buzzer
light has gone out before driving. warning light - red N00520901342
N00575700011
This light comes on when any door is open or
CAUTION This light comes on in red if the coolant tem- not completely closed.
 If the warning light stays on while the engine perature becomes excessively high. When the vehicle is moving at more than 5
is running, park your vehicle in a safe place mph (8 km/h) and any door is open or ajar, a
immediately and contact an authorized Mit- tone will sound 4 times to inform the driver
subishi Motors dealer or a repair facility of that any door is not properly shut.
your choice to have the system checked.
CAUTION
 Before driving, make sure that the door-ajar
warning light is off.

Combination headlights and dimmer switch
NOTE Type 1 Vehicles equipped with daytime running

 When the auto cut-out function of the doom lights
light is been activated, the light goes out Rotate the switch to operate the lights.
automatically after about 30 minutes. [When the engine is started, and the parking
Refer to “Dome light” on page 5-107. brake is released]
The daytime running lights will be illumi-

nated:
Combination headlights and 5
dimmer switch OFF
The daytime running lights illumi-
N00522502059 nated
Headlights nated
Parking, tail, front and rear side-
marker lights, license plate and
NOTE The combinations of switch operations and
instrument panel lights on
illuminated lights differ in accordance with
 Do not leave the headlights and other lights
on for a long period of time when the engine the following conditions. Headlights and other lights on
is not running. The battery will run down.
Except for vehicles equipped with day-
 When it rains, or when the vehicle has been
washed, the inside of the lens sometimes
time running lights NOTE
becomes foggy. This is the same as when  Once the daytime running light come on,
window glass mists up on a humid day, and OFF All lights off they do not go out until the ignition switch is
does not indicate a problem. When the light Parking, tail, front and rear side- turned to the “OFF” or “ACC” position or
is switched on, the heat will dry out the fog. marker lights, license plate and the operation mode is changed to OFF or
However, if water collects inside the light, ACC.
instrument panel lights on
have it checked by an authorized Mitsubishi
Motors dealer or a repair facility of your Headlights and other lights on
choice. [When the engine is not running, or when the
engine is running but the parking brake is not
released]


The engine starts when the lights are off.
Except for vehicles equipped with day- NOTE
time running lights  Once the daytime running lights come on,
OFF All lights off
they do not go out until the ignition switch is
Parking, tail, front and rear side- Headlights and other lights turn on turned to the “OFF” or “ACC” position or
marker lights, license plate and AUTO and off automatically in accor- the operation mode is changed to OFF or
instrument panel lights on dance with outside light level. ACC.
Headlights and other lights on Tail, front and rear side-marker-

5 lights, license plate and instrument [When the engine is not running, or when the
panel lights on engine is running but the parking brake is not
Type 2 released]
Headlights and other lights on
Rotate the switch to operate the lights. The engine starts when the lights are off.
Vehicles equipped with daytime running
Headlights and other lights turn on
lights
AUTO and off automatically in accor-
dance with outside light level.
[When the engine is started, and the parking
brake is released] Parking, tail, front and rear side-
marker lights, license plate and
The daytime running lights illumi- instrument panel lights on
nated (when it is light outside the Headlights and other lights on
vehicle)
AUTO
Headlights and other lights turn on
and off automatically in accor-
The combinations of switch operations and dance with outside light level.
illuminated lights differ in accordance with
the following conditions.
nated
Tail, front and rear side-marker
lights, license plate and instrument
panel lights on
Headlights and other lights on


The ignition switch is turned to the “OFF”
NOTE When you want to keep the lights
or “ACC” position or the key is removed
 Do not cover the sensor (A) for the automatic
from the ignition switch and the driver’s on:
on/off control by affixing a sticker or label to
door is opened.
the windshield.
If the combination headlights and dimmer
[For vehicles equipped with the F.A.S.T.- switch is turned to the “ ” or “ ” posi-
key] tion again after the engine is turned off, the
The operation mode is changed to OFF or about 3-minute auto-cutout function
ACC and the driver’s door is opened. described above will not work. The lights (the
5
parking lights, tail lights and license plate
 If the following operation is performed lights) will stay on and will not turn off auto-
with the combination headlights and dim- matically.
mer switch in the “ ” or “ ” position,
 If the lights do not turn on or off with the the lights automatically turn off after
switch in the “AUTO” position, manually about 3 minutes. Headlight reminder buzzer
operate the switch. Have the system checked N00549801308
by an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or [Except for vehicles equipped with the [When using a key to start the engine]
a repair facility of your choice.
F.A.S.T.-key] If the driver’s door is opened while the com-
The ignition switch is turned to the “OFF” bination headlight switch is in the or
or “ACC” position or the key is removed position and the key is removed from the
Light auto-cutout function from the ignition switch and the driver’s ignition switch, the tone will sound to remind
(headlights and other lights) door is not opened. you to turn off the light.
N00532600570
 If the following operation is performed [For vehicles equipped with the F.A.S.T.- [When using the F.A.S.T.-key to start the
with the combination headlights and dim- key] engine]
The operation mode is changed to OFF or If the driver’s door is opened while the com-
mer switch in the “ ” or “ ” position,
ACC and the driver’s door is not opened.
the lights automatically turn off. bination headlight switch is in the or
position and the operation mode is in OFF,
[Except for vehicles equipped with the NOTE the tone will sound to remind you to turn off
F.A.S.T.-key]  The light auto-cutout function can be deacti- the light.
vated.
See your authorized Mitsubishi Motors In either case, the lights will turn off automat-
dealer for details. ically and so will the tone. You can also turn

the light switch to the “OFF” or “AUTO”
position*, or close the driver’s door to stop
Automatic High Beam (AHB) (if
the tone. so equipped)
N00591300103
*: Whether or not your vehicle is equipped The Automatic High Beam (AHB) turns the
with “OFF” or “AUTO” position on the high beam light on or off automatically
combination headlights and dimmer according to surrounding light conditions.
switch depends on the vehicle specifica- The sensor (A) detects lights, such as the
5 tions. lights of an oncoming vehicle, a vehicle
ahead or street lights.
Dimmer (high/low beam

change)
N00549900142
Headlight flasher
N00550001241
To change the headlights from high beam to
You can flash the high beams by pulling the
low beam and vice versa, pull the turn signal
lever gently toward you (2). The lights will
lever to (1). Switch the headlights to low
go back to normal when you let go. While the
beam as a courtesy whenever there are
high beam is on, you will see a blue light on
oncoming vehicles, or when there is traffic
the instrument panel.
moving ahead of you. An illuminated blue
light in the instrument cluster indicates when
the headlights are on high beam. NOTE
 You can flash the high beams by pulling the WARNING
lever toward you, even if the headlights are
 Do not rely solely on the AHB. Always
off.
observe surrounding traffic and light con-
 If you turn the lights off with the headlights ditions. If necessary, manually turn the
set to high beam illumination, the headlights
high beams on or off.
are automatically returned to their low beam Refer to “Dimmer (high/low beam
setting.
change)” on page 5-94.

How to use the AHB  Manual switching

N00593600142
1. Rotate the light switch to “ ” or Switching to low beam

“AUTO” position (if so equipped) when
the engine is running. 1. Pull the turn signal lever toward you.
2. Press the AHB switch. (Green) 2. The AHB indicator (green) will go off.
The AHB is activated and the AHB indi- 3. The AHB switch is pressed again, the
cator (green) is illuminated. AHB will be activated. 5
If the AHB switch is pressed again, the
AHB will be deactivated and AHB indica- Switching to high beam
tor (green) will go off.
NOTE 1. Pull the turn signal lever toward you.
 If the headlights are on when the light switch 2. The AHB indicator (green) will go off and
is in the “AUTO” position (if so equipped), the high beam indicator illuminates.
the AHB works. 3. The AHB switch is pressed again, the
 You can switch the headlight beams AHB will be activated.
(high/low) manually by operating the lever
even if the AHB is working. Automatic switching conditions
Refer to “Dimmer (high/low beam change)”
N00593700101
on page 5-94.
If the lever is operated manually, the AHB The high beam headlights illuminate when all
indicator (green) will go off and the AHB of the following conditions are met:
will be deactivated.
Refer to “Manual switching” on page 5-95.  Your vehicle speed exceeds approxi-
 The AHB is not deactivated when you pull mately 33 mph (53 km/h).
the lever slightly (operation of the headlight  It is dark ahead of your vehicle.
flasher).  There are no vehicles in front or oncom-
ing vehicles, or none of their exterior
lights are illuminating.
The low beam headlights illuminate when

any of the following conditions occur:


 Your vehicle speed does not exceed
approximately 28 mph (45 km/h).
NOTE NOTE
• A vehicle in front or oncoming vehicle is a • A reflective object such as a noticeboard or
 It is bright ahead of your vehicle.
motorcycle. a mirror reflects a light ahead of your vehi-
 An exterior light of a vehicle in front or
• Road conditions (gradient, bends and road cle.
oncoming vehicle is illuminating.
surface). • When lights of the vehicle in front or head-
• The number of occupants and luggage load. lights of an oncoming vehicle blend into the
NOTE  The AHB recognises environmental condi- other lights.
5  The headlights may not be switched from tions by sensing a light source ahead of your • The rear end of a vehicle in front (such as a
container truck) reflect a strong light.
high beam to low beam under the following vehicle. Therefore, you may feel like some-
circumstances. thing is not quite right when the headlight • Your vehicle’s headlight is broken or dirty.
• A vehicle in front or oncoming vehicle is beams are switched automatically. • Your vehicle is inclined due to a flat tire or
hindered by any object such as continuous  The system may not detect a light vehicle towing.
bends, elevated median/island, traffic signs, such as a bicycle. • The AHB warning light (yellow) illumi-
roadside trees.  The system may not detect an ambient nates.
• Your vehicle passes an oncoming vehicle brightness precisely. This causes the traffic (Refer to “System problem warning” on
suddenly on a bend with poor visibility. to be dazzled by high beam or the low beam page 5-97.)
• Another vehicle crosses ahead of your vehi- to be maintained. In such cases, you should  Observe the precautions below to maintain
cle. switch the headlight beams manually. good usage conditions:
 The headlights may remain at low beam (or • In bad weather (heavy rain, fog, snow or • Do not attempt to disassemble the sensor.
be switched from high beam to low beam) sandstorm). • Do not affix a sticker or label on the wind-
when a reflective object (e.g. street light, • The windshield is dirty or fogged up. shield near the sensor.
traffic signal, noticeboard and signboard) • The windshield is cracked or broken. • Avoid overload.
reflects light. • The sensor is deformed or dirty. • Do not modify your vehicle.
 Any of the following factors may influence • A light, which is similar to the headlights or • When the windshield is replaced, use the
the headlight beam switching timing: tail lights, is shining around your vehicle. Mitsubishi Motors genuine parts.
• How brightly the exterior lights of a vehicle • A vehicle in front or oncoming vehicle is
in front or oncoming vehicle illuminate. driven without lights, the exterior lights are To adjust the sensitivity of the sensor
• Movement or direction of a vehicle in front dirty or discoloured, or the direction of the
or oncoming vehicle. headlight beams is adjusted improperly. The sensitivity of the sensor can be temporar-
• Only right or left exterior light of a vehicle • It becomes dark and bright suddenly and ily lowering in the following ways.
in front or oncoming vehicle is illuminat- continuously around your vehicle.
ing. • Your vehicle is driven on uneven surfaces.
• Your vehicle is driven on a winding road.


1. Park your vehicle in a safe place and the
ignition switch is turned to the “OFF”
Welcome light (if so equipped) NOTE
N00563201335 • The welcome light function can be deacti-
position or the operation mode is put in
vated.
OFF. This function turns on the front side-marker For details, consult an authorized Mitsubishi
2. Press the AHB switch more than 15 times and parking lights for approximately 30 sec- Motors dealer.
within 5 seconds after the ignition switch onds after the UNLOCK button on the key is
is turned back to the “ON” position or the pressed when the combination headlights and
operation mode is turned back to ON. Coming home light (if so equipped)
dimmer switch is in the “OFF” or “AUTO” 5
position*. On vehicles equipped with the N00547301266
System problem warning automatic light control, the welcome light This function turns on the headlights in the
N00593800098 function will operate only when it is dark out- low beam setting for approximately 30 sec-
If a failure is detected in the system, the AHB side the vehicle. onds after the ignition switch is turned to the
warning light (yellow) will illuminate and the “OFF” position or the operation mode is put
AHB will automatically be turned off. *: Whether or not your vehicle is equipped in OFF.
If the warning light remains even after the with “OFF” or “AUTO” position on the
ignition switch is turned to the “OFF” posi- combination headlights and dimmer 1. Turn the combination headlights and dim-
tion and then turned back to the “ON” posi- switch depends on the vehicle specifica- mer switch to the “OFF” or “AUTO”
tion or the operation mode is put in OFF and tions. position*.
then turned back to ON, please contact an
authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer. *: Whether or not your vehicle is equipped
NOTE with “OFF” or “AUTO” position on the
 While the welcome light function is operat- combination headlights and dimmer
ing, perform one of the following operations switch depends on the vehicle specifica-
to cancel the function. tions.
• Press the LOCK button on the key.
• Turn the combination headlights and dim- 2. Turn the ignition switch to the “OFF”
Yellow mer switch to the “ ” or “ ” position. position or put the operation mode in
• Turn the ignition switch to the “ON” posi- OFF. Also, if a key was used to start the
tion or put the operation mode in ON. engine, remove the key from the ignition
 It is possible to modify functions as follows: switch.
• The headlights can be set to come on in the
low beam setting.

Turn signal lever

3. Within 60 seconds of turning the ignition Also, when you move the lever to (1) slightly
switch to the “OFF” position or putting
NOTE then release it, the turn signal lights and the
 While the coming home light function is
the operation mode in OFF, pull the turn indicator light in the instrument cluster will
operating, perform one of the following
signal lever toward you. flash three times.
operations to cancel the function.
• Pull the turn signal lever toward you.
• Turn the combination headlights and dim-
mer switch to the “ ” or “ ” position.
5 • Turn the ignition switch to the “ON” posi-
tion or put the operation mode in ON.
 It is possible to modify functions as follows:
• The time that the headlights remain on can
be changed.
• The coming home light function can be
deactivated.
For details, consult an authorized Mitsubishi
4. The headlights will come on in the low
Motors dealer.
beam setting for approximately 30 sec-
onds. After the headlights go off, the NOTE
headlights can be turned on again in the  A light in the instrument panel flashes to
low beam setting for approximately Turn signal lever show when the turn signal lights are working
30 seconds by pulling the turn signal lever N00522601662 properly.
If this light flashes faster than usual, check
toward you within 60 seconds of turning When changing lanes, or to making a gradual
for a burned out turn signal light bulb or mal-
the ignition switch to the “OFF” position turn, hold the lever in the “lane change” posi- functioning connection in the signal.
or putting the operation mode in OFF. tion (1). It will return to the neutral position If the panel light does not come on when the
To turn on the headlights again after 60 when you let go. Use the full position (2) lever is moved, check for a blown fuse or a
seconds of turning the ignition switch to when making a normal turn. The lever will burned out bulb in the panel.
the “OFF” position or putting the opera- return to the neutral position when the turn is Have the system inspected by your autho-
tion mode in OFF, repeat the process from complete. There may be times when the lever rized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair
step 1. does not return to the neutral position. This facility of your choice.
usually happens when the steering wheel is  It is possible to modify functions as follows:
turned only slightly. You can easily return the • Deactivate the turn signal light 3-flash
lever by hand. function for lane changes.

Hazard warning flasher switch
NOTE Hazard warning flasher Front fog light switch (if so

• Adjust the time required to operate the
lever for the 3-flash function.
switch equipped)
N00522701399 N00522801547
• Changing of the tone of a sounding buzzer
as the turn signal lights flash. The front fog lights illuminate only when the
See your authorized Mitsubishi Motors headlights are on low beam.
dealer for details.
Turning the knob in the direction of the “ON”
position turns on the front fog lights as well 5
as the indicator in the instrument cluster. To
turn them off, turn the knob in the direction of
The knob will return to the neutral position
when it is released.
If you press the flasher switch, the turn sig-

nals will flash intermittently, and so will the
hazard warning lights. This is an emergency
warning system and should not be used when
the vehicle is in motion, except for emergen-
cies.
If you need to leave your vehicle, the flashers
will keep working after the key is removed
from the ignition switch or the operation
mode is put in OFF.
NOTE NOTE
 If the flashers are used for several hours, the  If the headlights are switched to high beam,
battery will run down. This could make it the front fog lights will go out; they will illu-
difficult or impossible to restart your vehicle. minate again when the headlights are
switched back to low beam.

Wiper and washer switch

and the blades are freed, otherwise the wiper
NOTE motor may be damaged.
 If the light switch is rotated to the “OFF” (if A
so equipped) or “ ” position while the
front fog lights are illuminated, they will Except for vehicles with rain sen-
automatically turn off. They can be turned sor
back on again by rotating the combination
headlights and dimmer switch back to “ ”
5 position, and turning the knob in the direc-
tion of the “ON” position.
 Do not use fog lights except in conditions of
fog, otherwise excessive light glare may 1- Fast
temporarily blind oncoming vehicle drivers. 2- Slow

N00523001865
NOTE
 The speed-sensitive-operation function of
CAUTION MIST- Misting function
the windshield wipers can be deactivated.
 If the washer is used in cold weather, the For further information, please contact your
The wipers will operate once. authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a
washer fluid sprayed against the glass may OFF- Off
freeze, which may hinder visibility. Warm repair facility of your choice.
INT- Intermittent (Speed sensitive)
the glass with the defroster before using the
LO- Slow Misting function
washer.
HI- Fast
The misting function can be used when the
ignition switch or the operation mode is in
Windshield wipers To adjust intermittent intervals ON or ACC.
The wipers will operate once if the wiper
The windshield wiper can be operated with With the lever in the “INT” (speed sensitive
lever is raised to the “MIST” position and
the ignition switch or the operation mode is in intermittent operation) position, the intermit-
released. This operation is useful when it is
ON or ACC. tent intervals can be adjusted by turning the
drizzling, etc. The wipers will continue to
If the blades are frozen to the windshield, do knob (A).
operate while the lever is held in the “MIST”
not operate the wipers until the ice has melted position.


AUTO- Auto-wiper control
Rain sensor
CAUTION
 With the ignition switch or the operation
The wipers will automatically
mode in ON and the lever in the “AUTO”
operate depending on the degree of position, the wipers may automatically oper-
wetness on the windshield. ate in the situations described below.
LO- Slow • When cleaning the outside surface of the
HI- Fast windshield, if you touch the rain sensor.
Rain sensor
• When cleaning the outside surface of the
windshield, if you wipe with a cloth the rain
5
sensor.
Can only be used when the ignition switch or • When using an automatic car wash.
the operation mode is in ON. • A physical shock is applied to the wind-
shield or the rain sensor.
Vehicles with rain sensor If the lever is put in the “AUTO” position, the
rain sensor (A) will detect the extent of rain
If your hands get trapped, you could suffer
(or snow, other moisture, dust, etc.) and the
injuries or the wipers could malfunction. Be
wipers will operate automatically.
sure to turn the ignition switch to the “OFF”
Keep the lever in the “OFF” position if the
position or put the operation mode in OFF, or
windshield is dirty and the weather is dry.
move the lever to the “OFF” position to deac-
Wiper operation under these conditions can
tivate the rain sensor.
scratch the windshield and damage the wip-
ers.
NOTE
 To protect the rubber parts of the wipers, this
operation of the wipers does not take place
even if the lever is put in the “AUTO” posi-
MIST- Misting function
tion when the vehicle is stationary and the
The wipers will operate once. ambient temperature is approximately 32 °F
OFF- Off (0 °C) or lower.

NOTE To adjust the sensitivity of the rain sensor Misting function

 Do not cover the sensor by affixing a sticker
or label to the windshield. Also, do not put With the lever in the “AUTO” position, it is Move the lever in the direction of the arrow
any water-repellent coating on the wind- possible to adjust the sensitivity of the rain and release, to operate the wipers once.
shield. The rain sensor would not be able to sensor by turning the knob (B).
detect the extent of rain, and the wipers Use this function when you are driving in
might stop working normally. mist or drizzle.
The wipers will operate once if the lever is
5  In the following cases, the rain sensor may
be malfunctioning. Have the vehicle checked
B
raised to the “MIST” position and released
at an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or when the ignition switch or the operation
a repair facility of your choice. mode is in ON or ACC. The wipers will con-
• When the wipers operate at a constant inter- tinue to operate while the lever is held in the
val despite changes in the extent of rain. “MIST” position.
• When the wipers do not operate even
though it is raining.
 The wipers may automatically operate when
things such as insects or foreign objects are
affixed to the windshield on top of the rain “+”- Higher sensitivity to rain
sensor or when the windshield is frozen. “-”- Lower sensitivity to rain
Objects affixed to the windshield will stop
the wipers when the wipers cannot remove
them. To operate the wipers again, move the NOTE
lever to the “LO” or “HI” position.
 Automatic wiper operation (rain sensitive)
Also, the wipers may operate automatically
can be changed to intermittent operation,
due to strong direct sunlight or electromag-
either vehicle speed sensitive or not vehicle
netic wave. To stop the wipers, move the
speed sensitive.
lever to the “OFF” position.
For further information, please contact your
 Contact an authorized Mitsubishi Motors authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a
dealer or a repair facility of your choice repair facility of your choice.
when replacing the windshield glass.


The wipers will operate once if the lever is
moved to the “AUTO” position and the knob
Windshield washer NOTE
N00504600298  Do not use the wipers when the windshield is
(C) is turned in the “+” direction when the
To turn on the windshield washer, pull the dry. This could scratch the glass and wear the
ignition switch or the operation mode is in
lever toward you with the ignition switch or wiper blades prematurely.
ON.
the operation mode is in ON or ACC.  Before using the wipers in cold weather,
The wipers will wipe automatically several check to be sure that the wiper blades are not
times when the washer fluid is sprayed. frozen to the windshield. Using the wipers
C
To turn off the spray, release the lever. while the blades are frozen could cause the
wiper motor to burn out.
5
 If the moving wipers become blocked part-
way through a sweep by ice or other deposits
on the glass, the wipers may temporarily stop
operating to prevent the motor from over-
heating. In this case, park the vehicle in a
safe place, turn the ignition switch to the
“OFF” position or put the operation mode in
OFF, and then remove the ice or other depos-
its.
Because the wipers will start operating again
after the wiper motor cools down, check that
the wipers operate before using them.
 Avoid using the washer for more than 20 sec-
onds at a time. Do not operate the washer
Precautions to observe when when the washer fluid reservoir is empty or
using wipers and washers the pump may fail.
N00523501349  During cold weather, add a recommended
washer solution that will not freeze in the
CAUTION washer fluid reservoir. Otherwise the washer
 If the washer is used in cold weather, washer may not work or may be damaged.
fluid sprayed onto the glass might freeze,  Replace the wiper blades when they are
blocking your view. Heat the glass with the worn. Use the proper size replacement
defroster before using the washer. blades. For further information, please con-
tact your authorized Mitsubishi Motors
dealer.

Electric rear window defogger switch
Electric rear window defog- CAUTION Link System

ger switch  The rear window defogger is not designed to
melt snow. Remove any snow manually
N00563701239
N00523701572 The Link System takes control of the devices

before using the rear window defogger.
The rear window defogger can be used when connected via the USB input terminal or the
 Use the rear window defogger only after the
the engine is running. engine has started and is running. Be sure to Bluetooth®; the system allows the connected
The indicator light (A) will come on when turn the defogger switch off immediately devices to be operated by using the switches
5 you press the electric rear window defogger after the window is clear to save on battery
power.
in the vehicle or voice commands (if so
equipped).
switch. Electric current will flow through the
heating wires on the rear window to help  Do not place stickers, tape, or other items For details on how to operate, refer to “USB
clear away moisture or frost. that are attached with adhesive over the grid input terminal” on page 5-104 and the sepa-
wires on the rear window. rate owner’s manual.
 When cleaning the inside rear window, use a
soft cloth and wipe lightly over the grid Bluetooth® is a registered trademark of
wires.
BLUETOOTH SIG, INC.
Horn switch USB input terminal

N00566701331
N00523800185
You can connect your USB memory device,

To honk the horn, press around the “ ” mark
iPod* or smartphone to play music files
on the steering wheel.
stored in the connected device.
*: “iPod” is a registered trademark of Apple

After about 20 minutes of operation, the sys-
Inc. in the United States and other countries.
tem will shut off automatically.
To switch the defogger OFF before 20 min- This section explains how to connect and
utes have passed, press the switch again. The remove a USB memory device, iPod or
indicator light will go out and the defogger smartphone.
will turn off. Refer to the separate owner’s manual for
If you need the defogger for more than 20 details on the types of connectable devices
minutes, press the switch again. This will add and supported files, and how to play music
20 more minutes. files.

USB input terminal

2. Open the cover (C) and connect the oppo-
WARNING site end of the USB connector cable.
NOTE
 Do not connect/disconnect the USB mem-  When you connect the iPod, use a genuine
ory device, iPod or smartphone while connector cable from Apple Inc.
driving. This can be dangerous.
Be sure to do this before driving.
2. Open the cover (A) and connect the oppo-
site end of the connector cable or the USB
connector cable.
How to connect a USB memory 5
device
N00566801172
To connect
1. Connect a commercially available USB NOTE
connector cable (A) to the USB memory  Do not connect the USB memory device to
device (B). the USB input terminal directly.
The USB memory device may be damaged.
3. To disconnect the USB connector cable, 3. To disconnect the connector cable or the
perform the installation steps in reverse. USB connector cable, perform the instal-
lation steps in reverse.
How to connect an iPod or

smartphone
N00566901290
To connect
1. Connect the connector cable to the iPod or
the USB connector cable to the smart-
phone.

Sun visors
Sun visors Vanity mirror Ticket holder

N00524601435
Pull the sun visor downward (1) to reduce A vanity mirror is fitted to the back of the sun The holder (A) is located on the back of the
front glare while driving. To reduce side visor. sun visor.
glare, turn the visor to the side (2).
CAUTION
 Do not leave plastic cards in the ticket
holder. Because the inside of the vehicle will
become hot if the vehicle is parked in strong
sunlight, the cards could deform or crack.
12 V power outlets
N00525001670
CAUTION
 Be sure to use a “plug-in” type accessory
operating at 12 V and at 120 W or less.
 Also be aware that using electronic equip-
ment with the engine off may run the battery
down.

Interior lights
The light illuminates when a door is
CAUTION Interior lights opened. It goes off approximately 30 sec-
 When the power outlet is not in use, be sure N00525301644
onds after the door is closed.
to close the power outlet cover. This will pre-
However, the light goes off immediately
vent the power outlet from becoming NOTE with all doors closed in the following
clogged and short circuiting.  Be aware that leaving the light illuminated
cases:
with the engine off may run the battery
Accessories can be operated while the igni- • When the ignition switch is turned to the
down.
tion switch or the operation mode is in ON or “ON” position or the operation mode is
ACC.
Never leave the vehicle without checking
that the light is off. put in ON.
5
To use a “plug-in” type accessory, open the • When the power door lock function is
cover, and insert the plug in the power outlet. used to lock the vehicle.
Dome light • When the remote control transmitter of
N00525801421
the keyless entry system or the F.A.S.T.-
key is used to lock the vehicle.
• When the door lock/unlock switch is
pressed to lock the vehicle while carry-
ing the F.A.S.T.-key.
Auto cut-out function
If the light is left switched on with the
ignition switch in the “OFF” or “ACC”
position or the operation mode in OFF or
ACC, and a door is opened, it goes off
automatically after approximately 30 min-
utes.
The light will illuminate again after it
1- ( ) automatically goes off in the following
The light illuminates regardless of cases:
whether a door is open or closed. • When the ignition switch is turned to the
2- (•) “ON” position or the operation mode is
Delayed off function put in ON.
• When the keyless entry system or the
F.A.S.T.-key is operated.

Storage spaces
• When all doors are closed.
Storage spaces Glove compartment
NOTE N00526400528 N00551501331
 When the key was used to start the engine: if

CAUTION WARNING
the key is removed while the doors are
 Never leave lighters, carbonated drink cans,  An open glove compartment door can
closed, the light is illuminated and after
or spectacles in the cabin when parking the cause a serious injury or death to the front
approximately 30 seconds it goes off.
vehicle in hot sunshine. The cabin will passenger in an accident, even if the pas-
 When the F.A.S.T.-key was used to start the
5 engine: if the operation mode is put in OFF
become extremely hot, so lighters and other
flammable items may catch fire and
senger is wearing his/her seat belt. Always
keep the glove compartment door closed
while the doors are closed, the light illumi-
unopened drink cans (including beer cans) when driving.
nates and after approximately 30 seconds it
may rupture. The heat may also deform or
goes off. To open, pull the lever (A).
crack plastic spectacle lenses and other spec-
 The time until the light goes off (delayed off)
tacle parts that are made of plastic.
can be adjusted. See your authorized
 Keep the lids of storage spaces closed while
Mitsubishi Motors dealer for details.
driving the vehicle. A lid or the contents of a
 The auto cut-out function cannot be operated
storage space could otherwise cause injuries
when the dome light switch is in the “ ” during a sudden stop.
position.
Also, this function can be deactivated. See
your authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer for NOTE
details.
 Do not leave valuables in any storage space
when leaving the vehicle.
3- ( )
The light goes off regardless of whether a
door is open or closed.
Cup holders
N00527301518
The cup holder is designed for holding cups

or drink-cans securely in its holes.

Bottle holders
WARNING CAUTION
 Do not spray water or spill beverages  Do not drink beverages while driving your
inside the vehicle. If switches, wires, or vehicle.
electrical components become wet, they This is distracting and could cause an acci-
could malfunction or cause a vehicle fire. dent.
If you accidentally spill a beverage, wipe
up as much liquid as possible.
For the rear seat 5
N00537001215
NOTE
 Plastic bottles may sometimes not fit
securely depending on the shape of the bot-
Type 1
tle. Plastic bottles could fall if driving is
done while a plastic bottle is not securely The cup holder is located behind the parking Bottle holders
placed, so check that plastic bottles are brake lever. N00502801105
placed securely or use the bottle holder.

WARNING
 Do not spray water or spill beverages
For the front seat inside the vehicle. If switches, wires, or
electrical components become wet, they
The cup holder is located in front of the floor could malfunction or cause a vehicle fire.
If you accidentally spill a beverage, wipe
console.
up as much liquid as possible.
CAUTION
 Drinking beverages while driving your vehi-
cle is distracting and can cause an accident.
 Vibration and shaking while driving may
Type 2 cause beverages to spill. Be very careful, as
spilling hot beverages could cause burns.
In order to use cup holder, allow the arm rest

to drop down.

Convenience hook
There are bottle holders located on the front
doors.
NOTE CAUTION
 To avoid damage to the convenience hook,  Do not use the assist grips when getting into
do not hang objects that weight more than 9 or out of the vehicle. The assist grips could
NOTE pounds (4 kg). detach causing you to fall.
 Do not store cup or drink can in the bottle
holder.
 Make sure all lids are tightly closed when
storing beverages that are in plastic bottles,
Assist grips
N00559001101
etc.
 Some beverages may not be stored, depend- These grips are to support the body by hand
ing on the size and shape of the plastic bot- while seated in the vehicle.
tles, etc.
Convenience hook
N00574700014
Convenience hook is located on the seatback

of the passenger’s seat.

Driving safety
Fuel economy ...................................................................................6-2

Driving, alcohol and drugs ..............................................................6-2
Floor mat ..........................................................................................6-2
Vehicle preparation before driving ..................................................6-3
Safe driving techniques ....................................................................6-4 6
Driving during cold weather ............................................................6-4
Braking ............................................................................................6-5
Parking .............................................................................................6-5
Loading information ........................................................................6-6
Cargo loads ....................................................................................6-11
Trailer towing ................................................................................6-12
Fuel economy
retaining clip on the driver’s floorboard to
Fuel economy Driving, alcohol and drugs secure the floor mat. When used, this clip will
N00628800178 N00628900049
help prevent the floor mat from moving for-
Fuel economy is dependent on many factors. Drunk driving is one of the most frequent ward and possibly interfering with the opera-
Your personal driving habits can have a sig- causes of accidents. tion of the pedals. To prevent the floor mat
nificant effect on your fuel consumption. Your driving ability can be seriously impaired from moving forward and possibly interfering
Several recommendations for achieving the even with blood alcohol levels far below the with the operation of the pedals, Mitsubishi
greatest fuel economy are listed below. legal minimum. If you have been drinking, Motors Genuine floor mats are recom-
don’t drive. Ride with a designated non- mended.
 Whenever accelerating from a stop,
6 always accelerate slowly and smoothly.
drinking driver, call a cab or a friend, or use
public transportation. Drinking coffee or tak-
 When parked for even a short period, do ing a cold shower will not make you sober.
To install the floor mat
not idle the engine. Shut it off. Similarly, prescription and nonprescription
N00628701099
 Plan your trips to avoid unnecessary 1. Place the floor mat to fit the shape of the
drugs affect your alertness, perception and
stops. floorboard.
reaction time. Consult with your doctor or
 Keep your tires inflated to the recom- 2. Align the floor mat with the installation
pharmacist before driving while under the
mended pressures. holes over the retaining clips.
influence of any of these medications.
 For freeway driving, maintain a speed of 3. Secure the floor mat with retaining clips.
approximately 50 mph (80 km/h) when
traffic, roadway and weather conditions
WARNING
 NEVER DRINK AND DRIVE.
safely permit.
Your perceptions are less accurate, your
 Keep your air filter clean and your vehicle
reflexes are slower and your judgment is
lubricated according to the recommenda- impaired.
tions in this manual.
 Always keep your vehicle well main-
tained. A poorly maintained engine
wastes fuel and costs money. Floor mat
 Never overload your vehicle. N00628601069
The original equipment floor mat provided

with your vehicle was specifically designed
for your vehicle. Always properly position
the floor mat and assure it does not interfere
with operation of the pedals. Always use the
6-2 Driving safety

Vehicle preparation before driving
NOTE WARNING Seat belts and seats

 The shape of the mat and the number of • While the vehicle is stopped with the
retaining clips may vary depending on the engine off, check that the floor mat is not  Before starting the vehicle, make certain
vehicle model. interfering with the pedals by depressing that you and all passengers are seated and
the pedals fully. wearing their seat belts properly (with
children in the rear seat, in appropriate
WARNING restraints), and that all the doors are
 If a floor mat is the wrong size or is not locked.
properly installed, it can interfere with the  Move the driver’s seat as far backward as
operation of the pedals. Interference with possible, while keeping good visibility, 6
the pedals can cause unintended accelera- and good control of the steering wheel,
tion and/or increased stopping distances brakes, accelerator, and controls. Check
resulting in a crash and injury. Always the instrument panel indicators and multi-
make sure the floor mat does not interfere
information display for any possible prob-
with the accelerator or brake pedal.
lem.
 Always use the retaining clip on the
 Similarly, the front passenger seat should
driver’s floorboard to secure the floor
mat. also be moved as far back as possible.
 Always install the mat with the correct  Make sure that infants and small children
side facing down. Vehicle preparation before are properly restrained in accordance with
 Never install a second mat over or under all laws and regulations.
an existing floor mat.
driving
N00629001868
 Do not use a floor mat designed for
For a safer and more enjoyable trip, always
Defrosters
another model vehicle even if it is a
Mitsubishi Motors Genuine floor mat. check for the following:
 Before driving, be sure to check the fol- Check these by selecting the defroster mode,
lowing: and set the blower switch on high. You should
• Periodically check that the floor mat is be able to feel the air blowing against the
properly secured with the retaining clips. windshield.
If you remove the floor mat while clean- Refer to “Defrosting or defogging (wind-
ing the inside of your vehicle or for any shield, door windows)” on page 7-9.
other reason, always check the condition
of the floor mat after it has been rein-
stalled.
Driving safety 6-3

Safe driving techniques

to find out why immediately and have it
Tires fixed. Driving during cold weather
N00629400474
Check all the tires for heavy tread wear or  Check the battery. At the same time,
uneven wear patterns. Look for stones, nails, Safe driving techniques check the terminals and wiring. During
glass, or other objects stuck in the tread. Look N00629200137 extremely cold weather, the battery will
for any tread cuts or sidewall cracks. Check Even this vehicle’s safety equipment, and not be as strong. Also, the battery power
the wheel nuts for tightness, and the tires your safest driving, cannot guarantee that you level may drop because more power is
(including spare tire) for proper pressure. can avoid an accident or injury. However, if used for cold starting and driving.
Replace your tires before they are heavily Before driving the vehicle, check to see if
6 worn out.
you give extra attention to the following
areas, you can better protect yourself and the engine runs at the proper speed and if
As your vehicle is equipped with a tire pres- your passengers: the headlights are as bright as normally.
sure monitoring system, there is a risk of Charge or replace the battery if necessary.
damage to the tire inflation pressure sensors  Drive defensively. Be aware of traffic, During extreme cold weather, it is possi-
when the tire is replaced on the rim. Tire road and weather conditions. Leave plenty ble that a very low battery could freeze.
replacement should, only be performed by an of stopping distance between your vehicle
authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer. and the vehicle ahead. WARNING
 Before changing lanes, check your mir-  The battery gives off explosive hydrogen
rors, your blind spots, and use your turn- gas. Any spark or flame can cause the bat-
Lights signal light. tery to explode, which could cause serious
 While driving, watch the behavior of injury or death.
Have someone watch while you turn all the other drivers, bicyclists, and pedestrians. Always wear protective clothes and a face
exterior lights on and off. Also check the turn  Always obey applicable laws and regula- mask when working with your battery, or
signal indicators and high-beam indicators on let a skilled mechanic do it.
tions. Be a polite and alert driver. Always
the instrument panel. leave room for unexpected events, such as
sudden braking.  Warm the engine sufficiently. After start-
 If you plan to drive in another country, ing the engine, allow a short warm-up
Fluid leaks time to distribute oil to all cylinders. Then
obey their vehicle registration laws and
make sure you will be able to get the right drive your vehicle slowly.
Check the ground under the vehicle after fuel.  Stay at low speeds at first so that the man-
parking overnight, for fuel, water, oil, or ual transaxle oil or the automatic transaxle
other leaks. Make sure all the fluid levels are fluid has time to spread to all the lubrica-
correct. Also, if you can smell fuel, you need tion points.
6-4 Driving safety

Braking
 Manual transaxle can be harder to shift in cially when the brakes are wet, to confirm
cold weather conditions. This is normal they work normally. Parking
and shifting will get easier as the transaxle A film of water can be formed on the brake N00629601372
warms up. discs or brake drums, and prevent normal

 Check the engine antifreeze. braking after driving in heavy rain or through Parking on a hill
If there is not enough coolant because of a large puddles, or after the vehicle is washed.
leak or from engine overheating, add If this occurs, dry the brakes out by driving When parking on a hill, set the parking brake,
Mitsubishi Motors Genuine Super Long slowly while lightly depressing the brake and turn the front wheels toward the curb on a
Life Coolant Premium or equivalent. pedal. downhill, or away from the curb on an uphill.
Please read this section in conjunction If necessary, apply chocks to the wheels. 6
with the “Engine coolant” on page 9-7.
When driving in cold weather
WARNING For vehicles equipped with man-
 Never open the radiator cap when the On snowy roads, ice can form on the braking ual transaxle
radiator is hot. You could be seriously system, making the brakes less effective.
burned. While driving in such conditions, pay close Place the gearshift lever into the “R”
attention to surrounding vehicles and to the (Reverse) position when parking on a down-
condition of the road surface. From time to hill slope, into the 1st position when parking
time, lightly depress the brake pedal and
Braking check how effective the brakes are.
on an uphill slope.
N00629500521
All parts of the brake system are critical to For vehicles equipped with contin-
safety. Have the vehicle serviced by an autho- When driving downhill uously variable transmission
rized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair (CVT)
facility of your choice at regular intervals It is important to take advantage of the engine
according to the “WARRANTY AND braking by downshifting while driving on
Be sure that the parking brake is firmly set
MAINTENANCE MANUAL”. steep downhill roads in order to prevent the
when parked and that the selector lever is in
brakes from overheating.
the “P” (PARK) position.
When brakes are wet When parking on a hill, it is important to set
the parking brake before moving the selector
Check the brake system while driving at a lever to the “P” (PARK) position. This pre-
low speed immediately after starting, espe- vents loading the parking brake against the
Driving safety 6-5

Loading information
transaxle. When this happens, it is difficult to
WARNING factory-installed options, if any,
move the selector lever out of the “P” being towed. The tire and loading
 Do not park your vehicle in areas where
(PARK) position.
combustible materials such as dry grass or information placard located on the
leaves can come in contact with a hot driver’s door sill of your vehicle will
Parking with the engine run- exhaust, since a fire could occur.
show how much weight it may prop-
ning erly carry.
Never leave the engine running while you
Do not keep the steering wheel
fully turned for a long time WARNING
6 take a short nap or rest. Also, never leave the
 Never overload your vehicle.
engine running in a closed or poorly venti-
lated place. More effort could be required to turn the Overloading can damage your
steering wheel. vehicle, adversely affect vehi-
WARNING Refer to “Electric power steering system cle performance, including
 Leaving the engine running risks injury or (EPS)” on page 5-52. handling and braking, cause
death from accidentally moving the gear- tire failure, and result in an
shift lever (manual transaxle) or the selec- When leaving the vehicle accident.
tor lever (CVT) or from the accumulation
of toxic exhaust fumes in the passenger
compartment. Always carry the key and lock all doors when
It is important to familiarize yourself
leaving the vehicle unattended.
Always try to park your vehicle in a well lit with the following terms before load-
area. ing your vehicle:
Where you park
 Vehicle maximum load on the tire:
Your front bumper can be damaged if you Loading information load on an individual tire that is
scrape it over curbs or parking stop blocks. N00629901463
Be careful when traveling up or down steep

determined by distributing to each
It is very important to know how axle its share of the maximum
slopes where your bumper can scrape the
road.
much weight your vehicle can carry. loaded vehicle weight and divid-
This weight is called the vehicle ing by two.
capacity weight and includes the
weight of all occupants, cargo, non-
6-6 Driving safety
Loading information
 Vehicle normal load on the tire:  Accessory weight: the combined  Normal occupant weight: 150 lbs
load on an individual tire that is weight (in excess of those stan- (68 kg)* times the number of
determined by distributing to each dard items which may be specified occupants. (In your
axle its share of the curb weight, replaced) of automatic transmis- vehicle the number is 3)
accessory weight, and normal sion, power steering, power  Occupant distribution: Occupant
occupant weight and dividing by brakes, power windows, power distribution within the passenger
two. seats, radio, and heater, to the compartment (In your vehicle the
 Maximum loaded vehicle weight: extent that these items are avail- distribution is 2 in front, 1 in sec-
the sum of - able as factory- installed equip- ond row seat) 6
(a) Curb weight; ment (whether installed or not).
*: 150 lbs (68 kg) is the weight of
(b) Accessory weight;  Vehicle capacity weight: the rated
one person as defined by U.S.A.
(c) Vehicle capacity weight; and cargo and luggage load plus 150
regulations.
(d) Production options weight. lbs (68 kg)* times the vehicle’s
 Curb weight: the weight of a designated seating capacity.
motor vehicle with standard  Production options weight: the
equipment including the maxi- combined weight of those
mum capacity of fuel, oil, and installed regular production
coolant. options weighing over 5 lbs (2.3
kg) in excess of those standard
items which they replace, not pre-
viously considered in curb weight
or accessory weight, including
heavy duty brakes, ride levelers,
roof rack, heavy duty battery, and
special trim.
Driving safety 6-7

Loading information
Tire and loading information This placard shows the maximum

number of occupants permitted to
placard
N00630101436
ride in your vehicle as well as “the
The tire and loading information combined weight of occupants and
placard is located on the inside sill of cargo” (A), which is called the vehi-
the driver’s door. cle capacity weight. This placard also
tells you the size and recommended
inflation pressure for the original
6 equipment tires on your vehicle. For
more information, refer to “Tires” on
page 9-12.
6-8 Driving safety

Loading information
5. Determine the combined weight
Steps for Determining Correct
of luggage and cargo being loaded
Load Limit
N00630201280
on the vehicle. That weight may
1. Locate the statement “The com- not safely exceed the available
bined weight of occupants and cargo and luggage load capacity
cargo should never exceed XXX calculated in Step 4.
kg or XXX lbs.” on your vehicle’s 6. If your vehicle will be towing a
placard. trailer, load from your trailer will
2. Determine the combined weight be transferred to your vehicle. 6
of the driver and passengers that Consult this manual to determine
will be riding in your vehicle. how this reduces the available
3. Subtract the combined weight of cargo and luggage load capacity
the driver and passengers from of your vehicle.
XXX kg or XXX lbs.
NOTE
4. The resulting figure equals the
 The above steps for determining
available amount of cargo and
luggage load capacity. For exam- correct load limit were written in
ple, if the “XXX” amount equals accordance with U.S.A. regula-
1400 lbs. and there will be five tions.
150 lbs. passengers in your vehi- Your vehicle cannot tow a
cle, the amount of available cargo trailer, so step 6 is irrelevant.
and luggage load capacity is
650 lbs. (1400 - 750 (5 x 150) =
650 lbs.)
Driving safety 6-9

Loading information
NOTE
 The following table shows examples on how to calculate total cargo/load capacity of your vehicle with varying
seating configurations and number and size of occupants. This table is for illustration purposes only and may not
be accurate for the seating and load capacity of your vehicle.
 For the following example the combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed 865 lbs (392 kg).
6-10 Driving safety

Cargo loads
NOTE
 Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition, gross axle weight ratings (GAWR’s) for the front and rear axles
must not be exceeded. For further information on GAWR’s, vehicle loading, see the “Specifications” section of
this manual.
Cargo loads WARNING

N00629700435  Do not load cargo or luggage higher than
the top of the seatback. Be sure that your
cargo or luggage cannot move when your 6
Cargo load precautions vehicle is in motion.
N00630300082
Having either the rear view blocked, or
To determine the cargo load capacity for your your cargo being thrown inside the cabin
vehicle, subtract the weight of all vehicle if you suddenly have to brake can cause a
occupants from the vehicle capacity weight. serious accident or injury or death.
For additional information, if needed, refer to  Put cargo or luggage in the cargo area of
“Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit” your vehicle. Try to spread the weight
evenly.
on page 6-9.
DO NOT USE the Gross Vehicle Weight Rat-
WARNING
 To reduce the risk of serious injury or
ing and Gross Axle Weight Rating numbers
death, the combined weights of the driver,
Loading cargo on the roof
listed on the safety certification label (A) N00630401149
passengers and cargo and must never
located on the inside sill of the driver’s door exceed the vehicle capacity weight.
as the guide for passengers and/or cargo  Exceeding the vehicle capacity weight will
WARNING
weight. adversely affect vehicle performance,  Weight placed on the roof of the vehicle
including handling and braking, and may will raise the vehicle’s center of gravity
cause an accident. and adversely affect its handling charac-
teristics. As a result, driving errors or
emergency maneuvers could lead to a loss
of control and result in an accident. Drive
slowly and avoid excessive maneuvers
such as sudden braking or quick turning.
Driving safety 6-11

Trailer towing
WARNING CAUTION Trailer towing

 Make sure that the weight of luggage and  Before driving and after traveling a short dis- N00629801420
the roof carrier do not exceed the maxi- tance, always check the load to make sure it
mum roof load, 110 lb (50 kg). If the maxi- is securely fastened to the roof carrier.
mum roof load is exceeded, this could Stop the vehicle periodically and check that
cause damage to the vehicle or result in an the load remains secure. If the load is not
accident. secure, it could fall from the vehicle and
 The total weight of all occupants and lug- damage your vehicle, another vehicle or cre-
gage, including your roof load, must not ate a road hazard.
6 exceed the vehicle capacity weight. For
more information, refer to “Tire and load-
ing information placard” on page 11-3. NOTE
 Roof load is determined by adding the  To prevent wind noise or reduction in gas
weight of the roof carrier and the weight mileage, remove the roof carrier when not in
of the luggage placed on the roof carrier. use.
 Before using an automatic car wash, check WARNING
with the attendant to determine if the roof  Do not use this vehicle for
CAUTION carrier should be removed. trailer towing. It may not be
 Do not load luggage directly onto the roof.  Be sure that adequate clearance is main-
Use a roof carrier that properly fits your tained for raising the trunk lid during loading
possible to maintain control or
vehicle. luggage on the roof carrier. adequate braking.
For installation, refer to the instruction man-
ual provided with the roof carrier.
 Place the luggage on the carrier so that its
weight is distributed evenly with the heaviest
items on the bottom. Do not load items that
are wider than the roof carrier.
6-12 Driving safety

Comfort controls
Vents ................................................................................................7-2
Automatic air conditioning ..............................................................7-4
Important air conditioning operating tips ......................................7-10
Air purifier .....................................................................................7-11
Antenna ..........................................................................................7-11
General information about your radio ...........................................7-12 7
Vents
Vents
N00729901347
*
1- Open
7 * 2- Close
Side vents
*: Optional equipment
1- Center vents
When the dimple (A) is pressed, the vents NOTE
2- Side vents  On rare occasions, air from the vents of an
open.
To close the vents, press the dimple on the air-conditioned vehicle may be foggy. This is
only moist air cooling suddenly and does not
opposite side.
Air flow and direction adjust- Change the direction of the air flow by turn-
indicate a problem.
ments  Do not let drinks or other liquids get into the
ing the vent itself. vents as they could prevent the air condition-
N00730200330
ing from operating normally.
Center vents
Move the knob (A) to make adjustments.
7-2 Comfort controls

Vents
Changing the mode selection Foot/Face position Foot/Defroster position

N00736401807
Air flows to the upper part of the passenger Air flows to the leg area, the windshield and
To change air flow direction, press the compartment, and flows to the leg area. the door windows.
MODE switch or defogger switch. (Refer to
“MODE switch” on page 7-6, “Defogger
switch” on page 7-6.)
These symbols are used in the next several
illustrations to demonstrate the quantity of air
coming from the vents.
: Small amount of air from the vents
: Medium amount of air from the vents 7
: Large amount of air from the vents
Face position
Air flows only to the upper part of the passen-
ger compartment. Foot position Defroster position
Air flows mainly to the leg area. Air flows mainly to the windshield and the
door windows.
Comfort controls 7-3

Automatic air conditioning

N00731501500
The air conditioning can only be used while the engine is running.
CAUTION
 The engine speed may increase when the air conditioning is operating.
With an increased engine speed, a CVT vehicle will creep to a greater degree than with a lower engine speed. Fully depress the brake pedal to prevent the
vehicle from creeping.
7 Control panel
N00711801624
Type 1
Type 2
1- Temperature control switch 4- Air selection switch 8- Electric rear window defogger switch
2- Air conditioning switch 5- Blower speed selection switch  P.5-104
3- MODE switch 6- Defogger switch 9- OFF switch
7- AUTO switch 10- Temperature display

11- Mode selection display
12- Air selection indicator
NOTE
• The fan does not operate even after stop-
13- Air conditioning indicator
ping and restarting the engine or the fan
14- AUTO indicator stops frequently.
15- Blower speed display
Temperature control switch

NOTE N00737001406
 There is an interior air temperature sensor
(A) in the illustrated position. Press or of the temperature control
Never place anything over the sensor, since switch to the desired temperature.
doing so will prevent it from functioning The selected temperature will be shown in the
1- Increase
properly.
2- Decrease
display (A). 7
NOTE
 Due to a drop in the battery voltage or some
other problem, the blower speed may tempo-
rarily become less than the selected blower
speed display setting or the fan may stop.
If the fan stops, turn the ignition switch to
 A sound will be made every time you push the “OFF” position or put the operation
any of the switches. mode in OFF, wait a few minutes, and then
turn the ignition switch back to the “ON”
position or put the operation mode back in
ON.
Blower speed selection switch In the following cases, have the system NOTE
N00736901307
inspected by your authorized Mitsubishi  The temperature value of air conditioning is
Press of the blower speed selection Motors dealer or a repair facility of your switched in conjunction with outside temper-
switch to increase the blower speed. choice. ature display unit of the multi information
• The blower speed remains lower than the display.
Press of the blower speed selection Refer to “Changing the temperature unit” on
blower speed set using the blower speed
switch to decrease the blower speed. page 5-86.
display or the blower speed decreases fre-
The selected blower speed will be shown in quently.
the display (A).

page7-8. shown in the display (B). Refer to “Changing
NOTE Refer to “Personalizing the air selection the mode selection” on page 7-3.
 While the engine coolant temperature is low,
(Changing the function setting)” on page7-7.
the temperature of the air from the heater
will be cool/cold until the engine warms up,
even if you have selected warm air with the MODE switch
switch. N00737101247
To prevent the windshield and windows from
To change air flow direction, press the
fogging up, the vent mode will be changed to
MODE switch. Each time the MODE switch
“ ” and the blower speed will be reduced.
is pressed, the mode changes to the next one
 When the temperature is set to the highest or
the lowest setting under the AUTO opera- in the following sequence: “ ”  “ ” 
7 tion, the air selection and the air conditioning “ ”  “ ”  “ ”. The selected mode
will be automatically changed as follows. is shown in the display (A). Refer to “Chang-
• Quick Heating (When the temperature is set ing the mode selection” on page 7-3.
to the highest setting)
Outside air will be introduced and the air NOTE
conditioning will stop.  When the defogger switch is pressed, the air
If the air selection and the air conditioning conditioning system automatically operates
are operated manually after an automatic and outside air (as opposed to recirculated
changeover, manual operation will be air) is selected.
selected. Refer to “Defrosting or defogging (wind-
• Quick Cooling (When the temperature is set shield, door windows)” on page 7-9.
to the lowest setting)
Inside air will be recirculated and the air
conditioning will operate. Air selection switch
N00737200368
The above indicates the factory settings. You
can personalize the air selection switch and Normally, use the outside air position to keep
air conditioning switch to match your per- the windshield and side windows clear and to
Defogger switch quickly remove fog or frost from the wind-
sonal preferences. N00703400015
Contact your Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a shield.
repair facility of your choice for assistance. When this switch is pressed, the mode
changes to the “ ” mode. The indicator To change the air selection, simply press the
Refer to “Personalizing the air conditioning
light (A) will come on. The selected mode is air selection switch.
switch (Changing the function setting)” on


The selected position will be shown in the When the setting has changed, the system
display (A).
CAUTION
will beep and the “ ” indicator will
 Using recirculated air for a long time may
cause the windows to fog up. flash.
 Outside air: “ ” indicator is ON • When the setting has changed from
Outside air is introduced into the passen- enabled to disabled,
ger compartment. the system will beep three times and the
NOTE
 Recirculated air: “ ” indicator is ON indicator will flash three times.
 If you press the AUTO switch to select auto-
Air is recirculated inside the passenger matic control after manual operation, the air • When the setting has changed from dis-
compartment. selection switch will also be automatically abled to enabled,
controlled. the system will beep two times and the
indicator will flash three times.
7
Personalizing the air selection NOTE
(Changing the function setting)  The factory setting is “Enable automatic air
N00760000089 control”.
You can change the following functions to  When the defogger switch is pressed, the air
match your preference. selection will automatically change to the
outside air position, even if the system is set
 Enable automatic air control: to “Disable automatic air control”, in order
When the AUTO switch is pressed, the air to prevent windows from fogging up.
selection switch will also be automatically
When the air conditioning turns on, the air controlled.
selection is controlled automatically. When
the air conditioning turns off, the air selection  Disable automatic air control:
automatically goes back to the outside air Even when the AUTO switch is pressed,
position. the air selection switch will not be auto-
If high cooling performance is desired, or if matically controlled.
the outside air is dusty or contaminated in
some way, use the recirculation position.  Changing the settings
Switch to the outside air position every now Press the air selection switch for about 10
and then to keep the windows from fogging seconds or longer.
up.


When the AUTO switch is pressed, or
Air conditioning switch NOTE
when the temperature control switch has
N00737301409  When the defogger switch is pressed, the air
Push the switch, and the air conditioning been set to the minimum temperature, the
conditioning will run automatically, even if
air conditioning switch is automatically
compressor will turn on. The “ ” indicator the system is set to “Disable automatic air
controlled. conditioning control”, in order to prevent
will be shown in the display (A).
windows from fogging up.
 Disable automatic air conditioning con-
trol:
The air conditioning switch is not auto- AUTO switch
matically controlled, unless the air condi- N00703500016
tioning switch is used. When the AUTO switch is pressed, the mode
7  Changing the settings
selection, blower speed adjustment, recircu-
lated/outside air selection, temperature
Press the air conditioning switch for about adjustment, and air conditioner ON/OFF sta-
10 seconds or longer. tus are all controlled automatically.
When the setting has changed, the system The “AUTO” indicator will be shown in the
will beep and the “ ” indicator will display (A).
Push the switch again and the air condition- flash.
ing compressor will stop and the indicator • When the setting has changed from
goes off. enabled to disabled,
the system will beep three times and the
indicator will flash three times.
Personalizing the air conditioning • When the setting has changed from dis-
switch (Changing the function set- abled to enabled,
ting) the system will beep two times and the
N00759800090 indicator will flash three times.
You can change the following functions to
match your preference. NOTE
 The factory setting is “Enable automatic air
 Enable automatic air conditioning control: conditioning control”.


In normal conditions, use the system in the
OFF switch Defrosting or defogging (wind-
AUTO mode and follow these procedures:
N00703600017 shield, door windows)
Push the switch to turn off the air condition- 1. Push the AUTO switch. N00732401522
ing system. 2. Set the temperature control switch to the

desired temperature. The temperature can CAUTION
be set within a range of around 61 to 89  For safety, make sure you have a clear view
through all the windows.
(Type 1) or 17 to 31 (Type 2).
The vents, recirculation/outside air, blower To remove frost or mist from the windshield
speed, temperature adjustment and ON/OFF and door windows, use the MODE switch or
of air conditioning will be controlled auto-
matically.
defogger switch (“ ” or “ ”). 7
For ordinary defrosting
Use this setting to keep the windshield and
NOTE door windows clear of mist, and to keep the
 Set the temperature at about 75 (Type 1) or
leg area heated (when driving in rain or
24 (Type 2) under normal conditions.
snow).
Operating the air conditioning

system (automatic mode) Operating the air conditioning
N00731701544 system (manual mode)
N00731801167
Blower speed and vent mode may be con-

trolled manually by setting the blower speed
selection switch and the MODE switch to the
desired positions. To return to automatic
operation, press the AUTO switch.
1. Set the MODE switch to the “ ” posi-

tion.

Important air conditioning operating tips

2. Set the air selection switch to the outside 3. When running the air conditioning, make
air position.
NOTE sure the air intake, which is located in
3. Select your desired blower speed by  If the mode selection is set “ ” position, front of the windshield, is free of obstruc-
you cannot turn the air conditioning off or
pressing the blower speed selection tions such as leaves. Leaves collected in
select the recirculation position. This pre-
switch. the air-intake chamber may reduce air
vents the windows from fogging up.
4. Select your desired temperature by press- flow and plug the water drains.
 To defog quickly, direct the air flow from the
ing the temperature control switch. side vents toward the door windows.
5. Push the air conditioning switch.  When defrosting, do not set the temperature Air conditioning system refrig-
to the maximum cool position. This will
For quick defrosting blow cool air on the window glass and fog it
erant and lubricant recommen-
up. dations
7
Important air conditioning If the air conditioning seems less effective
than usual, the cause might be a refrigerant
operating tips leak.
N00733701434
Have the system inspected by your authorized
1. Park the vehicle in the shade whenever Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility
possible. Parking in the hot sun makes the of your choice.
vehicle interior extremely hot which then
requires more time to cool. If it is neces-
sary to park in the sun, open the windows
1. Push the defogger switch to change to the for the first few minutes of air condition-
“ ” position. ing to expel the hot air.
2. Set your blower to the maximum speed. 2. Afterwards, keep the windows closed
3. Set the temperature to the highest posi- when the air conditioning is in use. The
tion. entry of outside air through open windows
will reduce cooling efficiency.
NOTE
 While the mode selection is set “ ” posi-
tion, the air conditioning compressor will run
automatically. The outside air position will
also be selected automatically.

Air purifier
The air filter’s ability to collect pollen and
CAUTION dirt is reduced as it becomes dirty, so replace Antenna
 The air conditioning system in your vehicle
it periodically. For the maintenance interval, N00734201553
must be charged with the refrigerant HFO-
refer to the “WARRANTY AND MAINTE-
1234yf and the lubricant YR20.
Use of any other refrigerant or lubricant will NANCE MANUAL”. To remove
cause severe damage and may require replac-
Turn the pole (A) counterclockwise.
ing your vehicle’s entire air conditioning NOTE
system.  Operation in certain conditions such as driv-
The release of refrigerant into the atmo- ing on a dusty road and frequent use of the
sphere is not recommended. air conditioning can lead to reduction of ser-
The new refrigerant HFO-1234yf in your vice life of the filter. When you feel that the
vehicle is designed not to harm the earth’s
ozone layer. Additionally, it has a signifi-
air flow is lower than normal or when the 7
windshield or windows start to fog up easily,
cantly reduced global warming impact on the replace the air filter.
environment, compared to the refrigerant Contact your Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a
HFC-134a. repair facility of your choice for assistance.
During a long period of disuse
The air conditioning should be operated for at To install

least five minutes each week, even in cold
weather. This includes the quick defrosting Screw the pole (A) clockwise into the base
mode. Operating the air condition system (B) until it is securely retained.
weekly maintains lubrication of the compres-
sor internal parts to keep the air conditioning
in the best operating condition.
NOTE
 Be sure to remove the roof antenna in the
following cases:
Air purifier • When using an automatic car wash
N00733801246 • When covering your vehicle with a car
cover
The air conditioning system is equipped with
an air filter to remove pollen and dust.

General information about your radio
NOTE Signal transmission Reflection

• When driving into a structure that has a low
ceiling FM signals do not follow the earth surface The reason why one can hear FM but not AM
nor are they reflected by the upper atmo- in parking garages, under bridges etc., is that
sphere. For this reason, FM broadcasts cannot FM signals, unlike AM signals, are reflected
General information about be received over long distances. AM signals by solid objects such as buildings, etc.
your radio follow the earth’s surface and are reflected by Because FM signals are easily reflected by
N00733901582 the upper atmosphere. For this reason, AM buildings, this can also cause reception dis-
Your vehicle’s radio receives both AM and broadcasts can be received over longer disturbances.
FM stations. tances. The direct signal from the broadcast station
reaches the antenna slightly before the
7 The quality of your reception is affected by
reflected signal. This time difference may
distance, obstacles, and signal interference. FM AM
cause some reception disturbance or flutter.
This radio complies with Part 15 of Federal This problem occurs primarily in urban areas.
Communications Commission (FCC) Rules.
Operation is subject to the following condi-
tions:
 The device may not cause harmful inter-

25 to 40 mile radius 100 mile radius
ference. (40 to 64 km) (160 km)
 This device must accept any interference
recieved, including interference that may
cause undesirable operation.
Weak reception (fading)
CAUTION
 Changes or modifications not expressly Because of the limited range of FM signals
approved by the party meeting the above and the way FM waves transmit, you may
conditions could void the user’s authority to experience weak or fading FM reception.
operate the equipment. When the broadcast is blocked by mountains
or similar obstructions, reception can be dis-
turbed.

General information about your radio
Cross modulation Causes of disturbances

If one listens to a weak station and is in the FM reception is affected by the electrical sys-
vicinity of another strong station, both sta- tems of vehicles in the vicinity, especially
tions might be received simultaneously. those without an electronic noise suppression
device. The disturbance is even greater if the
station is weak or poorly tuned.
FM reception is not as sensitive to electrical
disturbances as AM. AM reception is sensi-
tive to electrical disturbances such as power
lines, lightning and other types of similar
electrical phenomena. 7
FM stereo reception
Stereo reception requires a high quality

broadcast signal. This means that types of
disturbances mentioned previously become
more marked and the reception range is
somewhat diminished during stereo recep-
tion.

For emergencies
If the vehicle breaks down ...............................................................8-2

If the operation mode cannot be changed to OFF
(vehicles equipped with the F.A.S.T.-key) ...................................8-2
Jump-starting the engine ..................................................................8-2
Engine overheating ..........................................................................8-4
Jack and tools ...................................................................................8-5
How to change a tire ........................................................................8-6
Towing ...........................................................................................8-12 8
Operation under adverse driving conditions ..................................8-13
Fuel Pump Shut-off System ...........................................................8-15
If the vehicle breaks down
If the vehicle breaks down If the operation mode can- WARNING

N00836300233
not be changed to OFF  To reduce the risk of igniting flammable
gas that may be emitted from the battery,
If your vehicle breaks down on the road,
move to the shoulder and turn on the hazard
(vehicles equipped with the carefully read this section before jump-
warning flashers. If there is no shoulder, or F.A.S.T.-key) starting the vehicle.

 Do not try to start your vehicle by pushing
the shoulder is not safe, drive in the right lane N00860700117
or towing. This can cause an accident
slowly with the hazard lights flashing until If the operation mode cannot be changed to resulting in serious injury or death and
you come to a safe stopping place. Keep the OFF, perform the following procedure. can damage the vehicle.
flashers flashing.
1. Move the selector lever to the “P”
If the engine stops/fails
(PARK) position, and then change the NOTE
operation mode to OFF. (For vehicles  Do not use jumper cables if they have dam-
8 with continuously variable transmission age or corrosion.
If the engine stops, there will be no power (CVT))
assist to the steering and brakes, making these 2. One of the other causes could be low bat-
difficult to use. 1. Take off any metal jewelry such as watch
tery voltage. If this occurs, the keyless
bands or bracelets that might create an
entry system and the F.A.S.T.-key opera-
 The brake booster will not work, so the accidental electrical contact.
tion will also not operate. Contact an
brakes will not grip well. The brake pedal 2. Position the vehicles close enough
will be harder to press than usual. together so that the jumper cables can
 Since there is no power steering assist, the reach, but be sure the vehicles aren’t
steering wheel will be hard to turn. Jump-starting the engine touching each other.
N00836401837
CAUTION
When the engine fails at the If the engine cannot be started because the
 Check the other vehicle. It must have a 12-
battery is weak or dead, you can start it with
intersection the battery from another vehicle using jumper volt battery. If the other system isn’t 12-volt,
both systems can be damaged.
cables.
Get help from your passengers, bystanders,
etc. to push the vehicle and move it to a safe
area.
8-2 For emergencies

Jump-starting the engine

3. You could be injured if the vehicles move. 7. Connect one end of the other jumper cable
Set the parking brake firmly on each vehi- to the negative (-) terminal of the
cle. Put an automatic transaxle or CVT in booster battery (B), and then connect the
“P” (PARK) or a manual transaxle in “N” other end to the designated ground
(Neutral). location of the vehicle with the discharged
4. Turn the ignition switch to the “OFF” battery (A) at the point farthest from the
position or put the operation mode in battery.
OFF.
WARNING
NOTE  Be sure to follow the proper order when
 Turn off all lights, heater, and other electrical connecting the batteries, of:
loads. This will avoid sparks and help save
WARNING   
both batteries.
 Make sure that the jumper cables and  Make sure that the connection is made 8
your clothing are clear of the cooling fans to the correct designated location (as
5. Make sure your battery electrolyte is at shown in the illustration) properly. If the
and drive belts. Entanglement with the
the proper level. (Refer to “Battery” on connection is directly made to the negative
fans or belts can cause serious personal
page 9-11.) injury. (-) terminal of the battery, the flammable
gases from inside the battery might catch
WARNING fire and explode, causing personal injury.
 If the electrolyte fluid is not visible, or NOTE  When connecting the jumper cable, do not
looks frozen, DO NOT ATTEMPT JUMP connect the positive (+) cable to the nega-
 Open the terminal cover before connecting
STARTING!! tive (-) terminal. Sparks can make the bat-
the jumper cable to the positive terminal of
The battery might split open or explode if tery explode.
the battery.
the temperature is below the freezing
(Refer to “Battery: Disconnection and con-
point or if it is not filled to the proper 8. Start the engine in the vehicle providing
nection” on page 9-11.)
level.
 Use the proper cables suitable for the battery the boost. Let the engine idle a few min-
size. utes, then start the engine in the vehicle
6. Connect one end of one jumper cable Otherwise heat damage to the cables could with the discharged battery.
to the positive (+) terminal of the dis- result. 9. After the engine is started, disconnect the
charged battery (A), and then connect the cables in the reverse order from the way
other end to the positive (+) terminal you connected them.
of the booster battery (B).
For emergencies 8-3

Engine overheating
Charging the battery by using As your vehicle has anti-lock WARNING

an external battery charger brakes  To avoid personal injury, keep hands, hair,
jewelry and clothes away from the cooling
fan. The cooling fan can start at any time.
If you drive your vehicle with a low battery
WARNING charge after the engine has been started by
 Always remove the battery from your
using jumper cables, the engine may misfire. 4. If you see steam or spray coming from
vehicle when the battery is charged by an
This can cause the anti-lock braking system under the hood, turn off the engine.
external battery charger. 5. If you do not see steam or spray coming
warning light to blink on and off. This is only
 Keep sparks, cigarettes, and flames away from under the hood, leave the engine on
from the battery because the battery could due to the low battery voltage. It is not a
problem with the brake system. If this hap- until the high coolant temperature warn-
explode. ing light goes off. After the high coolant
 Keep your work area well vented when pens, fully charge the battery and ensure the
charging system is operating properly. temperature warning light has gone off,
8 charging or using the battery in an
enclosed space.
you can start driving again. If the high
coolant temperature warning light stays
 Remove all the caps before charging the
battery.
Engine overheating on, turn off the engine.
N00836501418
 Electrolyte (battery acid) is made of corro-
sive diluted sulfuric acid. If electrolyte If the high coolant temperature warning light WARNING
comes in contact with your hands, eyes, illuminates while the engine is running, the  Before raising the engine hood, check to
clothes, or the painted surface of your engine may be overheating. If this happens: see if there is steam or spray coming from
vehicle, thoroughly flush with water. If under the hood. Steam or spray coming
electrolyte gets in your eyes, flush them 1. Stop the vehicle in a safe place. Turn on from an overheated engine could seriously
immediately and thoroughly with water, the hazard warning flashers. scald you.
and get prompt medical attention. Do not open the hood until there is no
2. With the engine still running, carefully
 Always wear protective clothing and gog- steam or spray.
raise the engine hood to vent the engine
gles when working near the battery.
compartment.
 Keep the battery out of the reach of chil- 6. When you do not see any more steam or
3. Check that the cooling fan is running. If
dren. spray, open the hood. Look for obvious
the fan is not turning, stop the engine
immediately and contact an authorized leaks, such as a split radiator hose. Be
Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facil- careful as components will be hot. Any
ity of your choice for assistance. leak source must be repaired.
8-4 For emergencies

Jack and tools

7. If there is no obvious leak source, check 11. Have the system inspected by your autho-
the coolant level in the engine coolant res- rized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair
Tools
ervoir. If there is none, or if it is too low, facility of your choice.
slowly add coolant.
8. If the engine coolant reservoir needs cool-
ant, you will probably also need to add
Jack and tools
N00836601464
coolant to the radiator. Do not loosen or
remove the radiator cap until the engine
has cooled down. Storage
WARNING The tools are stored beneath the floor board
 Removing the radiator cap could scald
of the cargo area. The jack is stored under the
you with escaping hot water or steam. driver’s seat.
When checking the radiator level, cover 1- Tools bag 8
the cap with a cloth before trying to 2- Wheel nut wrench
remove it. Turn it slowly counterclock- 3- Jack bar
wise, without pressing down, to the first 4- Towing hook
notch. The pressure in the system will then
be let out. When the pressure is COM-
PLETELY LET OUT, press down and
keep turning the cap counterclockwise Jack
until it comes off.
Move the driver’s seat fully forward to access
9. Start the engine, and slowly add coolant, the jack from the rear seat area.
up to the bottom of the filler neck. Use (Refer to “Front seats” on page 4-3.)
plain water if you have to (and replace it
with the right coolant as soon as possible). CAUTION
10. Replace the radiator cap and tighten it  Never access, remove or store the jack from
fully. Check the coolant temperature 1- Tools the front of the driver’s seat. Doing so could
warning light. You can start driving again 2- Jack damage electrical wires under the driver’s
when the high coolant temperature warn- seat.
ing light does not come on.
For emergencies 8-5

How to change a tire

On vehicles equipped with continuously
To remove WARNING variable transmission (CVT), move the
 After storing the jack in place, make sure
selector lever to the “P” (PARK) position,
Turn the shaft end of the jack in the direction the jack is securely fixed in the holder.
and stop the engine.
(1) until the jack fully retracts and remove the If the jack is not fixed securely, it may
move and hit an occupant in an accident 4. Turn on the hazard flashers and set up a
jack from the holder (A). warning triangle, flashing signal light,
resulting in serious injury or death. Also
the jack may move forward during driv- etc., at an adequate distance from the
To store ing and could interfere with driver’s pedal vehicle, and have all your passengers exit
operation causing an accident. the vehicle.
Put the jack in the holder (A) and turn the 5. To prevent the vehicle from rolling when
shaft end of the jack in the direction (2) by it is raised on the jack, place chocks or
hand until the jack is firmly secured.
How to change a tire blocks (A) at the tire that is diagonally
opposite from the tire (B) you are chang-
8 N00836901887
ing.
WARNING
 The jack should not be used for any pur-
pose other than to change a tire.
 Never get under the vehicle or put any
portion of your body under the vehicle
while it is supported by the jack.
Before changing a tire, first stop your vehicle

in a safe, flat location.
1. Park the vehicle on level and stable

ground.
2. Set the parking brake firmly. WARNING
3. On vehicles equipped with manual trans-  Be sure to apply chocks or blocks to the
axle, stop the engine and move the gear- correct tire when jacking up the vehicle. If
shift lever to the “R” (Reverse) position. the vehicle moves while jacked up, the
jack could slip out of position, leading to
an accident.
8-6 For emergencies

NOTE CAUTION CAUTION

 The chocks shown in the illustration do not  While the compact spare tire is stowed, the  Because the compact spare tire is designed
come with your vehicle. It is recommended inflation pressure should be checked at least only for your vehicle, do not use it on any
that you purchase chocks or blocks and keep once a month to assure that it remains at the other vehicle.
them in the vehicle for use if needed. recommended inflation pressure. See the tire  Do not put the compact spare tire on a differ-
 If chocks or blocks are not available, use and loading information placard attached to ent wheel, and do not put standard tires,
stones or any other objects that are large the driver’s door sill. Refer to “Tire and load- snow tires, wheel covers or trim rings on the
enough to hold the wheel in position. ing information placard” on page 11-3. compact spare wheel. Otherwise, you could
 Driving with an improperly inflated tire can damage these parts or other parts on your
cause an accident. If you have no choice but vehicle.
6. Get the jack, bar and wheel nut wrench to drive with an under-inflated tire, keep  Do not use tire chains with your compact
ready. your speed down and avoid sudden steering spare tire. Using a chain could cause damage
(Refer to “Jack and tools” on page 8-5.) or braking, if possible. Inflate the tire to the to your vehicle and loss of the chains.
correct pressure as soon as possible. Refer to 8
“Tire inflation pressures” on page 9-16.
Spare tire information  The compact spare tire should be used only To remove compact spare tire
N00849600344
temporarily. While the compact spare tire is N00849701371
being used, the tire pressure monitoring sys- 1. Lift up the floor board of the cargo area.
Compact spare tire tem will not function properly. Have the tire 2. To remove the compact spare tire, remove
replaced or repaired at an authorized the installation clamp (A) by turning it
Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility counterclockwise.
The compact spare tire is stowed beneath the
of your choice as soon as possible.
floor board of the cargo area. It is designed to
 Do not go over 50 mph (80 km/h) when driv-
save space in the cargo area. Its lighter weight ing with the compact spare tire.
makes it easier to use if a flat tire occurs.  Avoid sudden starting and braking when
driving with the compact spare tire.
WARNING  Do not drive through automatic car washes
 Tires, including spare tire, degrade over and over obstacles that could possibly dam-
time with age even when they are not age the underside of your vehicle. Because
being used. It is recommended that tires the compact spare tire is smaller than the
over 6 years generally be replaced even if original tire, there is less clearance between
damage is not obvious. the ground and your vehicle.
For emergencies 8-7


2. Place the jack under one of the jacking
NOTE points (A) shown in the illustration. Use
NOTE
 The flat tire with a normal size wheel cannot  Put the spare wheel under the vehicle body
the jacking point closest to the tire you
be stored beneath the floor board. Store the near the jack. This makes it safer if the jack
wish to change.
flat tire in the cargo area. slips out of position.
To change a tire
N00849801590
1. On vehicles with wheel covers, first

remove the covers (refer to “Wheel cov-
ers” on page 8-11). Then, loosen the
wheel nuts with the wheel nut wrench. Do
8 not remove the wheel nuts yet.
WARNING
 Set the jack only at the positions shown 3. Rotate the jack by hand until the flange
here. If the jack is set at a wrong position, portion (B) fits in the groove (C) at the top
it could dent your vehicle or the jack of the jack.
might fall over and cause personal injury.
 Do not use the jack on a tilted or soft sur-
face.
Otherwise, the jack might slip and cause
personal injury. Always use the jack on a
flat, hard surface. Before setting the jack,
make sure there are no sand or pebbles
under the jack base.
8-8 For emergencies


4. Insert the bar (D) into the wheel nut
wrench (E). Then put the end of the bar
WARNING WARNING
 No one should be in your vehicle when  Mount the spare wheel with the valve stem
into the shaft’s jack end, as shown in the
using the jack. (I) facing outward. If you cannot see the
illustration.
 Do not start or run the engine while your valve stem (I), you have installed the
Slowly rotate the wheel nut wrench until wheel backwards.
vehicle is on the jack.
the tire is raised slightly off the ground Operating the vehicle with the spare wheel
 Do not turn the raised wheel. The tires
surface. that are still on the ground could turn and installed backwards can cause vehicle
make your vehicle fall off the jack. damage and result in an accident.
5. Remove the wheel nuts with the wheel nut

wrench, then take the wheel off.
CAUTION
 Handle the wheel carefully when changing 8
the tire, to avoid scratching the wheel sur-
face.
6. Clean out any mud, etc. on the hub sur-

face (F), hub bolts (G) or in the installa-
WARNING tion holes (H) in the wheel, and then
 Stop jacking up the vehicle as soon as the mount the spare tire.
tire is raised off the ground. It is danger-
ous to raise the vehicle any higher.
 Do not get under your vehicle while using
the jack.
 Do not bump the raised vehicle or leave it
sitting on the jack for a long time. Both
are very dangerous.
 Do not use a jack except the one that came
with your vehicle.
 The jack should not be used for any pur-
pose other than to change a tire.
For emergencies 8-9


7. Install the wheel nuts with their tapered 9. Tighten the nuts in the order shown in the 11. Check the tire inflation pressure. The rec-
ends facing inward, then tighten by hand illustration until each nut has been tight- ommended tire pressure for your vehicle
until the wheel is no longer loose. ened to the torque listed here. is listed on the tire and loading informa-
65 to 80 ft-lb (88 to 108 N•m) tion placard attached to the driver’s door
sill as shown in the illustration. Refer to
Steel wheel
Aluminum wheel
8
CAUTION
 Never apply oil to either the wheel bolts or CAUTION
the nuts or they will tighten too much.  Never use your foot or a pipe extension to
apply added force to the wheel nut wrench CAUTION
8. Lower the vehicle slowly until the tire when tightening the wheel nuts. If you do so,  Driving with an improperly inflated tire can
you can over-tighten the wheel nuts and cause an accident. If you have no choice but
touches the ground, by rotating the wheel
damage the wheel, wheel nuts and hub bolts. to drive with an under-inflated tire, keep
nut wrench counterclockwise.
your speed down and avoid sudden steering
10. Lower the jack all the way and remove it. or braking, if possible. Inflate the tire to the
correct pressure as soon as possible. Refer to
 After changing the tire and driving the vehi-
cle about 620 miles (1,000 km), retighten the
wheel nuts to make sure that they have not
come loose.
8-10 For emergencies

CAUTION Wheel covers (if so equipped) CAUTION

 If the steering wheel vibrates when driving N00849401251  Trying to remove the wheel cover with only
after changing the tire, have the tire checked your bare hands can seriously injure your
for balance at an authorized Mitsubishi To remove fingers.
choice. Wrap the tip of the bar with a cloth, insert it
 Do not mix one type of tire with another or into the notch provided in the wheel cover, To install
use a different size from the one listed. This and pry the cover away from the wheel.
would cause early wear and poor handling.
Using the same procedure at the other wheel
cover notches, work the wheel cover away CAUTION
To store the flat tire or spare from the wheel to remove it completely.  Before installing the wheel cover to the
wheel, make sure that the tabs (A) on the
tire, jack, bar and wheel nut back of the wheel cover correctly engage the
wrench ring (B) to prevent the wheel cover from 8
N00850001198 coming off. Do not install a wheel cover that
has broken tabs.
Store the flat tire in the cargo area.
Reverse the removing procedure when stor-
ing the spare tire, jack, bar and wheel nut
wrench.
Refer to “To remove compact spare tire” on
page 8-7 and “Jack and tools” on page 8-5.
NOTE
 The wheel cover is made of plastic. Be care-
ful when prying it off.
For emergencies 8-11

Towing
1. Align the tire air valve (C) and the wheel 4. Gently tap around the circumference of
cover notch (D). the wheel cover at the top (H), then push
CAUTION
 Do not attempt to be towed by another vehi-
the wheel cover into place.
cle with a rope.
NOTE
 Do not use the tie-down hooks for towing.
These hooks are provided only for the pur-
pose of transporting the vehicle itself.
 Your vehicle cannot tow any other vehicle.
There may be local regulations concerning

8 towing in your area.
NOTE Obey the regulations of the area where you
 Full wheel covers have a symbol mark (E) are driving your vehicle.
provided on the reverse side to show the air
Towing
N00837001960
valve location.
Before installing the wheel cover to the
wheel, make sure that the opening with the If your vehicle needs to be
symbol mark is correctly aligned with the air
valve.
towed
If towing is necessary, we recommend you to

2. Push the bottom (F) of the wheel cover have it done by a commercial tow truck ser-
into the wheel. vice.
3. Gently push in both sides (G) of the wheel When towing is required, transport the vehi-
cover and hold them in place with both cle using a tow truck.
knees. Incorrect towing equipment could damage
your vehicle.

Operation under adverse driving conditions
CAUTION Towing with rear wheels off the

 Do not tow continuously variable transmis- ground (Type B - M/T vehicles
sion (CVT) vehicles with the driving wheels only)
on the ground (Type B) as illustrated. If the
vehicle is towed like this, the continuously
Towing with rear wheels off the ground. variable transmission (CVT) fluid may not Set the gearshift lever to the “N” (Neutral)
Do not tow CVT vehicles with this style. reach all parts of the transmission, thus dam- position.
aging it. Secure the steering wheel in a straight-ahead
If you tow CVT vehicles, use Type C, D or E position with a rope or tie-down strap.
equipment.
 If the manual transaxle is malfunctioning or
Towing with front wheels off the ground.
damaged, transport the vehicle with the driv-
Towing with front wheels off the
ing wheels on a carriage (Type C, D or E) as ground (Type C)
illustrated. 8
 If the vehicle is towed with the ignition Release the parking brake.
switch in the “ON” position or the operation Place the gearshift lever in the “N” (Neutral)
mode in ON and only the front wheels or
position (manual transaxle) or the selector
only the rear wheels raised off the ground
lever in the “N” (NEUTRAL) position
(Type B or C), the Active Stability Control
(ASC) may operate, resulting in an accident. (CVT).
When towing the vehicle with the rear
wheels raised, turn the ignition switch to the
“ACC” position or put the operation mode in
Operation under adverse
ACC. When towing the vehicle with the driving conditions
front wheels raised, keep the ignition switch N00837201799
Towing the vehicle by a tow or the operation mode as follows.
truck [Except for vehicles equipped with the
If your vehicle becomes stuck in
F.A.S.T.-key]
The ignition switch is in “OFF” or “ACC” sand, mud or snow
CAUTION position.
 This vehicle must not be towed by a tow If your vehicle becomes stuck in snow, sand,
The operation mode is in OFF or ACC.
truck using sling lift type equipment (Type or mud, it can often be moved by a rocking
A) as illustrated. Using a sling lift will dam- motion. Rock your vehicle back and forth to
age the bumper and front end. free it.

Operation under adverse driving conditions

Do not rev the engine or spin the wheels.  Your vehicle is equipped with an anti-lock
Constant efforts to free a stuck vehicle can
CAUTION braking system (ABS). Hold the brake
 When driving in rain, a layer of water may
cause overheating and transaxle failure. Let pedal down firmly and keep it depressed.
form between the tires and the road surface
the engine idle for a few minutes to cool the Do not pump the brake pedal which will
(hydroplaning). This loosens your tires’ grip
transaxle before trying again. on the road, making it difficult to steer or result in reduced braking performance.
If your vehicle is still stuck after several rock- brake properly. When driving on a wet road:  After parking on snowy or icy roads, it
ing attempts, call for a commercial tow truck • Drive your vehicle at a safe speed. may be difficult to move your vehicle due
service. • Do not drive on worn tires. to the brake being frozen. Depress the
• Always keep the tires at the correct infla- accelerator pedal little by little to move
WARNING tion pressures. the vehicle when safe to do so.
 When trying to rock your vehicle out of a
CAUTION
stuck position, make sure that there are no On snowy or icy roads  Do not depress the accelerator pedal rapidly.
people nearby. The rocking motion can
8 make your vehicle suddenly lurch forward  When driving on a road covered with
The vehicle could start moving when it
or backward, and injure any bystanders. breaks free from the ice, possibly resulting in
snow or ice, use snow tires. Tire chains an accident.
cannot be used on your vehicle. There
may be state or local regulations about
On wet roads using snow tires. Always check the regu-
lations in your local area before using
On a bumpy or rutted road
them. Refer to “Snow tires” on page 9-20
CAUTION and “Tire chains” on page 9-20.
 Drive as slow as possible when driving on
 Avoid flooded roads. Water is often deeper bumpy, rutted roads or over potholes etc.
 Drive slowly. Do not make sudden starts
than it looks, and you could be seriously hurt
or stops, sharp turns, or slam on the
by driving into flood water. CAUTION
brakes.
 When driving in rain, on water-covered
 Allow extra distance between your vehi-  Driving on bumpy, rutted roads or over pot-
roads, or through a car wash, water could get
cle and the vehicle in front of you, and holes can damage the tires and wheels.
into the brake discs and make them fail tem-
avoid sudden braking. Wheels with low-profile tires or under-
porarily. In such cases, lightly press the
inflated tires are especially at risk for dam-
brake pedal to see if they are working prop-  If a skid occurs when the accelerator
age.
erly. If they are not, press the pedal lightly pedal is depressed, take your foot off the
 The vehicle’s body, bumper, muffler and
several times while driving to dry the brake pedal. Steer gently in the direction of the
other parts may be damaged if the vehicle is:
pads or linings, then check them again. skid.

Fuel Pump Shut-off System
CAUTION
• driven over a step (for example, at the
entrance or exit of a parking lot);
• parked too closely against a curb or parking
block, or by the side of a road with curb-
stones;
• driven on a steep slope.
Fuel Pump Shut-off System

N00860600031
WARNING
 Before attempting to restart the engine 8
after a collision, always inspect the ground
under the vehicle for leaking fuel. If a fuel
leak is found or a fuel odor is detected, do
not restart the engine.
 Mitsubishi Motors recommends that your
vehicle be inspected by an authorized Mit-
subishi Motors dealer after any collision.
In the event of a collision causing frontal air-

bag deployment, the fuel pump shut-off sys-
tem will activate to stop fuel supply to the
engine.

Vehicle care and maintenance
Service precautions ..........................................................................9-2

Catalytic converter ...........................................................................9-3
Engine hood .....................................................................................9-4
View of the engine compartment .....................................................9-5
Engine oil and oil filter ....................................................................9-5
Engine coolant .................................................................................9-7
Air cleaner filter ...............................................................................9-8
Manual transaxle oil (if so equipped) ...............................................9-9
Continuously variable transmission (CVT) fluid
(if so equipped) ...........................................................................9-9 9
Washer fluid ...................................................................................9-10
Brake fluid .....................................................................................9-10
Battery ............................................................................................9-11
Tires ...............................................................................................9-12
Clutch pedal free play (if so equipped)...........................................9-20
Brake pedal free play .....................................................................9-20
Parking brake .................................................................................9-21
Wiper blades ..................................................................................9-21
Emission-control system maintenance ..........................................9-21
General maintenance .....................................................................9-22
For cold and snowy weather ..........................................................9-24
Fusible links ...................................................................................9-24
Fuses ..............................................................................................9-24
Replacement of light bulbs ............................................................9-28
Vehicle care precautions ................................................................9-35
Cleaning the inside of your vehicle ...............................................9-35
Cleaning the outside of your vehicle .............................................9-36
Service precautions
Service precautions WARNING

N00937301603  After performing the maintenance work,
make sure that no tools or cloths are left
Taking regular care of your vehicle will pre-
behind in the engine compartment.
serve its value and appearance as long as pos- If they are left behind, a fire or damage to
sible. the vehicle may occur.
 The fan can turn on automatically even if
You can do some of the maintenance work
the engine is not running. Turn the igni-
yourself, and the rest should only be per- tion switch to the “OFF” position or put
formed by an authorized Mitsubishi Motors the operation mode in OFF to be safe
dealer or a repair facility of your choice. while you work in the engine compart-
If you discover a malfunction or other prob- ment.
lem, have it corrected by an authorized  Do not smoke or allow open flames around
Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility fuel or the battery. The fumes are flamma-
of your choice. ble.
9 This section describes the maintenance  Be extremely careful when working
Have you purchased the Mitsubishi Motors
around the battery. It contains poisonous Diamond Care Protection Plan? The Plan
inspections that you can do yourself, if you so
and corrosive sulfuric acid. supplements your new vehicle warranties.
desire. Follow the instructions and precau-
 Do not get under your vehicle while it is on See your authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer
tions for each procedure.
a jack. for details.
Always use properly rated automotive
WARNING jack stands.
 When checking or servicing the inside of  Handling your vehicle’s parts and materi-
the engine compartment, be sure the als in the wrong way can injure you. Ask
engine is stopped and has had a chance to an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer
cool down. or a repair facility of your choice if you
 If you need to work in the engine compart- have questions.
ment with the engine running, be espe-
cially careful that your clothing, hair, etc.
does not get caught in the fan, drive belts,
or other moving parts.
9-2 Vehicle care and maintenance

Catalytic converter
If your vehicle is raised with a WARNING WARNING

garage jack  Do not use the jack on a tilted or soft sur-  Do not park or run your vehicle in areas
face. where combustible materials such as dry
Only use the designated positions shown in Otherwise, the jack might slip and cause grass or leaves can come in contact with a
the illustration. personal injury. Always use the jack on a hot exhaust, since a fire could occur.
flat, hard surface. Before setting the jack,  Do not put undercoat paint on the cata-
make sure there are no sand or pebbles lytic converter.
under the jack base.
Never use the rear To reduce the possibility of catalytic con-
suspensions as a jack-
ing point.
Catalytic converter verter damage:
N00937400450
 Use UNLEADED GASOLINE ONLY of
The catalytic converter requires you to use the type of recommended in the “Fuel
unleaded fuel only. Leaded gasoline will selection”.
destroy the emission-control effectiveness of
the converter.
 Do not drive with an extremely low fuel 9
level. Running out of gas could damage
the catalytic converter.
Normally, the catalytic converter does not
 Do not try to start the engine by pushing
require maintenance. However, it is important
or towing the vehicle. If the battery is
to keep the engine properly tuned for the con-
weak or run down, use jumper cables to
verter to continue to work properly.
*- Front of the vehicle properly start the engine.
 Do not idle the engine with any spark plug
CAUTION wires disconnected or removed, such as
 Damage to the catalytic converter can result
WARNING if your vehicle is not kept in proper operating
when performing diagnostic tests.
 Set a garage jack only at the position  Do not idle the engine for a long time if it
condition. If the engine malfunctions or mis-
shown here. If the garage jack is set a is idling roughly or otherwise obviously
fires, or if your vehicle performance suffers,
wrong position, it could damage your malfunctioning.
have it serviced promptly. Running your
vehicle and/or your vehicle might fall vehicle when it is overheated may result in  To prevent the catalytic converter from
from the jack causing injury or death. damage to the converter and vehicle. being damaged from unburned gas, do not
race the engine when stopping the engine.
Vehicle care and maintenance 9-3

Engine hood
 Stop driving the vehicle if you think the Pull the lever toward you to release the
performance is noticeably low, or the engine hood latch.
NOTE
 To prevent damage to the engine hood and
engine has a malfunction such as with the
wipers, make sure the wipers are at resting
ignition, etc. If you are not able to stop
position when you open the engine hood.
driving immediately, slow down and drive
for only a short time. Have your vehicle Support the engine hood with the hood prop.
checked at an authorized Mitsubishi Insert the hood prop securely in the opening
Motors dealer or a repair facility of your under the hood marked with an arrow.
 In unusual situations involving major
engine problems, a burning odor may
indicate severe and abnormal catalytic
converter overheating. If this occurs, stop
in a safe place, shut the engine off and let
the vehicle cool. Once the engine is cool,
9 immediately take your vehicle to a dealer
WARNING
 Never use the release lever to unlatch the
or a repair facility of your choice for ser-
engine hood while the vehicle is in motion.
vice.
 Do not drive your vehicle unless the
engine hood is locked.
Engine hood Release the lever and lift the engine hood.
N00937501722 CAUTION
 Always insert the support prop into the hole
To open specially made for it. Propping the engine
hood at any other place could cause the prop
to slip out and lead to an accident.
Use the engine hood release lever (located  The hood prop can fall out if the hood is
under the instrument panel near the driver’s lifted by a strong wind.
door) to unlock the engine hood.

View of the engine compartment
To close NOTE Engine oil and oil filter

 If this does not close the engine hood prop- N00937702183
Unlatch the prop from the engine hood and erly, drop it again from a slightly higher
put it back in its retainer. position.
 Do not push down strongly on the engine
To check and refill engine oil
hood. Depending on how strongly or where
you push down, you could create a dent in It is normal for an engine to use oil. You may
the vehicle body. need to add oil between the recommended oil
change intervals. Before starting the engine,
check the engine oil level. Refill if necessary.
View of the engine compart- To check the oil level, remove the dipstick,
ment wipe it off, and gently reinsert it all the way.
N00937601781 Slowly pull the dipstick straight out and
check the oil level by checking the upper sur-
face of the dipstick. The oil level must not go
9
Slowly lower the engine hood approximately above the line on the dipstick.
8 inches (20 cm), then let it drop from its own
weight.
NOTE
 If it is difficult to verify the oil level, wipe
CAUTION off the dipstick and reinsert it. Wait a
 Be careful not to trap your hands or fingers moment and then recheck the oil level by
when closing the engine hood. checking the upper surface of the dipstick.
 Make sure the engine hood is firmly closed
before driving. 1- Engine oil level dipstick If the level does not reach the line which
If you drive without the engine hood com-
2- Air cleaner filter shows the minimum amount of oil required,
pletely closed, it could open up while driv-
3- Battery remove the oil filler cap on the engine valve
ing.
4- Brake fluid cover, and fill to within the “Good” range.
5- Windshield washer fluid reservoir
6- Engine oil filler cap
7- Radiator cap
8- Engine coolant reservoir

Engine oil and oil filter

This mark appears on the top of the oil con-
NOTE tainer and tells you two important things
 The engine oil will deteriorate rapidly if the
about the oil.
Good vehicle is subjected to severe conditions (for
example, repeated operation on rough roads, API service symbol
in mountainous regions, on roads with many
uphill and downhill gradients, or over short
distances). Consequently, the oil will require
earlier replacement in accordance with the
schedule in the “WARRANTY AND MAIN-
TENANCE MANUAL”.
Engine oil identification mark

CAUTION
 Overfilling will cause oil aeration and loss of
oil pressure, which could damage the engine. Mitsubishi Motors recommends using only 1- The upper part indicates the quality of
9 engine oils with the ILSAC certification sym- the oil.
bol on the front of the container. 2- The center part indicates the SAE grade
WARNING of the oil viscosity.
 Used engine oil is poisonous, and can dam- ILSAC certification symbol
age your skin. Prolonged and repeated
contact may cause serious skin disorders, Recommended engine oil vis-
including dermatitis and cancer. Do not let
used oil touch your skin and wash thor-
cosity
oughly after working with it.
 Keep used oil out of the reach of children. Use engine oil with the proper thickness for
the outdoor temperatures where you will be
driving.
NOTE
 Engine oil consumption is greatly influenced
by payload, engine speed, etc. If you cannot find oils with the ILSAC certi-
fication symbol, use an API classification SP
or higher oil with the following label.

Engine coolant
ters require that the filter can withstand a
pressure of 256 psi (1.8 MPa). A Mitsubishi
To add coolant
Motors Genuine oil filter is the best replace-
ment filter. Use “Mitsubishi Motors Genuine Super Long
Follow the installation instructions printed on Life Coolant Premium” or equivalent*.
the filter. *: similar high quality ethylene glycol
based non-silicate, non-amine, non-
nitrate and non-borate coolant with long
Engine coolant life hybrid organic acid technology
N00937801682
Mitsubishi Motors Genuine 0W-20 Synthetic To check the coolant level Mitsubishi Motors Genuine Coolant provides
excellent protection against corrosion and
Engine Oil is recommended for optimum fuel
The engine coolant reservoir (A) lets you rust formation on all metals, including alumi-
economy and cold weather starting.
quickly see when you need to add coolant. num, and prevents clogs in some parts of the
If Mitsubishi Motors Genuine 0W-20 Syn-
When the engine is cold, the level of the cool- engine. 9
thetic Engine Oil is not available, 5W-20
ant in the reservoir should be between the “F” If you need to add coolant often, or if the
grade oils displaying the ILSAC certification
(FULL) and “L” (LOW) marks. The radiator level in the reservoir does not drop when the
can be used.
usually stays full so there is no reason to engine cools, the cooling system should be
However, Mitsubishi Motors Genuine 0W-20
remove the radiator cap (B) except when you pressure-tested for leaks. Take your vehicle to
Synthetic Engine Oil should be used at the
check the coolant freeze point or replace the an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a
next oil change to maintain optimum fuel
antifreeze coolant. repair facility of your choice for testing.
economy and cold weather starting.
CAUTION
To replace the oil filter  Do not use alcohol or methanol antifreeze or
any engine coolants that contain them. Using
The oil filter should be replaced at the time or the wrong antifreeze can corrode aluminum
FULL
mileage specified in the “WARRANTY AND parts.
MAINTENANCE MANUAL”.
Only use high quality replacement filters on LOW
this vehicle. The manufacturer’s specifica-
tions for Mitsubishi Motors Genuine oil fil-

Air cleaner filter

 Check the coolant freeze point in the radi-
CAUTION WARNING ator with the proper gauge, and only when
 The required concentration of anti-freeze dif-  Wait for the engine to cool down before
it is safe. If you add antifreeze, the con-
fers depending on the expected ambient tem- opening the radiator cap. Otherwise hot
tents of the reservoir must be protected
perature. steam or boiling coolant could spray up
Above -31 °F (-35 °C) : 50 % concentration from the filler port and scald you. against freezing.
of anti-freeze  Keep the front of the radiator and con-
Below -31 °F (-35 °C) : 60 % concentration denser clean.
of anti-freeze  If the engine coolant temperature does not
You can check the concentration level with a rise after the engine is warmed-up, take
gauge from an automotive supply store, or your vehicle to an authorized Mitsubishi
your authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or Motors dealer or a repair facility of your
service station can check it for you. choice to have the thermostat checked,
 Do not use water to adjust the concentration and replaced if necessary.
of coolant.
 Do not top off the reservoir with plain water
9 only. Water by itself boils at a lower temper- Air cleaner filter
ature and does not stop rust or freezing. If the N00937901540
water freezes, it will damage your cooling
system. Do not use tapwater. It can cause
The air cleaner filter will get dirty and dusty
corrosion and rust. from use and not filter properly. Replace it
with a new filter using the schedule in the
“WARRANTY AND MAINTENANCE
Radiator cap Points to remember MANUAL”.
The radiator cap must be sealed tight to pre-  Do not overfill the reservoir.
vent losing coolant, which may result in  Your vehicle uses a special radiator cap
engine damage. Only use a Mitsubishi that stays sealed and lets the coolant flow
Motors Genuine Parts radiator cap, or an from the reservoir back to the radiator
approved equivalent. when the engine cools down. If you need
to change the cap, use the exact same
kind.

Manual transaxle oil (if so equipped)

1. Unclamp the cover. Open up the top of the tant that the transmission fluid is kept at the
cover and take out the air cleaner filter. Manual transaxle oil (if so correct level.
equipped)
N00938201218
Fluid type
Whenever the manual transaxle oil level is
checked, add oil to maintain the proper level, Use only “Mitsubishi Motors Genuine
if necessary. CVTF-J4 or CVTF-J4+” transmission fluid to
Refill or change with the oil according to the ensure optimum transmission performance.
table below.
CAUTION
Oil type  Using the improper transaxle fluid may dam-
age the transaxle.
CAUTION Mitsubishi Motors

 Take care not to scratch the engine air flow Genuine NEW 9
Lubricant Special additives
sensor when removing the air cleaner cover. MULTI GEAR OIL
ECO API GL-4
Do not use any fluid additives to the trans-
2. Replacing the air cleaner filter and put the Viscosity range SAE 75W-80 mission.
cover back on in its original position.
NOTE Continuously variable

 Genuine Mitsubishi Motors Parts are recom- transmission (CVT) fluid (if
mended when replacing the air cleaner filter.
 After replacing the air cleaner filter, make so equipped)
sure that the hinges at the bottom of cover N00938101204
are firmly set.

The continuously variable transmission
(CVT) should be maintained and serviced by
an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a
repair facility of your choice to obtain the
best performance and longest life. It is impor-

Washer fluid
The fluid level falls slightly with wear of the
Washer fluid CAUTION brake pads, but this does not indicate any
 Do not use any fluid other than washer fluid.
N00938601469
abnormality.
The windshield washer fluid reservoir is in Also, do not use such as soapy water, glass
the engine compartment. cleaner, and engine coolant. Using other liq- The fluid in the master cylinder should be
Check the washer fluid level at regular inter- uids can cause damage to the vehicle, such as
checked when doing other work under the
could cause streaking on the vehicle’s
vals and add washer fluid to reservoir if nec- engine hood. The brake system should also be
painted surfaces, damage to the washer
essary. pump, or clogging the nozzle, leading to the checked for leaks at the same time.
Open the reservoir cap and check the level of washer fluid not spraying. If the fluid level falls noticeably in a short
washer fluid.  Over-diluting the washer fluid in winter may length of time, it indicates leaks from the
Full level is approximately 2 inches (5 cm) cause it to freeze onto the windshield. brake system.
below from the upper surface of the reservoir. If this occurs, have the vehicle checked by an
authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a
Brake fluid repair facility of your choice.
9 N00938701314
Fluid type
Upper surface
To check the fluid level
Use the brake fluid conforming to DOT 3 or
Full The fluid level must be between the “MAX” DOT 4. The reservoir cap must be tightly
and “MIN” marks on the reservoir. sealed to keep dirt and water out.
WARNING
When freezing weather is anticipated, flush  Take care in handling brake fluid as it is
MAX harmful to the eyes, may irritates your
out the water in the reservoir by operating the
skin and will damage painted surfaces.
pump. Fill the reservoir with windshield anti-
Wipe up spills immediately.
freeze (not radiator antifreeze), and operate If brake fluid gets on your hands or in
the system for a few seconds to flush out the MIN your eyes, flush immediately with clean
residual water. water. Follow up with a doctor as neces-
sary.

Battery
Do not fill above the top line because a spill It is recommended that you have your battery
CAUTION during driving could cause damage. and charging system checked by an autho-
 Do not let any petroleum-based fluid touch,
rized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair
mix with, or get into the brake fluid. This
facility of your choice before the start of cold
will damage the seals.
weather. If necessary, have it charged. This
 Be careful when handling brake fluid. It can
damage painted surfaces. will provide more reliable starting, and longer
 Use only the listed brake fluid. Different battery life.
brands of brake fluid have different addi-
tives, and these can cause a chemical reac- Disconnection and connection
tion. Do not mix brands of brake fluid.
N00901701169
 Keep the reservoir cap closed to keep the
brake fluid from evaporating. To disconnect the battery cable, stop the
engine. Disconnect the negative (-) terminal
first, then the positive (+) terminal. To recon-
nect the battery, first connect the positive (+)
Battery WARNING terminal and then the negative (-) terminal, 9
N00939100943
 If the battery goes flat, be sure to check before starting the vehicle.
The condition of the battery is very important the battery electrolyte level before con-
for quick starting and to keep the vehicle’s necting booster cables.
electrical system working properly. Check the  After checking the battery electrolyte NOTE
level, make sure the caps are fitted  Open the terminal cover (A) before discon-
battery regularly.
securely. necting or connecting the positive (+) termi-
 If any of the caps has a loose fit, replace nal of the battery.
Checking battery electrolyte the battery.  Loosen the nut (B) and then disconnect the
battery cable from the positive (+) terminal.
level
N00901500072
The electrolyte level must be between the During cold weather

limits shown on the outside of the battery. Fill N00901600060
it with distilled water as needed. The inside of The battery is weaker in cold temperatures.
the battery is divided into several compart- This has to do with its chemical and physical
ments. Take the cap off of each compartment properties and is why a very cold battery,
and fill to the mark. especially one with a low charge, will have a
hard time starting your vehicle.

Tires
WARNING WARNING Tires

 Never disconnect the battery while the  If you are quick-charging your battery, N00939201693
engine is running, or you could damage first disconnect the battery cables.
the vehicle’s electrical parts.  In order to prevent a short-circuit, be sure WARNING
 Never short-circuit the battery. This could to disconnect the negative (-) terminal  Driving with tires that are
cause it to overheat and be damaged. first, and reconnect it last.
 Keep sparks, cigarettes, and flames away  Battery posts, terminals and related acces-
worn, damaged or improperly
from the battery because the battery could sories contain lead and lead compounds. inflated is dangerous.
explode. Wash hands after handling. These type tire conditions will
 Electrolyte (battery acid) is made of corro- adversely affect vehicle perfor-
sive diluted sulfuric acid. If it spills on
nearby parts, it can crack, stain, or dis- NOTE mance.
color them. And if it gets on your skin or  Check each battery terminal for corrosion. These type tire conditions can
in your eyes, it can cause burns or blind- You can stop more corrosion by washing also cause a tread separation
ness. Please observe the following han- with a solution of baking soda and water.
9 dling instructions:
or blowout which may result
Grease the posts and clamps after cleaning or
• If electrolyte gets on plastic parts or tightening them.
in an accident causing serious
other nearby parts, wipe it off with a soft  Check to see that the battery is securely injury or death.
cloth or chamois soaked in a solution of installed and cannot be moved. Also check  Tires, including spare tire,
water and neutral detergent then imme- each terminal for tightness.
diately rinse the affected parts with degrade over time with age
 If you will not be driving your vehicle for a
plenty of water. long period of time, remove the battery and even when they are not being
• If electrolyte gets on your hands or store it in a place where the battery fluid will used.
clothes, rinse thoroughly with water. If not freeze. The battery only should be stored
electrolyte gets in your eyes, flush them
It is recommended that tires
with a full charge.
with water immediately and get immedi-  Before cleaning the battery, tighten all the
over 6 years generally be
ate medical attention. filler port caps to keep dirt and moisture out. replaced even if damage is not
 Open doors and windows in any closed obvious.
space where you may be charging or
working with the battery.
 Always wear protective clothing and gog- It is important to familiarize yourself
gles when working with the battery, or with the following terms:
have a skilled automobile technician do it.
 Cold tire pressure:
Tires
• The measured pressure after the • The outward facing sidewall of  Section width: the linear distance
vehicle has been parked for at an asymmetrical tire that has a between the exteriors of the side-
least three hours, particular side that must always walls of an inflated tire, excluding
or face outward when mounted on a elevations due to labeling, decora-
• The measured pressure when the vehicle. tion, or protective bands.
vehicle is driven less than 1 mile  Passenger car tire: a tire intended  Bead: the part of the tire that is
(1.6 km) after having been for use on passenger cars, multi- made of steel wires, wrapped or
parked for three hours. purpose passenger vehicles, and reinforced by ply cords and that is
 Maximum pressure: the maximum trucks that have a gross vehicle shaped to fit the rim.
permissible cold tire inflation weight rating (GVWR) of  Ply: a layer of rubber-coated par-
pressure for this tire. 10,000 pounds or less. allel cords.
 Recommended inflation pressure:  Light truck (LT) tire: a tire desig-  Cord: the strands forming the plies
the inflation pressure for optimum nated by its manufacturer as pri- in the tire. 9
tire performance. marily intended for use on  Rim: a metal support for a tire or a
 Intended outboard sidewall: lightweight trucks or multipurpose tire and tube assembly upon which
• The sidewall that contains a passenger vehicles. the tire beads are seated.
whitewall, bears white lettering  Tread: portion of a tire that comes  Rim diameter: nominal diameter
or bears manufacturer, brand, into contact with the road. of the bead seat.
and/or model name molding that  Tread rib: a tread section running  Groove: the space between two
is higher or deeper than the same circumferentially around a tire. adjacent tread ribs.
molding on the other sidewall of  Tread separation: pulling away of
the tire, the tread from the tire carcass.
or  Carcass: the tire structure, except
tread and sidewall rubber which,
when inflated, bears the load.
 Sidewall: portion of a tire between
the tread and bead.

Tires
Tire Markings Section width in millimeters NOTE

215
(mm)  LT (Light Truck) -metric tire
Aspect ratio in percent (%) sizing is based on U.S.A. design
65 Ratio of section height to standards. The size designation
section width of tire. for LT-metric tires is the same as
Construction code for P-metric tires except for the
• “R” means radial construc-
letters “LT” that are molded into
R tion. the sidewall preceding the size
• “D” means diagonal or bias
designation.
construction. Example: LT235/85R16.
 Temporary spare tires are high
1- Size Designation 15 Rim diameter in inches (in)
pressure compact spares
9 2- Service Description
designed for temporary emer-
3- Maximum Load NOTE gency use only. Tires designed
4- Maximum Pressure  European/Japanese metric tire to this standard have the letter
5- U.S. DOT Safety Standards sizing is based on European/Jap- “T” molded into the sidewall
Code (TIN) anese design standards. Tires preceding the size designation.
6- Treadwear, Traction and Tem- designed to these standards have Example: T145/80D18 103M.
perature Grades the tire size molded into the
sidewall beginning with the sec- Service Description
Size Designation tion width. The letter “P” is
absent from this tire size desig- EXAMPLE: 95H
EXAMPLE: P215/65R15 nation. Load index
Passenger car tire size based Example: 215/65R15 96H. A numerical code associ-
P 95
on U.S.A. design standards ated with the maximum load
a tire can carry.

Tires
Speed symbol EXAMPLE: DOT MA L9 ABCD

WARNING 1504
A symbol indicating the  Overloading of your tire is
range of speeds at which a Department of Transporta-
dangerous. Overloading can
tire can carry a load corre- tion
cause tire failure, affect vehi-
sponding to its load index This symbol certifies that
cle handling, and increase
under certain operating con- the tire is in compliance
your stopping distance. Use DOT
ditions. with the U.S. Department
tires of the recommended load
H The maximum speed corre- of Transportation tire safety
capacity for your vehicle.
sponding to the speed sym- standards, and is approved
Never overload them.
bol should only be achieved for highway use.
under specified operating Code representing the tire
conditions. (i.e. tire pressure, Maximum Pressure MA manufacturing location.
vehicle loading, road condi- (2 digits) 9
tions and posted speed lim- Maximum Pressure indicates the Code representing the tire
its) maximum permissible cold tire infla- L9 size. (2 digits)
tion pressure for this tire. ABCD Code used by tire manufac-
Maximum Load turer. (1 to 4 digits)
Tire Identification Number (TIN)
Number representing the
Maximum load indicates the maxi-
The TIN may be found on one or 15 week in which the tire was
mum load this tire is designed to
both sides of the tire but the date manufactured. (2 digits)
carry.
code may only be on one side. Look Number representing the
for the TIN on the outboard side of 04 year in which the tire was
tires as mounted on the vehicle. If the manufactured. (2 digits)
TIN is not found on the outboard side
then you will find it on the inboard
side of the tire.

Tires
Treadwear, Traction and Temper- under controlled conditions on speci- Tire inflation pressures
ature Grades fied government test surfaces of N00939302082
asphalt and concrete. A tire marked Proper tire inflation pressure is

C may have poor traction perfor- essential for the safe and satisfactory
Treadwear
mance. operation of your vehicle. The wrong
The treadwear grade is a comparative tire pressure will cause problems in
rating based on the wear rate of the Temperature three major areas:
tire when tested under controlled
The temperature grades are A (the  Safety
conditions on a specified government
highest), B and C, representing the Too little pressure increases flex-
test course. For example, a tire
tire’s resistance to the generation of ing in the tire and can cause tire
graded 150 would wear one and one-
heat and its ability to dissipate heat failure. Too much pressure can
half (11/2) times as well on the gov- when tested under controlled condi-
9 ernment course as a tire graded 100. tions on a specified indoor laboratory
cause a tire to lose its ability to
cushion shock. Objects on the
The relative performance of tires test wheel. Sustained high tempera- road and potholes could then
depends upon the actual conditions ture can cause the material of the tire cause tire damage that may result
of their use, however, and may depart to degenerate and reduce tire life, and in tire failure.
significantly from the norm due to excessive temperature can lead to  Economy
variations in driving habits, service sudden tire failure. The grade C cor- The wrong tire pressure can cause
practices and differences in road responds to a level of performance uneven wear patterns in the tire
characteristics and climate. which all passenger car tires must tread. These abnormal wear pat-
meet under the Federal Motor Vehi- terns will reduce the tread life, and
Traction cle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades the tire will have to be replaced
B and A represent higher levels of sooner.
The traction grades, from highest to
performance on the laboratory test Too little pressure also makes it
lowest, are AA, A, B and C. Those
wheel than the minimum required by harder for the tire to roll, and this
grades represent the tire’s ability to
law. uses up more fuel.
stop on wet pavement as measured

Tires
 Ride comfort and vehicle stability The recommended inflation pres- Cold inflation pressure is measured
The superior riding experience sures under normal driving condi- after the vehicle has been parked for
built into your vehicle partly tions should be used for the tires at least three hours or is driven less
depends on the correct tire pres- listed below. than 1 mile (1.6 km) after having
sure. Too much pressure gives an been parked for three hours.
uncomfortable and jarring ride. Tire Cold inflation pressure must not go
Item Front Rear
Too little pressure feels as if your size above the maximum values molded
vehicle is slow to respond. 270 270 into the tire sidewall. After driving
Unequal tire pressures can make 165/65R several miles, your tire inflation pres-
kPa, kPa,
steering your vehicle uneven and 14 sure may increase 2 to 6 psi (14 to
Nor- 39 psi 39 psi
unpredictable. mal tire 41 kPa) from the cold inflation pres-
240 240
175/55R sure. Do not let air out of the tires to
The tire pressure for your vehicle kPa, kPa,
under normal driving conditions is
15
35 psi 35 psi
get back to the specified cold pres- 9
sure, or your tires will be too low.
listed on the placard attached to the Com- Check your tires each time you
driver’s door sill. pact T115/70 refuel. If one tire looks lower than
420 kPa, 60 psi
(Refer to “Tire and loading informa- spare D14 the others, check the pressure for all
tion placard” on page 11-3.) wheel of them.
You should also take the following
Tire pressures should be checked, safety precautions:
and adjusted if necessary, at least
once a month.  Keep your tires inflated to the rec-
Pressures should be checked more ommended pressures. (See the tire
often whenever weather temperatures and loading information placard
change severely, because tire pres- attached to the driver’s door sill.)
sures change with outdoor tempera-  Stay within the recommended
tures. The pressures listed are always load limits.
“cold inflation pressure”.
Tires
 Make sure that the weight of any  Check tire pressures regularly. tire tread is worn down to 1/16 inch (1.6
load in your vehicle is evenly dis-  Have regular maintenance done mm).
When the bands appear next to one another in
tributed. on the wheel balance and front
two or more places, replace your tires.
 Drive at safe speeds. and rear suspension alignment.
 After filling your tires to the cor-  Rotate your tires regularly as
NOTE
rect pressure, check them for dam- described in the “Tire rotation”  Tire wear indicators can have different marks
age and air leaks. Be sure to section on page 9-18. and locations depending on the tire manufac-
reinstall the caps on the valve turer.
stems. Tread wear indicator
N00939801240
Tire rotation
Replacing tires and wheels N00939901586
N00939601512
To even out the wear on your tires
9 CAUTION and make them last longer, Mitsubi-
 Avoid using different size tires from the one shi Motors Corporation recommends
listed and the combined use of different
types of tires, as this can affect driving
that you rotate your tires at the mile-
safety. age listed in the “WARRANTY AND
Refer to “Tires and wheels” on page 11-5. MAINTENANCE MANUAL”.
 Only Mitsubishi Motors Genuine wheels However, the timing for tire rotation
should be used.
Use of another type of wheel risks air leaks 1- Location of the tread wear indicator may vary according to your vehicle
and sensor damage, as it will not be possible 2- Tread wear indicator condition, road surface conditions,
to install the tire pressure sensor properly. and your own personal driving hab-
Tread wear indicators are built into the origi- its. Any time you notice unusual
nal equipment tires on your vehicle to help wear, rotate your tires as soon as pos-
Tire maintenance you know when your tires should be replaced. sible.
N00939701207
Many states have laws requiring that you
The following maintenance steps are replace your tires at this point. When rotating tires, check for
recommended: These indicators are molded into the bottom uneven wear, damage, and wheel
of the tread grooves and will appear when the
Tires
alignment. Abnormal wear is usually CAUTION CAUTION
caused by a wrong tire pressure,
A compact spare tire can be  If the tires have arrows (A) indi-
wheels that are not aligned properly,
installed temporarily in place of cating the correct direction of
wheels that are out-of-balance, or
a tire that has been removed dur- rotation, swap the front and rear
severe braking.
ing the tire rotation. However, it tires on the left-hand side of the
Check with an authorized Mitsubishi
must not be included in the regu- vehicle and the front and rear
Motors dealer or a repair facility of
lar tire rotation sequence. tires on the right-hand side of
your choice to find out the reason for
the vehicle separately. Keep
uneven tread wear.
each tire on its original side of
The first tire rotation is the most the vehicle. When installing the
important one. It will allow all your tires, make sure the arrows point
tires to wear evenly. in the direction in which the
wheels will turn when the vehi- 9
Tires that do not have arrows showing rotation
cle moves forward. Any tire
direction whose arrow points in the wrong
direction will not perform to its
Front
full potential.
Tires that have arrows showing rotation direc-

tion
Front
Front

Clutch pedal free play (if so equipped)

If the free play is not within these limits, take
CAUTION Tire chains your vehicle to an authorized Mitsubishi
 Avoid the combined use of dif- N00940100116
ferent types of tires. Using dif- CAUTION choice for adjustment.
ferent types of tires can affect  Tire chains cannot be used on your vehicle.
vehicle performance and safety. The clearance between the chains and the Brake pedal free play
body is not sufficient to allow proper clear- N00940300336
ance, and the vehicle body might be dam-
To check the brake pedal free play (A), turn
aged.
Snow tires off the engine and press the brake pedal sev-
N00940001499 eral times with your foot. Then press the
In some areas of the country, snow tires are pedal down with your fingers until you first
required for winter driving. If snow tires are
Clutch pedal free play (if so feel resistance.
required in your area, you must choose snow equipped)
Brake pedal free play:
tires of the same size and type as the original
9
N00940200090
.1 to .3 inch (3 to 8 mm)
tires provided with your vehicle. Snow tires
should also be installed on all four wheels. To check the clutch pedal free play (A), turn
Otherwise your safety and vehicle handling off the engine and press the pedal until you
can be reduced. feel resistance.
Even where laws may permit it, snow tires Clutch pedal free play:
should not be operated at sustained speeds .4 to .6 inch (11 to 16 mm)
over 75 mph (120 km/h).
CAUTION
 Only Mitsubishi Motors Genuine wheels
should be used.
Use of another type of wheel risks air leaks
and sensor damage, as it will not be possible If the free play is not within these limits, take
to install the tire pressure sensor properly. your vehicle to an authorized Mitsubishi
choice for adjustment.

Parking brake
Parking brake WARNING Emission-control system

N00940400252  Continued operation of the vehicle with
the parking brake lever out of adjustment
maintenance
N00940801354
may result in the vehicle moving when
Parking brake lever stroke unattended. Your vehicle is equipped with an emission-
control system that meets all the requirements
Check the parking brake lever travel occa-
of the U.S. Environmental Protection
sionally. To check this, pull the lever up
slowly and count the number of clicks of the Wiper blades Agency. The emission-control system is
made of:
ratchet. N00940701223
Check the wiper blades occasionally. Clean  a positive crankcase ventilation system
Parking brake lever stroke: them regularly to remove deposits of salt and  an evaporative emission-control system
7 to 9 notches (clicks) road film. Use a sponge or cloth and a mild  an exhaust emission-control system
(Parking brake adjustment when pulled with detergent or non-abrasive cleaner to clean the
the force of 200 N) blades and glass areas. To be sure the emission-control system works
Replace the blades if they continue to streak properly, have your vehicle inspected and
9
Also check to see if the lever stays gripped by
the ratchet after pulling. or smear. maintained by an authorized Mitsubishi
NOTE choice. This should be done at the time or
 Do not run the wipers on dry glass for a long mileage specified in the “WARRANTY AND
time. This wears out the rubber and can MAINTENANCE MANUAL”.
scratch the glass. These, and all the other “general” mainte-
nance services listed in this manual, need to
be performed to keep your vehicle running
During cold weather properly and reliably.
You should also have an inspection and ser-
vice any time you suspect a malfunction.
If the blades are frozen to the windshield, do
not operate the wipers until the ice has melted
and the blades are freed, otherwise the wiper
motor may be damaged.

General maintenance
high heat sources such as the exhaust mani-
NOTE Fuel hoses fold.
 To meet government regulations and pro- N00941000040
mote cleaner air, your vehicle is equipped Check the hose surfaces for any heat and
with an onboard diagnostic system (OBD).
mechanical damage, hard and brittle rubber,
WARNING
The engine electronic control module that  If you see a fuel leak or if you smell fuel,
cracking, tears, cuts and abrasions. Pay spe-
controls OBD functions stores various data do not run the engine. Any spark (includ-
(especially about the exhaust emissions). cial attention to the hoses closest to high heat ing from the ignition), flame or smoking
This data will be erased if the battery cable is sources such as the exhaust manifold. Check material could cause an explosion or fire.
disconnected, which could make a rapid all the hose connections, such as clamps and Call an authorized Mitsubishi Motors
diagnosis difficult. Do not disconnect the couplings, to make sure they are secure and dealer or a repair facility of your choice
battery cable when the engine malfunction that there are no leaks. If you see any wear or for assistance.
indicator (“SERVICE ENGINE SOON”) is damage, replace the hoses immediately.
ON.
Intake valve clearance Evaporative emission control

9 Spark plugs N00950100050 system (except evaporative
N00940900228
Have the valve clearance checked at an emission canister)
authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer at the N00941400187
Spark plugs must fire properly for good
mileage specified in the “WARRANTY AND If the fuel-vapor vent line is clogged or dam-
engine performance and emission-control.
MAINTENANCE MANUAL”. aged, the fuel-vapor mixture will escape, pol-
Do not reuse them by cleaning or regapping.
If the engine sounds abnormally loud, have luting the air.
Change them at the mileage listed in the
adjustments made by an authorized Have the system checked at an authorized
“WARRANTY AND MAINTENANCE
Mitsubishi Motors dealer. Mitsubishi Motors dealer at the mileage spec-
MANUAL”.
ified in the “WARRANTY AND MAINTE-
NOTE Fuel system (tank, pipe line and NANCE MANUAL”.
 Use the spark plugs listed under “Engine connection, and fuel tank filler
specifications” on page 11-5 or plugs that are cap) General maintenance
exactly the same. Other plugs could cause N00941300173 N00941500292
engine damage, performance problems or
radio noise. Check these regularly for damage or leaks in The next pages list the maintenance service
the fuel lines and connections. Check the fuel recommended by Mitsubishi Motors Corpo-
tank filler cap for damage or looseness. Pay ration. In addition to the general maintenance
special attention to the fuel lines closest to that needs to be performed at the times listed,
General maintenance
there are other parts which do not usually  The underside or rear of the vehicle is
need regular maintenance.
Ball joint, steering linkage seals damaged
But, if any of these parts stops working prop- and drive shaft boots
erly, your vehicle performance could suffer. N00941800077 Also check the exhaust system each time the
Have these items checked if you notice a Check the following parts for damage and vehicle is raised for lubrication, oil changes,
problem with them. grease leaks: or required service. Any open seams or loose
connections could let dangerous exhaust
If you have any questions, see your autho-  Ball joint boots of the front suspension fumes seep into the luggage and passenger
rized Mitsubishi Motors dealer for assistance. and steering linkage compartments.
 Bellows on both ends of the drive shaft
Disc brake pads Check for any of the following
N00941600059 Exhaust system conditions:
Good brakes are essential for safe driving. N00942200111
Check the brake pads for wear. For good  Check for holes or exhaust gas leaks
braking performance, replace the brake pads WARNING caused by corrosion or damage. 9
with the same type pads as the originals.  Carbon monoxide gas from your vehicle’s  Check the joints and connections for
exhaust is poisonous. Breathing these looseness or exhaust gas leaks.
fumes can cause unconsciousness or death.  Check the rubber hangers and brackets for
Brake hoses damage.
N00941700076
The best way to keep carbon monoxide gas
Brake hoses and tubing should be checked from entering inside your vehicle is to have
for:
Hood lock release mechanism
the engine exhaust system properly serviced.
Have a competent mechanic inspect the com- and safety catch
 Severe surface cracking, scuffing or worn plete exhaust system and nearby body areas N00942500127
spots. If the fabric casing of the hose is for broken, damaged, deteriorated, or mispo- The hood lock release mechanism and hood
showing through any cracks or worn spots sitioned parts if you notice any of the follow- safety catch should be checked, cleaned, and
in the rubber hose cover, the hose should ing: oiled when needed for easy movement and to
be replaced. The brakes can fail if the prevent rust and wear. Use Multipurpose
hose wears through.  A change in the sound of the exhaust sys- Grease NLGI Grade 2 sparingly for all sliding
 Improper installation may cause twisting, tem parts of the hood latch and release lever.
or wheel, tire or chassis interference.  The smell of exhaust fumes inside the Work the grease into the hood lock mecha-
vehicle

For cold and snowy weather

nism until all the movable surfaces are cov- snow off the vehicle and a plastic scraper for individual circuit is equipped with a fuse. The
ered. the windshield, side and rear window are also fuse blocks are located in the passenger com-
Also, put a light coat of the same grease on useful. partment and in the engine compartment.
the safety catch wherever moving parts touch.
Fusible links Passenger compartment
For cold and snowy weather N00942700305
N00942600102
The fusible links will melt to prevent a fire if The fuse block in the passenger compartment
a large current attempts to flow through cer- is located in front of the driver’s seat at the
Ventilation slots tain electrical systems. position shown in the illustration.
In case of a melted fusible link, see your
The ventilation slots in front of the wind- authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a
shield should be brushed clear after a heavy repair facility of your choice for inspection
snowfall so that the operation of the heating and replacement.
For the fusible links, please refer to “Fuse
9 and ventilation systems will not be impaired.
load capacities” on page 9-25.
Weatherstripping
WARNING
 Fusible links must not be replaced by any
To prevent freezing of the weatherstripping other device. Failing to fit the correct fus-
on the doors, engine hood, etc., they should ible link may result in fire in the vehicle,
be treated with silicone grease. property destruction and serious or fatal
injuries at any time.
Additional equipment (For Engine compartment
regions where snow is encoun-
Fuses In the engine compartment, the fuse block is
tered) N00942800902 located as shown in the illustration.
While pressing the tab (A or B), pull up the
It is a good idea to carry a shovel or a short- Fuse block location cover.
handled spade in the vehicle during the win-
ter so that you can clear away snow if you get
stranded. A small hand-brush for sweeping To prevent damage to the electrical system
from short-circuiting or overloading, each
Fuses
Passenger compartment fuse loca- Sym- Capac-

No. Electrical system
tion table bol ity
Type A
11 Rear fog light 10 A
12 Door lock 15 A
Interior light (Dome
Type B 13 15 A
light)
14 Rear window wiper 15 A
15 Gauges 7.5 A
16 Relay 7.5 A
17 Heated seats 20 A
18 Option 10 A
Sym- Capac- 9
No. Electrical system Heated outside rear-
Fuse load capacities bol ity 19 7.5 A
view mirrors
N00954801342 1 Tail light (left) 7.5 A
20 Windshield wiper 20 A
This fuse list shows the names of the electri- 2 Cigarette lighter 15 A
cal systems and their fuse capacities. 21 Back-up light 7.5 A
There are spare fuses in the fuse block in the 3 Ignition coil 10 A
22 Defogger 30 A
engine compartment. Always replace a blown 4 Starter motor 7.5 A
fuse with one of the same capacity as the 23 Heater 30 A
original. 5 — — —
24 — — —
6 — — —
25 Radio 10 A
7 Tail light (right) 7.5 A
Electronic con-
Outside rearview 26 15 A
8 7.5 A trolled unit
mirrors
9 Engine control unit 7.5 A  Some fuses may not be installed on your
vehicle, depending on the vehicle model
10 Control unit 7.5 A or specifications.

Fuses
 The table above shows the main equip- Sym- Capac- Sym- Capac-
ment corresponding to each fuse. No. Electrical system No. Electrical system
bol ity bol ity
BF1 DC-DC (P/T) 30 A F15 Alternator 7.5 A
Engine compartment fuse location
BF2 DC-DC (AUDIO) 30 A Hazard warning
table F16 10 A
flasher
Headlight (low
F1 10 A Automatic trans-
Type A beam) (left) F17 15 A
axle
Headlight (low
F2 10 A F18 Air conditioning 10 A
beam) (right)
Headlight (high F19 ETV 15 A
F3 10 A
beam) (left)
F20 Starter 7.5 A
Headlight (high
F4 10 A F21 CVT oil/pump 15 A
beam) (right)
9 F5 Horn 10 A F22 Fuel pump 15 A
F6 Front fog lights 15 A F23 Engine 20 A

Daytime running Automatic trans-
F7 10 A F24 7.5 A
lights axle
F8 — — — #1 — Spare fuse 20 A
Sym- Capac- F9 — — — #2 — Spare fuse 30 A
No. Electrical system
bol ity
Battery current
SBF1 Radiator fan motor 40 A* F10 7.5 A *: Fusible link
sensor
Anti-lock braking F11 — — —  Some fuses may not be installed on your
SBF2 30 A* vehicle, depending on the vehicle model
system Stop lights (Brake
F12 15 A or specifications.
SBF3 Ignition switch 40 A* lights)
 The table above shows the main equip-
Power window F13 Ignition coil 7.5 A ment corresponding to each fuse.
SBF4 40 A*
control F14 Engine control 7.5 A

Fuses
15 A: Cigarette lighter
Type B
When using a substitute fuse, replace with a
fuse of the correct capacity as soon as possi-
ble.
Identification of fuse
Capacity Color
7.5 A Brown
10 A Red
Sym- Capac- 3. Clamp it on the fuse you wish to remove,
No. Electrical system 15 A Blue and pull the fuse straight out from the fuse
bol ity
20 A Yellow block.
SBF1 PTC heater 40 A*
30 A
Green (fuse type) /Pink (fusible 9
SBF2 PTC heater 40 A* link type)
SBF3 PTC heater 40 A* 40 A Green (fusible link type)
*: Fusible link Fuse replacement

N00954900131
 Some fuses may not be installed on your
vehicle, depending on the vehicle model 1. Before replacing a fuse, always turn off
or specifications. the electrical item concerned to the fuse
 The table above shows the main equip- and turn the ignition switch to the “OFF”
ment corresponding to each fuse. position or put the operation mode in
OFF. 4. Use the fuse location diagrams and the
2. There is a fuse remover (A) in the engine matching tables, to check the fuse that is
The fuse block does not contain spare 7.5 A,
compartment fuse block. related to the problem. If the fuse is not
10 A or 15 A fuses. If one of these fuses
blown, something else must be causing
burns out, substitute with the following fuse.
the problem. Have the system inspected
7.5 A: Outside rearview mirrors
by your authorized Mitsubishi Motors
10 A: Option
dealer or a repair facility of your choice.

Replacement of light bulbs

N00942901362
Before replacing the bulb, be sure the light is

off. Do not touch the glass part of the new
bulb with your bare fingers; the oil from your
skin will stay on the glass and dim or destroy
the bulb when it gets hot.
CAUTION
B- Fuse is OK  Bulbs are extremely hot immediately after
being turned off.
C- Blown fuse
When replacing the bulb, wait for it to cool
CAUTION
sufficiently before touching it. You could  Do not install commercially available LED-
5. Insert a new fuse of the same capacity type bulbs.
9 securely into the appropriate slot.
otherwise be burned.
 Handle halogen light bulb with care. The gas
Commercially available LED-type bulbs
could adversely affect the operation of the
inside halogen light bulb is highly pressur-
vehicle, such as by preventing the lights and
ized, so dropping, knocking, or scratching a
CAUTION halogen light bulb can cause it to shatter.
other vehicle equipment from operating
 Never use a fuse with a capacity greater than properly.
 Never hold the halogen light bulb with a bare
the one listed or any substitute, such as wire, hand, dirty glove, etc.
foil etc. This would cause the circuit wiring The oil from your hand could cause the bulb
to heat up and could cause a fire. to break the next time the headlights are NOTE
 If the replacement fuse blows again after a used.  If you are unsure of how to carry out the
short time, have the electrical system If the glass surface is dirty, clean it with work as required, it is recommended that
checked by an authorized Mitsubishi Motors alcohol and let it dry completely before these procedures be carried out by an autho-
dealer or a repair facility of your choice to installing the bulb. rized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair
find and correct the cause. facility of your choice.
 Be careful not to scratch the vehicle body
when removing a light and lens.

NOTE Outside ANSI

 When it rains, or when the vehicle has been
Watt- Trade No.
N00950302232
Description
washed, the inside of the lens sometimes age or Bulb
Front type
becomes temporarily foggy. This is the same
phenomenon as when window glass mists up Front turn signal
on a humid day, and does not indicate a func- 1 27 W #1156NA
light
tional problem.
When the light is switched on, the heat will Parking Type
5W W5W
remove the fog. However, if water gathers light A
inside the light, please have it checked by an
authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a 2 Parking
light/Day- Type
repair facility of your choice. — —
time run- B
Type A ning light
Bulb location and capacity Type
N00943001230
A
60/55 W HB2
9
3 Headlight
CAUTION Type
— —
 When replacing a bulb, be sure to use a new B
Type B
bulb of the same type, wattage, and color. Front side-marker
If you install a different bulb, the bulb could 4 5W W5W
light
malfunction or fail to come on and could
lead to a vehicle fire. Front fog light (if
5 19 W H16
so equipped)
Side turn signal
Type A: Halogen headlights type 6 light (on fender, if 5W —
Type B: LED headlights type so equipped)
Side turn signal
light (on outside
7 — —
rearview mirror, if
so equipped)

NOTE ANSI Inside

 It is not possible to repair or replace only the
trade No.
Item Wattage N00950401858
bulb for the side turn signal light (on fender). or bulb
Check with an authorized Mitsubishi Motors type
dealer or a repair facility of your choice High-mounted
when the light needs to be repaired or 1 — —
stop light
replaced.
 The following lights use an LED-type bulb. License plate
2 5W W5W
Check with an authorized Mitsubishi Motors light
dealer or a repair facility of your choice 3 Back-up light 16 W W16W
when either light needs to be repaired or
replaced. Rear turn signal
4 21 W PY21W
• Headlight (Type B) light
• Parking light/Daytime running light (Type Tail and stop
B) 5 — —
light
9 • Side turn signal light (on outside rearview
mirror)
6 Stop light — —
Rear side-marker
7 — —
light
Rear
NOTE
 The following lights use an LED-type bulb.
Check with an authorized Mitsubishi Motors
dealer or a repair facility of your choice Item Wattage
replaced.
1 Dome light 8W
• High-mounted stop light 2 Trunk room light 5W
• Tail and stop light
• Stop light
• Rear side-marker light


3. To install the bulb, perform the removal
Headlights (Halogen headlights steps in reverse.
Front side-marker lights
type) N00917301825
N00901801317
1. Turn the socket (A) counterclockwise to
1. Pull out the connector (A), and then Headlights (LED headlights remove it.
remove the sealing cover (B). type) Halogen headlights type
N00901901204
NOTE
 The headlights use an LED-type bulb.
dealer or a repair facility of your choice
when the light needs to be repaired or
replaced.
9
Headlight aim adjustment LED headlights type
*- Front of the vehicle N00943200352
The alignment of the headlights should be

2. Unhook the spring (C), which secures the checked by an authorized Mitsubishi Motors
bulb, and then remove the bulb (D). dealer or a repair facility of your choice.
*- Front of the vehicle


2. Pull the bulb out of the socket. 2. Remove the bulb from the socket by turn-
Front turn signal lights ing it counterclockwise while pressing in.
N00943401537
1. Turn the socket (A) counterclockwise to

remove it.
Halogen headlights type
3. To install the bulb, perform the removal 3. To install the bulb, perform the removal
steps in reverse. steps in reverse.
9
LED headlights type


4. Turn the bulb (E) counterclockwise to
Parking lights (Halogen head- Front fog lights (if so equipped) remove it.
lights type) N00943602057
N00917301838 1. To create enough work space, turn the

1. Turn the socket (A) counterclockwise to steering wheel all the way in the direction
remove it. opposite to the side you wish to replace.
2. Remove the clips (A) to turn up the cover
(B).

steps in reverse.
9
NOTE
 When refitting each of the clips, first insert
part (F) of the clip into the hole and then
2. Pull the bulb out of the socket. 3. While pressing the tab (C), pull out the press part (G) into it.
connector (D).

steps in reverse.


4. Turn the socket counterclockwise to • Back-up light bulb
Rear combination lights remove it. Pull the bulb out.
N00943701673
• Rear turn signal light bulb
1. Open the trunk lid.
Turn the bulb counterclockwise while
2. Remove the screws (A) that hold the light
pressing in.
unit.
Back-up light bulb Rear turn signal light
bulb
D- Back-up light
E- Rear turn signal light
9 F- Do not touch the socket because replac-
ing this light is carried out by an autho-
3. Move the light unit toward the rear of the rized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a 6. To install the bulb, perform the removal
vehicle to unfix the notch (B) and pin (C). repair facility of your choice. steps in reverse.
NOTE
NOTE  When mounting the light unit, align the
 The following lights use an LED-type bulb. notch (G) and pin (H) on the light unit with
the clip (I) and hole (J) in the body.
dealer or a repair facility of your choice
replaced.
• Tail and stop light
• Stop light
• Rear side-marker light
5. Remove the bulb from the socket as fol-

lows.

Vehicle care precautions
License plate lights Vehicle care precautions CAUTION

N00944001439 N00945100166 • Nail Polish Remover
1. Turn the socket counterclockwise to In order to maintain the value of your vehicle, These can all be dangerous, and they all can
remove it, and then pull the bulb out of perform regular maintenance using the proper damage your vehicle.
the socket. materials and procedures. Be sure to use only
those materials and procedures that meet your
local environmental pollution control regula- Cleaning the inside of your
tions. Choose the materials you will use care- vehicle
fully, to be sure that they do not contain N00945200095
corrosives. If you are not sure, contact an
After washing the inside of your vehicle with
authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer for help
any cleaner, wipe it dry in a shady, well venti-
in choosing these materials.
lated area.
CAUTION CAUTION 9
 Cleaning products can be dangerous. Some
 Do not use organic substances (solvents,
are poisonous and others are highly flamma-
benzine, kerosene, alcohol, gasoline, etc.) or
ble. Some are dangerous if you breathe their
alkaline or acidic solutions.
fumes in a closed space. When you use any-
These chemicals can cause discoloring,
thing in a container to clean your vehicle, be
staining or cracking of the surface.
sure to follow the instructions. Always open
If you use cleaners or polishing agents, make
your vehicle doors or windows when you’re
sure their ingredients do not include the sub-
cleaning the inside. Never use the following
stances mentioned above.
chemicals to clean your vehicle:
• Gasoline
• Carbon Tetrachloride
• Benzine
NOTE
2. To install the bulb, perform the removal  Always read the instructions on the cleaner
steps in reverse. • Kerosene
label.
• Naphtha
• Acetone
• Turpentine
• Paint Thinner
• Lacquer Thinner

Cleaning the outside of your vehicle

Use a vacuum cleaner and brush to clean
Plastic, vinyl leather, fabric and the seats. If stained, vinyl and synthetic
NOTE
flocked parts leather should be cleaned with an appro-  If genuine leather is wet with water, wipe it
with a dry, soft cloth. If left damp, mildew
N00945300142 priate cleaner. Cloth fabrics can be
may grow.
1. Lightly wipe these off with a soft cloth cleaned with either upholstery cleaner or a
 The genuine leather surface can be damaged
soaked in a 3% solution of gentle soap 3% solution of gentle soap in lukewarm if brushed with a nylon or synthetic fiber
and water. water. brush.
2. To rinse, dip the cloth in fresh water, 2. Clean the carpeting with a vacuum  Organic solvents such as benzine, kerosene,
wring it out well, and wipe off all the cleaner and remove any stains with carpet alcohol, gasoline, or acid or alkaline solvents
soap. cleaner. Oil and grease can be removed by can discolor the genuine leather surface and
lightly dabbing with a clean white cloth should not be used.
NOTE and spot remover.  Genuine leather can mildew if not kept
clean. Clean up any oil stains immediately.
 Do not use cleaners, conditioners, and pro-
 The genuine leather surface may harden and
tectants containing silicones or wax. NOTE shrink if it is exposed to the direct sunlight
9 Such products, when applied to the instru-
ment panels or other parts, may cause reflec-
 If fuzzing is difficult to remove from the seat for long hours. When your vehicle is parked,
upholstery, draw a suitable defuzzing brush place it in the shade as much as possible.
tions on the windshield and obscure vision.
over the surface in one direction.  When the temperature of the vehicle interior
Also, if such products get on the switches of
the electrical accessories, it may lead to fail- rises in summer, vinyl products left on the
ure of these accessories. genuine leather seat may deteriorate and
Genuine leather (if so equipped) stick to the seat.
N00945600187
Upholstery 1. To clean, lightly wipe the leather with a

N00945500128 soft cloth soaked in a 5% solution of gen- Cleaning the outside of your
1. To maintain the value of your new vehi- tle soap and water. vehicle
cle, maintain the upholstery carefully and 2. To rinse, dip the cloth in fresh water, N00945700058
keep the interior clean. wring it out well, and wipe off all the
To protect your vehicle’s finish, wash it often
soap.
and thoroughly. If desired, you may wax your
3. To preserve and protect, use a leather pro-
vehicle using a nonabrasive automobile wax.
tecting agent on the genuine leather sur-
face.

Foreign material CAUTION CAUTION

N00945800033  When washing the underside of your vehicle  Make sure to do the following when using an
Industrial pollution, road tar, bird droppings, or the wheels, wear a pair of gloves to pro- automatic car wash, with help from either
tect your hands. this manual or the car wash operator, to
tree sap, insect remains, sea water and other
 If your vehicle is equipped with rain sensor, avoid damaging your vehicle:
foreign matters can damage the finish on your
place the wiper switch lever in the “OFF” • Fold the outside rearview mirrors.
vehicle.
position to deactivate the rain sensor before • Remove the antenna.
Generally, the longer any foreign material washing the vehicle. Otherwise, the wipers • If your vehicle is equipped with the rain
stays on the finish, the worse the damage. will operate in the presence of water spray sensor, place the wiper switch lever in the
Wash your vehicle as soon as possible when- on the windshield and may get damaged as a “OFF” position to deactivate the rain sen-
ever the finish gets soiled. result. sor.
 Never spray or splash water on the electrical • If your vehicle is equipped with the For-
parts in the engine compartment. This may
Washing damage them. Be careful also when washing
ward Collision Mitigation system (FCM),
turn off the system. Refer to “FCM
N00945901800
the underbody to ensure that water does not ON/OFF switch” on page 5-64.
Chemicals contained in the dirt and dust enter the engine compartment. 9
picked up from air, rain, snow, or road sur-  Avoid automatic car washers that use rotat-
faces can damage the paint and body of your ing brushes. These brushes may scratch the During cold weather
vehicle if left on. paint surface and make it dull.
Frequent washing and waxing is the best way Scratches are more noticeable on darker col- Salt and other chemicals spread on winter
ored vehicles. roads in some geographical areas can have a
to protect your vehicle from this damage.
 Some hot water washing equipment uses detrimental effect on the vehicle underbody.
Do not wash the vehicle in direct sunlight.
high pressure and heat to clean your vehicle. You should flush the underbody with a high
Park the vehicle in the shade and spray it with
Because hot water can damage plastics parts
water to remove dust. Next, using plenty of pressure hose every time you wash the out-
and seep inside your vehicle, make sure you
clean water and a car washing mitt or sponge, side of your vehicle.
do the following when using such equip-
wash the vehicle from top to bottom. ment: Take special care to remove mud or other
Use a mild car washing soap if necessary. • Keep the washing nozzle at least 28 inches debris which could trap and hold salt and
Rinse thoroughly and wipe dry with a cham- (70 cm) away from the vehicle body. moisture.
ois or soft cloth. After washing the vehicle, • When washing around the door glass, hold After washing your vehicle, wipe off all
carefully clean the joints and flanges of the the nozzle at a distance of more than 28 waterdrops from the rubber parts around the
doors, hood, etc., where dirt is likely to inches (70 cm) and at a right angle to the doors to prevent the doors from freezing.
remain. glass surface.


information code plate on the front passenger
NOTE CAUTION door sill.
 When the door is frozen, opening it by force  Do not use gasoline, benzine, kerosene or
may tear off or crack the rubber gasket paint thinners to remove road tar or other dirt
installed around the door. Pour warm water from the vehicle surface. Cleaning plastic parts
to melt the ice. Be sure to thoroughly wipe  Do not put wax on the areas having black N00946300194
off the water after opening the door. To pre- matte coating because it can cause uneven
Use a sponge or chamois to clean these parts.
vent freezing of the weatherstripping on the discoloration, patches, blurs, etc. If these get
doors, hood, etc., treat with silicone lubri- If a vehicle wax sticks to a gray or black
wax on them, wipe the wax off right away
cant. with a soft cloth and warm water. rough surface of the bumper, molding or
lights, the surface may appear white in color.
In this case, wipe it off using lukewarm water
Polishing and a soft cloth or chamois.
Waxing N00946100046
N00946000234
If painted surfaces have been severely dam- CAUTION
Wax your vehicle once or twice a year, or aged and lost their original luster and color
9 when water does not bead up on the paint. tone, polish the surface lightly with a fine
 Do not use a scrubbing brush or other rough
scrubber as these may damage the plastic
Use a soft cloth to put a small amount of wax polishing compound. Avoid limiting your surface.
on the painted surfaces. After the wax has polishing to the damaged surface only; polish  Do not use wax containing compounds (pol-
dried, polish with a dry soft cloth. a somewhat wider area, moving the polishing ishing powder) which may damage the plas-
Do not wax your vehicle in direct sunlight. cloth in one direction. After polishing, flush tic surface.
You should wax when the painted surfaces the compound from the surface and apply a  Do not let plastic parts get soiled with gaso-
are cool. coat of wax to regain a beautiful luster. line, oil, brake fluids, engine oils, greases,
paint thinner, and sulfuric acid (battery elec-
CAUTION Damaged paint
trolyte), as such substances will cause stains,
cracks, or discoloration.
 Waxes containing high abrasive compounds
N00946200092 If any of these get on a plastic part, wipe
should not be used. These waxes remove rust
Small cracks and scratches in the paint coat them up with a soft cloth or chamois and a
and stain effectively from the paintwork, but
mild solution of soap and water. Then rinse
are harmful to the finish of the paint, because should be touched up as soon as possible with
them immediately with water.
they also remove paint/clearcoat. touch-up paint to prevent corrosion.
They are also harmful to other glossy sur- Check body areas facing the road or the tires
faces such as the grille, trim, moldings, etc. carefully for damage to the paint caused by
flying stones, etc. The paint code number for
your vehicle can be found on the vehicle

Chrome parts Window glass

N00946400052 N00946600054
To prevent spots and corrosion of chrome The window glass can usually be cleaned
parts, wash with water, dry thoroughly, and using only a sponge and water. Glass cleaner
apply a nonabrasive automotive wax. If the can be used to remove wax, oil, grease, dead
chrome is severely damaged or pitted, use a insects, etc. After washing the glass, wipe it
commercially available chrome polish. dry with a clean, dry, soft cloth.
Aluminum wheels (if so equipped) Wiper blades

N00946501236 N00946700084
1. Remove dirt using a wet sponge. Use a soft cloth and glass cleaner to remove
2. Use a mild detergent on any dirt that can- grease, dead insects, etc., from the wiper
not be removed easily with water. blades.
Rinse off the detergent after washing the Replace the wiper blades when they no longer 9
wheels. clean the windshield properly.
3. Dry the wheels thoroughly using a cham-
ois leather or a soft cloth.
Engine compartment
N00947000071
CAUTION Never spray or splash water on the electrical

 Do not use a brush or other hard implement accessories in the engine compartment. This
on the wheels. puts the engine at risk of being damaged.
 Do not use any cleaner that contains an abra- Do not bring the circumferential parts, the
sive substance or is acidic or alkaline. Doing
plastic parts and so on into contact with sulfu-
so could cause the coating on the wheels to
ric acid (battery electrolyte) which may
peel or become discolored or stained.
crack, stain or discolor them.
 Do not directly apply hot water using a steam
cleaner or by any other means. If they are in contact, wipe off with soft cloth,
 Contact with seawater or road salt used for chamois or the like and an aqueous solution
de-icing can cause corrosion. Rinse off such of neutral detergent then immediately rinse
substances as soon as possible. the affected parts with plenty of water.

Customer assistance/Reporting Safety Defects
Consumer information (For vehicles sold in U.S.A.) ....................10-2

Reporting Safety Defects ...............................................................10-2
Important facts to know in case of an accident ..............................10-3
10
Consumer information (For vehicles sold in U.S.A.)

their use, however, and may depart signifi- material of the tire to degenerate and reduce
Consumer information (For cantly from the norm due to variations in tire life, and excessive temperature can lead
vehicles sold in U.S.A.) driving habits, service practices and differ- to sudden tire failure. The grade C corre-
N01047101208 ences in road characteristics and climate. sponds to a level of performance which all
This information is provided in compliance passenger car tires must meet under the Fed-
eral Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109.
with the requirements of the National High- Traction AA, A, B, C Grades B and A represent higher levels of
way Traffic Safety Administration, Depart-
ment of Transportation. It provides the performance on the laboratory test wheel than
The traction grades, from highest to lowest, the minimum required by law.
purchasers and/or prospective purchasers
are AA, A, B and C. Those grades represent
with information on reporting safety defects.
the tire’s ability to stop on wet pavement as
measured under controlled conditions on WARNING
 The temperature grade for this tire is
Uniform tire quality grading specified government test surfaces of asphalt
established for a tire that is properly
and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor
inflated and not overloaded. Excessive
DOT quality grades - All passenger vehicle traction performance. speed, underinflation, or excessive load-
tires must conform to Federal Safety Require- ing, either separately or in combination,
10 ments in addition to these grades. The spe- WARNING can cause heat buildup and possible tire
failure.
cific grade rating in each grade category is  The traction grade assigned to this tire is
shown on the side wall of the tires on your based on straight-ahead braking traction
vehicle. tests, and does not include acceleration,
cornering, hydroplaning, or peak traction Reporting Safety Defects
characteristics.
Treadwear N01047201632
If you believe that your vehicle has a

The treadwear grade is a comparative rating Temperature A, B, C defect which could cause a crash or
based on the wear rate of the tire when tested could cause injury or death, you
under controlled conditions on a specified should immediately inform the
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B
government test course. For example, a tire
and C, representing the tire’s resistance to the National Highway Traffic Safety
graded 150 would wear one and one-half
generation of heat and its ability to dissipate Administration (NHTSA) in addi-
(11/2) times as well on the government course heat when tested under controlled conditions
tion to notifying Mitsubishi Motors
as a tire graded 100. The relative performance on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel.
of tires depends upon the actual conditions of Sustained high temperature can cause the Corporation.
10-2 Customer assistance/Reporting Safety Defects

Important facts to know in case of an accident

If NHTSA receives similar com- For vehicles sold in U.S.A. For vehicles sold in Guam
plaints, it may open an investigation,
and if it finds that a safety defect To contact Mitsubishi Motors North To contact Triple J Enterprises Inc.
exists in a group of vehicles, it may America, Inc. call 1-888-648-7820 or call (671)649-3673 or write to:
order a recall and remedy campaign. write to:
However, NHTSA cannot become Triple J Enterprises, Inc.
involved in individual problems Mitsubishi Motors North Amer- P.O. Box 6066
between you, your dealer, or ica, Inc. TAMUNING
Mitsubishi Motors Corporation. Customer Relations Department GUAM 96931
P.O. Box 689040
To contact NHTSA, you may call the
Franklin, TN 37068
Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-
For vehicles sold in Saipan
888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-
9153); go to
For vehicles sold in Puerto Rico To contact Triple J Motors
http://www.safercar.gov; or write to:
call (670)234-7133 or write to:
10
NHTSA Headquarters To contact Mitsubishi Motor Sales of
Caribbean, Inc. Triple J Motors
1200 New Jersey Avenue, SE
call 1-787-251-8715 or write to: P.O. Box 500487
West Building
SAIPAN, MP96950-0487
Washington, DC 20590
Mitsubishi Motor Sales of Carib-
You can also obtain other informa- bean, Inc.
tion about motor vehicle safety from Customer Service Department Important facts to know in
http://www.safercar.gov. P.O. Box 192216 case of an accident
SAN JUAN PR 00919-2216 N01047301271
We hope you will never be involved in an

accident, but there is always that potential
danger. So, please be sure to buckle up and
drive safely.
Customer assistance/Reporting Safety Defects 10-3
Important facts to know in case of an accident

will have to disclose to the consumer when
In the event of an accident Mitsubishi Motors built-in pro- they intend to use non-OEM parts. Since reg-
tection ulations are not consistent on this point,
 Remain calm.
 Check for injuries. Report all injuries to remember you have a choice. So, if you want
the police, and, if necessary, call for an The strength and integrity built into your genuine Mitsubishi Motors parts, you may
ambulance. vehicle is the result of a specific design have to specifically request them. Make cer-
 Record all the details of the accident. This referred to as “Energy Management”. Indi- tain your insurance company understands
will provide you with accurate records of vidual body parts are designed to act as one imitations are not to be used in the repair of
the accident for discussions with your unit in the event of an accident. Shock waves your vehicle. You deserve the best genuine
insurance company and other persons are absorbed by protective panels or are chan- Mitsubishi Motors parts.
who may be acting on your behalf. neled around the passenger compartment.
This important feature is possible because Genuine Mitsubishi Motors
high tensile steel is used in panels and struc-
Key information to discuss with tural parts, something that cannot be guaran- parts
your insurance company teed by the manufacturers of imitation parts.
All Genuine Mitsubishi Motors body panels Genuine Mitsubishi Motors parts are built
10  Understand your repair estimate before
approving repairs.
and support brackets are designed and con- with the high quality and durability standards
structed as important protection features in you expect. Genuine Mitsubishi Motors
 Choosing the repair shop and the brands the event of an accident. By replacing body replacements parts are your guarantee that
of parts that they use on your vehicle is parts with non-Genuine Mitsubishi Motors your vehicle will have all the technological
your decision. parts, your vehicle may no longer meet origi- advantages and maintain the style and protec-
 Ask for genuine Mitsubishi Motors parts. nal equipment specifications. tion of a brand new Mitsubishi Motors.
Many times, to save money, your insur- Remember to ask for genuine Mitsubishi
ance company will recommend imitation Motors parts.
parts that do not meet the original specifi- Consumer rights (For vehicles
cations of fit, finish, corrosion resistance sold in U.S.A.)
or workmanship.
As a consumer requesting repair on your
vehicle, you have consumer rights. Across the
country, State Insurance Commissioners have
begun considering rules on the use of non-
OEM parts. This could mean that repair shops
10-4 Customer assistance/Reporting Safety Defects

Specifications
Vehicle labeling .............................................................................11-2

Vehicle dimensions ........................................................................11-3
Vehicle weights ..............................................................................11-4
Engine specifications .....................................................................11-5
Battery ............................................................................................11-5
Tires and wheels ............................................................................11-5
Capacity .........................................................................................11-6
11
Vehicle labeling
Vehicle labeling 1 - Vehicle emission control Chassis number

N01147401967 information label The chassis number is stamped on the bulk-
Keep a record of the chassis number and
vehicle identification number. Such informa- head as shown in the illustration.
The vehicle emission control information
tion will assist police if your vehicle is stolen. label is affixed on the underside of the engine
hood.
2 - Vehicle identification num-

ber plate
The vehicle identification number is stamped

on the plate riveted to the left front corner of
the vehicle body. It is visible from outside of
the vehicle through the windshield.
11 3 - Air conditioning label
The air conditioning label is affixed on the

inside panel of the engine hood.
4 - Vehicle information code

plate
The vehicle information code plate is located

on the front passenger door sill.
11-2 Specifications
Vehicle dimensions
Engine model/serial number Certification label

N01148200242
The engine model and serial number are The certification label is located on the
stamped on the cylinder block as shown in driver’s door sill.
the illustration.

Vehicle dimensions 11
N01147501652
Tire and loading information Overall length 169.5 in (4,305 mm)

placard Overall width 65.7 in (1,670 mm)
N01148101668
Overall height 59.3 in (1,505 mm)
The tire and loading information
Wheel base 100.4 in (2,550 mm)
placard is located on the driver’s
door sill.
Specifications 11-3
Vehicle weights
Vehicle weights
N01147602096
Continuously variable transmis-

Item Manual transaxle
sion (CVT)
Gross vehicle weight rating (GVWR) 3,053 lb (1,385 kg) 3,108 lb (1,410 kg)
Gross axle weight rat- Front 1,609 lb (730 kg)
ing (GAWR) Rear 1,521 lb (690 kg)
Vehicle capacity weight 827 lb (375 kg)
Seating capacity 5 persons
Maximum roof load 110 lb (50 kg)
NOTE
11  Roofload is important because it affects the vehicle capacity weight.
Refer to “Loading cargo on the roof” on page 6-11.
GVWR: maximum total weight (load) limit specified for the vehicle
GAWR: maximum weight (load) limit specified for the front or rear axle
Seating capacity: the maximum number of occupants
11-4 Specifications
Engine specifications
Engine specifications
N01147701612
Engine model 3A92

Engine displacement 72.8 CID (1,193 cm3)
No. of cylinders and cylinder arrangement Inline-3
Bore 2.95 in (75.0 mm)
Stroke 3.54 in (90.0 mm)
Compression ratio 10.5:1
Thermostat valve opening temperature 189 °F (87 °C)
Spark plugs NGK LZFR5DI-11
Spark plug gap .040 to .043 in (1.0 to 1.1 mm)
Firing order 1-3-2
Battery Size 14 x 5 J
15 x 5 NOTE 11
N01147800296 1/2J  Contact an authorized Mitsubi-
55D23L (356CCA/99RC) Wheel PCD 3.93 in (100 mm) shi Motors dealer for details on
Offset the combination used on your
Battery is a 12 volt type. 1.5 in (38 mm) vehicle.
(Inset)
 These tires satisfy vehicle load-
Tires and wheels PCD: Pitch Circle Diameter ing conditions described in this
N01147901975 (installation holes) owner’s manual.
165/65 175/55
Tire R14 R15
79S 77V
Specifications 11-5
Capacity
Capacity
N01148002475
Item Capacity Lubricants

Fuel
9.2 gal (35 L) Refer to “Fuel selection” on page 3-2
(approximate)
Oil pan 2.9 qt (2.8 L) Engine oils displaying the ILSAC certification mark (“star-
burst” symbol) on the container.
Engine oil
Oil filter .21 qt (0.2 L) If these oils are not available, an API classification SP or
higher can be used.
Mitsubishi Motors Genuine NEW MULTI GEAR OIL ECO
Manual transaxle 1.7 qt (1.6 L)
API GL-4 SAE 75W-80
Refer to “Continuously variable transmission (CVT) fluid” on
Continuously variable transmission (CVT) 7.4 qt (7.0 L)
page 9-9.
Brake As required Conforming to Brake fluid DOT3 or DOT4
Hood lock release mechanism and safety catch As required Multipurpose type grease NLGI Grade 2
11 Manual trans-
Engine coolant 4.2 qt (4.0 L)
axle Mitsubishi Motors Genuine Super Long Life Coolant Premium
{Includes .53 qt (0.5 L) in reserve
or equivalent*
tank} CVT 4.8 qt (4.6 L)
Washer fluid 2.6 qt (2.5 L) —
Refer to the “Air con-
Refrigerant (air conditioning) ditioning label” on HFO-1234yf
page 11-2.
*: similar high quality ethylene glycol based non-silicate, non-amine, non-nitrate and non-borate coolant with long life hybrid organic acid tech-
nology
11-6 Specifications
Alphabetical index
Checking battery electrolyte level .... 9-11 Charging system warning light ............. 5-90
A Disconnection and connection ......... 9-11 Child restraint systems ........................ 4-14
Accessory (installation) ......................... 3-5 During cold weather ....................... 9-11
Child safety locks for rear door ............ 5-28
Specification.................................. 11-5
Active stability control (ASC) .............. 5-53 Cleaning
Bottle holders.................................... 5-109
Air cleaner filter ................................... 9-8 Inside of your vehicle...................... 9-35
Brake Outside of your vehicle ................... 9-36
Air conditioning
Fluid ............................................. 11-6
Automatic air conditioning ................ 7-4 Clutch
Important air conditioning operating tips.. Brake assist system............................. 5-50 Pedal free play................................ 9-20
7-10 Braking ............................................... 6-5 Consumer information......................... 10-2
Air purifier ......................................... 7-11 Anti-lock braking system ................ 5-51
Continuously variable transmission (CVT) ...
Hose ............................................. 9-23
Airbag ............................................... 4-25 5-43
Pad wear alarm .............................. 5-49
Aluminum wheels ............................... 9-39 Fluid....................................... 9-9, 11-6
Parking brake................................. 5-33
Selector lever operation ................... 5-43
Antenna ............................................. 7-11 Pedal............................................. 5-48
Selector lever positions.................... 5-45
Anti-lock braking system..................... 5-51 Pedal free play ............................... 9-20
Power brakes ................................. 5-48 Convenience hook............................. 5-110
Arm rest........................................ 4-4, 4-5 Service brake ................................. 5-48 Coolant (engine) .......................... 9-7, 11-6
Assist grips ...................................... 5-110 Warning lights ............................... 5-88 Cruise control ..................................... 5-56
Automatic air conditioning .................... 7-4 Break-in recommendations.................... 5-2 Cup holders ...................................... 5-108 12
Automatic High Beam (AHB) .............. 5-94 Bulb capacity ..................................... 9-29
Bulb location ..................................... 9-29 D
B Defogger (rear window) .................... 5-104
Back-up light C Defrosting or defogging (windshield, door
Bulb capacity ................................. 9-29 California Perchlorate Materials windows) ........................................... 7-9
Replacement .................................. 9-34 Requirements..................................... 3-7 Dimensions ........................................ 11-3
Ball joint, steering linkage seals and drive Capacity ............................................ 11-6
shaft boots........................................ 9-23 Dimmer (high/low beam change).......... 5-94
Cargo loads........................................ 6-11 Disc brake pads .................................. 9-23
Battery............................................... 9-11
Charging system warning light......... 5-90 Catalytic converter ............................... 9-3 Dome light ....................................... 5-107
Certification label............................... 11-3
12-1
Alphabetical index
Bulb capacity ................................. 9-30 Event Data Recording........................... 3-7 Fuel
Door-ajar warning buzzer .................... 5-90 Exhaust system ................................... 9-23 Filling the fuel tank........................... 3-3
Fuel economy................................... 6-2
Door-ajar warning light ....................... 5-90
Fuel hoses...................................... 9-22
Doors F Fuel remaining warning display ....... 5-82
Lock.............................................. 5-25 Floor mat............................................. 6-2 Fuel selection ................................... 3-2
Power door locks ............................ 5-27 Tank capacity................................. 11-6
Fluid
Driving during cold weather .................. 6-4 Brake fluid ..................................... 11-6 Fuel Pump Shut-off System ................. 8-15
Driving, alcohol and drugs..................... 6-2 Continuously variable transmission (CVT) Fuel remaining display ........................ 5-82
fluid...................................... 9-9, 11-6
Fuses ................................................. 9-24
Engine coolant ......................... 9-7, 11-6
E Manual transaxle............................. 11-6 Fusible links....................................... 9-24
Electric power steering system (EPS) ... 5-52 Washer fluid .......................... 9-10, 11-6
Electric rear window defogger switch . 5-104 Fluid capacities and lubricants.............. 11-6 G
Electronic immobilizer (Anti-theft starting Forward Collision Mitigation system (FCM). General maintenance
system) ..................................... 5-3, 5-20 5-60 Maintenance................................... 9-22
Emission-control system maintenance .. 9-21 Free-hand advanced security transmitter General vehicle data............................ 11-3
Engine (F.A.S.T.-key) ................................... 5-9 Genuine Mitsubishi Motors parts............ 3-6
Compartment ................................... 9-5
12 Coolant................................... 9-7, 11-6
Front fog lights Glove compartment........................... 5-108
Bulb capacity.................................. 9-29
High coolant temperature warning light .... Indicators ....................................... 5-88
5-90 Replacement................................... 9-33 H
Hood ............................................... 9-4 Switch............................................ 5-99 Hazard warning flasher switch ............. 5-99
Model............................................ 11-3
Front seat adjustment............................ 4-2 Hazard warning lights ......................... 5-88
Oil and oil filter....................... 9-5, 11-6
Overheating ..................................... 8-4 Front side-marker lights Head restraints...................................... 4-5
Serial number................................. 11-3 Bulb capacity.................................. 9-29 Headlights
Specification .................................. 11-5 Replacement................................... 9-31 Bulb capacity ................................. 9-29
Engine hood......................................... 9-4 Front turn signal lights Dimmer ......................................... 5-94
Bulb capacity.................................. 9-29 Headlight flasher ............................ 5-94
Engine switch..................................... 5-13
Replacement................................... 9-32 Switch ........................................... 5-91
12-2
Alphabetical index
High beam indicator............................ 5-88 Storage............................................ 8-5
High coolant temperature warning light 5-90 Jump-starting the engine ....................... 8-2 O
High-mounted stop light Octane number ..................................... 3-2
Bulb capacity ................................. 9-29 K Oil
Hill start assist .................................... 5-49 Engine oil ............................... 9-5, 11-6
Key slot............................................. 5-19
Manual transaxle oil................. 9-9, 11-6
Hood lock release mechanism and safety Keyless entry system .................... 5-6, 5-22
catch................................................ 9-23 Oil pressure warning light.................... 5-90
Keys ................................................... 5-2
Hook Operation mode .................................. 5-14
Convenience hook ........................ 5-110 Operation under adverse driving conditions..
Horn switch...................................... 5-104
L 8-13
Labeling ............................................ 11-2 Outside rearview mirrors ..................... 5-37
I Lane Departure Warning (LDW) ......... 5-68 Overheating.......................................... 8-4
License plate lights
If the vehicle breaks down ..................... 8-2
Bulb capacity ................................. 9-29 P
Ignition switch.................................... 5-38 Replacement .................................. 9-35
Important facts to know in case of an accident Parking ................................................ 6-5
Link System...................................... 5-104
10-3 Parking brake lever stroke ............... 9-21
Loading information ............................. 6-6
Indicator and warning light package ..... 5-87 Parking brake ............................ 5-33, 9-21
Lubricants ......................................... 11-6
Parking lights
12
Indicators ........................................... 5-88
Bulb capacity ................................. 9-29
Information display ............................. 5-79
M Polishing............................................ 9-38
Inside emergency trunk lid release........ 5-30
Malfunction indicator light .................. 5-89 Power brakes ...................................... 5-48
Inside rearview mirror ......................... 5-35
Manual transaxle ................................ 5-41 Power outlet ..................................... 5-106
Instrument panel light dimmer control .. 5-80 Oil .......................................... 9-9, 11-6
Power windows .................................. 5-31
Interior lights.................................... 5-107 Shift points .................................... 5-42
Puncture (Tire changing) ....................... 8-6
Modifications to and racing of your vehicle ..
J 3-5
Multi-information display ................... 5-77 R
Jack
Garage jack up position ..................... 9-3 Radio
12-3
Alphabetical index
General information about your radio 7-12 Seat belt instructions ........................ 4-9
Rear combination lights Seat belt pre-tensioners.................... 4-13 T
Bulb capacity ................................. 9-29 Seat belt use during pregnancy ......... 4-13 Tail lights
Replacement .................................. 9-34 Seats ................................................... 4-2 Bulb capacity ................................. 9-29
Rear seat .............................................. 4-5 Arm rest .................................... 4-4, 4-5 Replacement .................................. 9-34
Front seats ....................................... 4-2 Tank capacity ..................................... 11-6
Rear side-marker lights
Head restraints ................................. 4-5
Bulb capacity ................................. 9-29 Ticket holder .................................... 5-106
Heated seats..................................... 4-4
Replacement .................................. 9-34 Tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS)......
Seats and restraint systems ................ 4-2
Rear turn signal lights 5-71
Service brake ...................................... 5-48
Bulb capacity ................................. 9-29 Tires.................................................. 9-12
Replacement .................................. 9-34 Service precautions .............................. 9-2
Inflation pressures .......................... 9-16
Rear-view camera ............................... 5-74 Side turn signal lights Maintenance................................... 9-18
Bulb capacity.................................. 9-29 Quality grading .............................. 10-2
Rearview mirror
Inside rearview mirror..................... 5-35 Snow tires .......................................... 9-20 Replacing tires and wheels .............. 9-18
Outside rearview mirrors ................. 5-37 Spark plugs......................................... 9-22 Rotation......................................... 9-18
Size (tire and wheel) ....................... 11-5
Replacement of light bulbs .................. 9-28 Starting the engine............................... 5-39
Snow tires...................................... 9-20
Replacing tires and wheels .................. 9-18 Steering Tire and loading information placard 11-3
Electric power steering system (EPS) 5-52
12 Reporting Safety Defects..................... 10-2
Steering wheel height adjustment...... 5-34
Tire chains ..................................... 9-20
To change a tire................................ 8-6
Stop lights Tread wear indicator ....................... 9-18
S Bulb capacity.................................. 9-29 Tools ................................................... 8-5
Safe driving techniques ......................... 6-4 Replacement................................... 9-34 Storage ............................................ 8-5
Seat belts ............................................. 4-7 Storage spaces .................................. 5-108 Towing .............................................. 8-12
Adjustable seat belt shoulder anchor. 4-12
Sun visors......................................... 5-106 Trailer towing..................................... 6-12
Child restraint systems .................... 4-14
Front passenger seat belt warning light ..... Supplemental Restraint System............. 4-25 Trunk lid............................................ 5-28
4-11 How the Supplemental Restraint System
Trunk room light
Maintenance and inspection............. 4-25 works........................................... 4-28
Bulb capacity ................................. 9-30
Seat belt extender ........................... 4-13 Maintenance service ........................ 4-39
Turn signal light
Seat belt force limitter system .......... 4-14
12-4
Alphabetical index
Indicators ....................................... 5-88 Weights ............................................. 11-4
Turn signal lights Wheel
Lever ............................................. 5-98 Covers........................................... 8-11
Specification.................................. 11-5
U Wiper
Switch.......................................... 5-100
USB input terminal ........................... 5-104
Wiper blades.................................. 9-21
How to connect a USB memory device ....
5-105
How to connect an iPod or smartphone ....
5-105
V
Vanity mirror ................................... 5-106
Vehicle care precautions...................... 9-35
Vehicle dimensions............................. 11-3
Vehicle labeling.................................. 11-2
Vehicle preparation before driving.......... 6-3
Vehicle weights .................................. 11-4
12
Vents ................................................... 7-2
W
Warning lights .................................... 5-88
Washer
Fluid..................................... 9-10, 11-6
Switch ............................... 5-100, 5-103
Washing............................................. 9-37
Waxing .............................................. 9-38
12-5
How to calculate your gasoline mileage

NOTE
Name of Owner Date of Purchase
Address of Owner Model of Vehicle
Name and Address of Dealer Vehicle Identification Number
Maintenance record
Kilometers
Service Performed Date Inspection and Maintenance Item
Miles

2022 Mitsubishi Mirage g4 48

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

2022 Mitsubishi Mirage g4 48

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

2022 Mitsubishi Mirage g4 48

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

9290K125

2022 / Owner’s Manual

Introduction Throughout this manual the words WARNING and CAUTION

Your Authorized Mitsubishi Motors Dealer will be happy to assist you

This manual includes instructions for standard and optional equipment

©2021 Mitsubishi Motors Corporation Printed in Thailand

Instruments and controls

1 Instruments and controls

Combination headlights and dimmer switch P.5-91

Wiper and washer switch P.5-100

Engine switch (if so equipped) P.5-13

Cruise control switches

Lane Departure Warning (LDW) switch

Active stability control (ASC) OFF switch

Steering wheel remote control switches

Instruments and controls

Side vents P.7-2

Engine hood release lever P.9-4 Glove compartment P.5-108

Key slot (if so equipped) P.5-21

Trunk lid release lever P.5-28

Microphone (if so equipped)

Assist grips P.5-110

Seat belts P.4-7 Head restraints P.4-5

Supplemental restraint system (SRS)-curtain

Supplemental restraint system

Trunk room light P.9-30

Sensor [for Automatic High Beam (AHB), Power window P.5-31

Engine hood F.A.S.T.-key (Free-hand Advanced

Headlights P.5-91, 9-29, 9-31 Headlights P.5-91, 9-29, 9-31

Front turn signal lights

Front side-marker lights Front side-marker lights

Tire pressure monitoring system P.5-71

Rear-view camera P.5-74

Trunk lid P.5-28

Stop lights P.9-29, 9-34

Back-up light P.9-29, 9-34

If this warning light comes on or flashes while you’re driving...

If this warning light comes on or flashes while you’re driving...

Warning lights Do this Ref. Page

 Park your vehicle in a safe place and stop the engine.

 Park your vehicle in a safe place and stop the engine.

Quick index 2-1

If this warning light comes on or flashes while you’re driving...

 Park your vehicle in a safe place.

2-2 Quick index

If this warning light comes on or flashes while you’re driving...

SRS warning light

 Have your continuously variable transmission (CVT) checked at an authorized

Quick index 2-3

If this warning light comes on or flashes while you’re driving...

2-4 Quick index

If this warning light comes on or flashes while you’re driving...

Lane Departure Warning (LDW) light

Automatic High Beam (AHB) warn-

Quick index 2-5

If this warning light comes on or flashes while you’re driving...

Lane Departure Warning (LDW) light

2-6 Quick index

If this problem occurs...